Panasonic VCR HD1700pe User Manual
Digital HD  
Video Cassette Recorder  
Operating Instructions  
P
E
Model AJ-  
Thank you for purchasing this product.  
Before operating this product, please read the instructions carefully and save this manual for future use.  
VQT0E88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
For your safety  
For U.S.A. and Canada  
CAUTION  
FCC Note:  
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.  
To assure continued compliance follow the attached  
installation instructions and do not make any  
unauthorized modifications.  
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK  
DO NOT OPEN  
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK,  
DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).  
NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.  
REFER TO SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.  
This equipment has been tested and found to comply  
with the limits for a class A digital device, pursuant to  
Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed  
to provide reasonable protection against harmful  
interference when the equipment is operated in a  
commercial environment. This equipment generates,  
uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if  
not installed and used in accordance with the  
instruction manual, may cause harmful interference  
to radio communications. Operation of this equipment  
in a residential area is likely to cause harmful  
interference in which case the user will be required to  
correct the interference at his own expense.  
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol,  
within an equilateral triangle, is intended to  
alert the user to the presence of uninsulated  
“dangerous voltage” within the product’s  
enclosure that may be of sufficient  
magnitude to constitute a risk of electric  
shock to persons.  
The exclamation point within an equilateral  
triangle is intended to alert the user to the  
presence of important operating and  
maintenance (service) instructions in the  
literature accompanying the appliance.  
CAUTION:  
This apparatus can be operated at a voltage in the  
range of 100 – 240 V AC.  
Voltage other than 120 V is not intended for U.S.A.  
and Canada.  
CAUTION:  
Operation at a voltage other than 120 V AC may  
require the use of a different AC plug. Please contact  
either a local or foreign Panasonic authorized service  
center for assistance in selecting an alternate AC  
plug.  
Notice (U.S.A. only):  
This product has a fluorescent lamp that contains  
a small amount of mercury. It also contains lead  
in some components. Disposal of these materials  
may be regulated in your community due to  
environmental considerations. For disposal or  
recycling information please contact your local  
authorities, or the Electronics Industries Alliance:  
<http://www.eiae.org.>  
For Europe  
CAUTION:  
DO NOT REMOVE PANEL COVER BY UN-  
SCREWING  
To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not remove  
cover. No user serviceable parts inside.  
indicates safety information.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
For your safety  
Caution for AC Mains Lead  
FOR YOUR SAFETY PLEASE READ THE FOLLOWING TEXT CAREFULLY.  
This product is equipped with 2 types of AC mains cable. One is for continental Europe, etc. and the other one is only  
for U.K.  
Appropriate mains cable must be used in each local area, since the other type of mains cable is not suitable.  
FOR CONTINENTAL EUROPE, ETC.  
FOR U.K. ONLY  
Not to be used in the U.K.  
If the plug supplied is not suitable for your socket  
outlet, it should be cut off and appropriate one fitted.  
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this  
appliance may not correspond with the coloured  
markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed  
as follows:  
FOR U.K. ONLY  
This appliance is supplied with a moulded three pin  
mains plug for your safety and convenience.  
A 13 amp fuse is fitted in this plug.  
•
The wire which is coloured GREEN-AND-YELLOW  
must be connected to the terminal in the plug which  
is marked with the letter E or by the Earth symbol Ó  
or coloured GREEN or GREEN-AND-YELLOW.  
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected  
to the terminal in the plug which is marked with the  
letter N or coloured BLACK.  
Should the fuse need to be replaced please ensure that  
the replacement fuse has a rating of 13 amps and that it  
is approved by ASTA or BSI to BS1362.  
Check for the ASTA mark Ï or the BSI mark Ì on the  
body of the fuse.  
•
•
If the plug contains a removable fuse cover you must  
ensure that it is refitted when the fuse is replaced.  
If you lose the fuse cover the plug must not be used  
until a replacement cover is obtained.  
The wire which is coloured BROWN must be  
connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked  
with the letter L or coloured RED.  
A replacement fuse cover can be purchased from your  
local Panasonic Dealer.  
How to replace the fuse  
1. Open the fuse compartment with a screwdriver.  
IF THE FITTED MOULDED PLUG IS UNSUITABLE  
FOR THE SOCKET OUTLET IN YOUR HOME THEN  
THE FUSE SHOULD BE REMOVED AND THE PLUG  
CUT OFF AND DISPOSED OF SAFELY. THERE IS A  
DANGER OF SEVERE ELECTRICAL SHOCK IF THE  
CUT OFF PLUG IS INSERTED INTO ANY 13 AMP  
SOCKET.  
If a new plug is to be fitted please observe the wiring  
code as shown below.  
2. Replace the fuse.  
If in any doubt please consult a qualified electrician.  
WARNING: THIS APPLIANCE MUST BE EARTHED.  
IMPORTANT: The wires in this mains lead are coloured  
in accordance with the following code:  
Fuse  
Green-and-Yellow:  
Blue:  
Brown:  
Earth  
Neutral  
Live  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Contents  
For your safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2  
General outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6  
Standard accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6  
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7  
Parts and Their Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8  
ASSEMBLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58  
INSERT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59  
SETUP MENU/SYSTEM MENU . . . . . . . . . . .60  
FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62  
PF1/PF2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64  
CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69  
50P IN/OUT ASSIGN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8  
Time code display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16  
Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18  
O
O
O
System menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78  
Setup menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81  
Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20  
Example of connections performed for  
one VTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20  
Example of connections performed for  
two VTRs (deck-to-deck) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20  
Example of system connections in  
23/24 Hz or 25 Hz (HD) mode . . . . . . . . . . . . .21  
Example of system connections in  
25 Hz (SD) mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21  
Example of connections with an  
editing controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22  
O
O
O
O
O
BASIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81  
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84  
INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87  
EDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88  
TAPE PROTECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90  
TIME CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91  
VIDEO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93  
AUDIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98  
MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104  
Connections with Dolby-E components . . . . .104  
How to switch the system frequency . . . . . . .105  
Selecting the recording/playback format  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Concerning tapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23  
Turning on the power and inserting  
the cassette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24  
STOP and STANDBY modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24  
Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25  
Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26  
Jog/shuttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27  
Manual editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28  
Preroll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28  
Automatic editing (deck-to-deck) . . . . . . . . . . . . .29  
and sync signals which support the  
operation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105  
Menu management accompanying  
O
switching the system frequency . . . . . . . . . . .106  
Time code and user’s bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111  
Time code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111  
User’s bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111  
Setting the internal time code . . . . . . . . . . . .111  
Setting the external time code . . . . . . . . . . . .112  
Cue time registration, preroll and cue-up  
(These functions work only on the HOME,  
PF1 and PF2 screens.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112  
Time code and user’s bit playback . . . . . . . .112  
O
O
O
O
O
Switch settings and adjustments . . . . . . . . . . .29  
Selecting the editing mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30  
Registering the edit points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30  
Checking the edit points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31  
Modifying edit points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31  
Previewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32  
Automatic editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32  
Reviewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Superimpose screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113  
Selecting the audio recording channels and  
monitor output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114  
Display saving function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115  
Rack mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116  
Video head cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117  
Condensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117  
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117  
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118  
Audio split editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34  
Variable memory function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36  
Function menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38  
General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38  
Allocating the function keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39  
How to switch the settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40  
HOME . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41  
VIDEO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47  
AUDIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49  
TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51  
CUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52  
DIAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55  
MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
DIAG menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118  
Warning messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120  
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120  
O
O
O
RS-232C interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122  
Connector signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128  
Printed circuit boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .129  
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
General outline  
The model AJ-HD1700 is a DVCPRO HD-LP format  
HD digital video cassette recorder which uses 1/4˝  
wide compact cassette tapes.  
It can record, play back and edit 1080/59.94i (60i),  
720/59.94p (60p) and 1080/50i HD signals and also  
play back existing DVCPRO (25 Mbps or 50 Mbps)  
tapes.  
By mobilizing highly efficient digital compression  
technology to assure a high picture quality, this VTR  
significantly minimizes deterioration in the picture  
quality and sound quality during the dubbing process.  
It features a compact size of 4U and a lightweight  
design that enables it to be carried around with ease,  
and to be readily installed in a 19-inch rack.  
It is also capable of converting from sources with a  
720/24p over 60p (720/25p over 60p) format recorded  
using a variable frame rate camera into a 1080/24psf  
(1080/25psf) format and outputting the resulting  
signals, thus fulfilling the needs of applications in the  
cinema film production field.  
The equipment is set up using an interactive system  
whereby the operator manipulates the function  
buttons on the front panel and observes the menu  
screens on the front panel’s LED monitor.  
In terms of the editing features, this VTR is capable of  
both assemble editing and insert editing.  
Further, the HD-SD conversion facility of its format  
converter, which is provided as a standard accessory,  
extends the uses of this VTR to encompass  
interfacing with existing SD systems and into  
configuring of HD systems.  
Standard accessories  
Power cord (AJ-HD1700P) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1  
Power cord (AJ-HD1700E) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Features  
Compact size and light weight  
Time codes  
This is a 4U digital VTR. Using the rack-mounting adapters  
(AJ-MA75P: optional accessory), it can also be easily  
housed in a 19-inch rack.  
This VTR comes with a built-in time code generator  
(TCG)/time code reader (TCR).  
In addition to the internal time code, an external time code  
can also be input and recorded as the LTC on the VTR.  
Up to 126 minutes of recording  
Multi-functional interfaces  
Using the DVCPRO HD-LP recording system, up to 126  
minutes of material can be recorded on the newly developed  
1/4˝ XL-size cassette tape.  
•
Serial digital input/output connector  
The VTR comes with an HD component serial interface  
input/output connector. This one BNC connector enables  
HD component video signals and 8-channels digital audio  
signals to be interfaced. (SMPTE 292M, 299M, BTA S-  
004)  
High picture quality  
The VTR’s high picture quality is achieved by 4:2:2 HD  
component signal recording using a recording rate (100  
Mbps) which is 4 times higher than that of the existing  
DVCPRO format.  
It is also equipped with an HD/SD format converter as a  
standard accessory so that SD component serial signals  
can also be output. (SMPTE 259M-C, 272M-A, 294M)  
Analog video output connector  
1080i/720p (*1), 59.94 Hz/60 Hz/50 Hz signal  
switching  
By making menu selections, the signals of the respective  
formats can be recorded and played back.  
•
Composite signals are output during DVCPRO50- or  
DVCPRO-compatible playback, DV playback, DVCAM  
playback and down-conversion.  
•
•
AES/EBU audio input/output connectors  
Digital audio input/output connectors for 8 channels are  
featured as a standard accessory.  
*1: When the system frequency of 50 Hz has been selected,  
recording and playback using the 720p format are not possible.  
SDTI input/output connector  
Frame rate conversion function  
Use of the SDTI board (optional accessory) enables  
interfacing with the compressed component signals still in  
their original form. (SMPTE 305M, 321M)  
By making menu selections, the VTR can output signals  
after converting them to the 1080/24psf (25psf) format when  
it plays back a tape recorded by a variable frame rate  
camera at a frame rate of 24fps (25fps).  
•
•
SD signal up-conversion and recording  
Using the input up-converter board (optional accessory),  
SD component serial signals (SMPTE 259M-C) can be  
up-converted and recorded as HD signals.  
9-pin RS-422A and RS-232C remote control  
connectors  
SDI interface  
The VTR comes with an HD serial digital interface as a  
standard accessory.  
In addition to the standard 9-pin serial remote (RS-422A)  
control connector, the VTR is provided with RS-232C and  
50-pin parallel remote control connectors.  
The RS-422A facility enables parallel operation if a loop  
connection has been established between the VTR and  
another VTR.  
Playback compatibility with DVCPRO systems  
Besides DVCPRO HD-LP recording and playback, the VTR  
can also play back tapes which have been recorded using  
the existing DVCPRO HD, DVCPRO50 and DVCPRO  
systems.  
Consumer-use DV tapes (SP) and DVCAM tapes can also  
be played back on this VTR.  
8-channel high-sound-quality digital audio  
The 8-channel PCM audio feature allows for not only  
independent editing but mixing as well on all 8 channels.  
One channel is provided for the analog cue track.  
Digital slow motion/dial jog  
Panasonic’s unique digital slow motion technology enables  
clear playback (of tapes recorded using the DVCPRO HD-  
LP system) at speeds ranging from j1k to i2k.  
<Note>  
Menu-driven setup  
The setup settings, which are conducted prior to operating  
the VTR, are performed while the operator views the setup  
menus either on the VTR’s LCD monitor or on a TV monitor.  
Some noise may occur during slow playback (using an  
external controller) at speeds of almost exactly j1k or  
i2k.  
Multi-functional front panel with LCD monitor  
The front panel’s multiple functions, including the LCD  
monitor for monitoring images, the function buttons and  
large-size display panel, are contained within the 4U  
dimensions and designed to improve operating ease.  
Search speed  
Search speed enables tapes (recorded using the HD-LP  
system) to be played back with color images at speeds of up  
to 100 times in the forward or reverse direction.  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Parts and Their Functions  
Front panel  
5 1 67  
2
3
4
3Cassette insertion slot  
If the slot’s orange plate is visible, it means that a  
cassette tape is already inserted.  
EJECT  
XL/L/M  
-
cassette  
Do not insert S-cassette  
POWER OFF  
ON  
without adapter  
CH1  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CUE  
REMOTE  
50P  
CH CONDITION  
MONITOR FULL/FINE  
R
9P  
RS-232C  
L
HEADPHONES  
SHTL  
REV  
JOG  
VAR  
ADJUST  
PUSH-INTER  
HOME  
RF1  
TC  
RF2  
CUE  
ASSEM  
INSERT  
4EJECT button  
VIDEO UNITY  
FWD  
AUDIO UNITY DIAG  
MENU  
When this button is pressed, the cassette is  
unloaded, and a few seconds later it is ejected  
automatically.  
STAND BY PLAYER RECORDER INPUT CHECK  
SHIFT  
F1  
DEF  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
SERVO  
PLAY  
REC INHIBIT  
REC  
ABC  
GHI  
9
EDIT  
REW  
AUDIO CH SELECT  
CH CH CH  
A
IN  
A
OUT  
7
JKL  
8
PREVIEW/  
REVIEW  
PRE-  
ROLL  
CH  
1
CH  
5
CH  
2
CH  
6
CH  
3
7
4
8
MNO PQRS  
4
5
6
3
T
BS  
ENT  
F
AUTO  
EDIT  
TUV WXYZ  
TRIM  
SET  
STOP  
FF  
1
0
2
PUSH  
LOCK  
IN  
OUT  
C
REC  
P8  
REC  
P8  
REC  
P8  
REC  
P8  
FULL  
FULL  
When CTL appears on the counter display, the  
display is reset.  
1POWER switch  
5Headphones jack  
The sound heard during recording, playback or  
editing can be monitored through headphones  
when stereo headphones are connected to this  
jack.  
2Audio level meter  
The audio information is displayed here.  
• The levels of the CH1, CH2, CH3, CH4, CH5,  
CH6, CH7 and CH8 PCM audio signals and level  
of the CUE track signal are displayed here.  
• The levels of the input signals are displayed  
during recording and when E-E is selected.  
During playback, the levels of the playback  
signals are displayed. In the INPUT CHECK  
status, the levels of the input signals are  
displayed for CH1 to CH8.  
• Input signal display for each of the channels  
The indicators for the selected input signals light.  
(SDI lights when the SD SDI input signal is  
selected.)  
6Volume control dial  
This control dial is used to adjust the volume level  
of the headphones and monitor output.  
Whether the volume level of the monitor output is to  
be coupled together with that of the headphones to  
this dial or separated can be selected using the  
setup menu item No.712 (MONI OUT). (Note that  
the volume level of the headphones is coupled at all  
times.) When the volume levels have been  
separated, the UNITY value (prescribed value)  
applies to the monitor output.  
If an input signal has been selected but it has not  
actually been input,the AES, HDSDI, SDI or  
SDTI indicator will blink if a signal corresponding  
to one of these indicators was selected whereas  
the ANA indicator will remain lighted if it was an  
ANA signal that was selected.  
7Channel condition lamps  
These lamps light to indicate the error rate  
status.  
(Green “ amber “ red)  
Green: This lights when the error rates for the  
video and audio playback signals are both at  
acceptable levels.  
When the internal signal (INT SG) has been  
selected, all the AES, ANA, HDSDI, SDI and  
SDTI indicators light.  
Amber: This lights when the error rate for either the  
video or audio playback signals has deteriorated.  
The playback picture and sound remain  
unaffected even while this lamp is lighted.  
Red: This lights when correction or interpolation  
has been engaged for either the video or audio  
playback signals.  
All the indicator are off in the 23/24 Hz mode or  
25 Hz (HD or SD) mode.  
Input signal display  
AES ANA  
AES ANA  
HD SDI SDTI  
HD SDI SDTI  
dB  
0
dB  
Level meter  
-
-
4
8
•4  
•3  
•2  
•1  
0
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
•16  
•12  
•8  
Reference level (j18 dB)  
(AJ-HD1700E)  
-
-
-
-
-
-
12  
16  
20  
25  
30  
40  
•4  
Reference level (j20 dB)  
(AJ-HD1700P)  
0
-
-
-
-
1
2
3
4
-
-
-
-
5
10  
20  
-
L R  
L R  
Left (L) and right (R)  
monitor channel displays  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Parts and Their Functions  
:REMOTE buttons and RS-232C display  
These buttons are used when this VTR is to be  
controlled from an external component using the  
REMOTE, RS-232C or parallel connector.  
Front panel  
<
8
9 :  
=
;
EJECT  
9P: When this button is pressed for 2 or more  
seconds, its LED lights, and the 9-pin REMOTE  
connector is selected.  
XL/L/M-cassette  
Do not insert S-cassette  
POWER OFF  
ON  
without adapter  
CH1  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CUE  
REMOTE  
50P  
CH CONDITION  
MONITOR FULL/FINE  
R
9P  
RS-232C  
L
HEADPHONES  
SHTL  
REV  
JOG  
VAR  
ADJUST  
PUSH-INTER  
HOME  
RF1  
TC  
RF2  
CUE  
ASSEM  
INSERT  
VIDEO UNITY  
FWD  
AUDIO UNITY DIAG  
MENU  
50P: When this button is pressed for 2 or more  
seconds, its LED lights, and it is possible to control  
the VTR from a unit which has been connected using  
the 50-pin parallel mode connector.  
STAND BY PLAYER RECORDER INPUT CHECK  
SHIFT  
F1  
DEF  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
SERVO  
PLAY  
REC INHIBIT  
REC  
ABC  
GHI  
9
EDIT  
REW  
AUDIO CH SELECT  
CH CH CH  
A
IN  
A
OUT  
7
JKL  
8
PREVIEW/  
REVIEW  
PRE-  
ROLL  
CH  
1
CH  
5
CH  
2
CH  
6
CH  
3
7
4
8
MNO PQRS  
4
5
6
3
T
BS  
ENT  
F
AUTO  
EDIT  
TUV WXYZ  
TRIM  
SET  
STOP  
FF  
1
0
2
PUSH  
LOCK  
IN  
OUT  
C
REC  
P8  
REC  
P8  
REC  
P8  
REC  
P8  
FULL  
FULL  
RS-232C display: This LED lights when communi-  
cation has been enabled between the VTR and the  
unit which has been connected to the RS-232C  
connector.  
8MONITOR SELECT buttons  
These buttons are used to select the audio signals  
which are to be output to the monitor L and R  
connectors and headphones jack.  
;AUTO OFF lamp  
• When OFF has been selected as the  
M
F6  
This lamp lights when a problem has occurred with  
the VTR’s operation, and details of the problem  
appear on the time code display.  
MIX setting on the <AUDIO SHIFT2> menu  
(factory setting):  
Each time the L (or R) button is pressed, the  
signal to be output to the monitor L (or R)  
connector is changed in the following sequence  
and displayed on the audio level meter: CH1 >  
CH2 > CH3> CH4 > CH5 > CH6 > CH7 >  
CH8 > CUE > CH1, etc.  
<LCD monitor  
This monitor is used to check the tape’s playback  
pictures and EE pictures.  
When an HD tape is played back, the signals are down-  
converted and displayed in the letter-box screen format.  
When an SD tape is played back, the signals are  
displayed using a 4:3 aspect ratio.  
•
When L, R or L/R has been selected as the  
M MIX setting on the <AUDIO SHIFT2> menu:  
F6  
At this setting, the signals of a multiple number of  
channels can be mixed and output.  
When the number key corresponding to the  
channel whose signals are to be monitored is  
pressed while the L (or R) button is held down,  
that channel is selected and its signals are  
On-screen menus can also be displayed on the monitor.  
If the VTR is left in a state where no controls on the front  
panel are operated or where the tape is not running, the  
monitor display is automatically turned off in order to  
protect the monitor. When the next VTR operation is  
started, the monitor display comes back on.  
displayed on the audio level meter.  
(By  
<Note>  
performing the same operation, the selected  
channel can be de-selected.)  
Although the LCD monitor has been manufactured  
using technology with extremely high levels of  
precision, some pixels may be missing from parts of  
the screen or some pixels may remain lighted.  
These missing or lighted pixels will not be recorded.  
It should also be borne in mind that this is not  
indicative of a malfunction.  
However, a maximum of only two channels from  
CH1 to CH4 and a maximum of only two  
channels from CH5 to CH8 can be selected.  
Example of channels which can be selected:  
CH1 i CH3 i CH5 iCH8 “ OK  
CH1 + CH2 + CH4 “ NG  
=Function buttons  
9METER (FULL/FINE) selector button  
These buttons are used to perform the operations of  
the function menus (see page 38 for details) and  
setup menus.  
This button is used to select the scale display for the  
audio level meter.  
: This is used to switch the pages of the current  
function menu ( to ).  
SHIFT  
FULL mode: Depending on the setting selected for the  
setup menu item No.763 (METER SCALE)*, either the  
j¶ to 0 dB (reference level: j20 dB/j18 dB**) or j¶  
to i20 dB (reference level: 0 dB) range is displayed.  
FINE mode: Depending on the setting selected for the  
setup menu item No.763 (METER SCALE)*, either the  
j24 to j15 dB (reference level: j20 dB/j18 dB**) or  
j4 to i5 dB (reference level: 0 dB) range is displayed  
on a scale with 0.5 dB increments.  
F1  
F6  
to  
: These are used to change the settings of  
F6  
F1  
the setting items enclosed in the frame at the bottom of  
the time code display.  
To change a setting, keep pressing the corresponding  
function button (  
to  
) until the desired  
F1  
F6  
numerical value appears; alternatively, press the  
corresponding function button to highlight the setting of  
the setting item, and then turn the ADJUST dial until  
the desired numerical value is obtained.  
9
*
This menu is not displayed for AJ-HD1700E.  
** j20 dB is applied for AJ-HD1700P and j18 dB is for AJ-HD1700E.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Parts and Their Functions  
Front panel  
>
@ A C  
CUE: This enables up to 60 cue points to be set. In  
the PAGE mode, 10 pages with 6 cue points on  
each page are provided so that the cue points can  
be managed on a page-by-page basis.  
DIAG: This enables the warnings and hour meter  
displays to be checked. On the SHIFT screen, the  
error log files can be checked and deleted.  
MENU: On this menu, it is possible to transfer  
operation to the screen on which operations  
(adjustments and saving data in or loading it from  
the internal memory and IC card) relating to the  
SYSTEM and SETUP menus are to be performed.  
EJECT  
XL/L/M-cassette  
Do not insert S-cassette  
without adapter  
POWER OFF  
ON  
CH1  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CUE  
REMOTE  
50P  
CH CONDITION  
MONITOR FULL/FINE  
R
9P  
RS-232C  
L
HEADPHONES  
SHTL  
REV  
JOG  
VAR  
ADJUST  
PUSH-INTER  
HOME  
RF1  
TC  
RF2  
CUE  
ASSEM  
INSERT  
VIDEO UNITY  
FWD  
AUDIO UNITY DIAG  
MENU  
STAND BY PLAYER RECORDER INPUT CHECK  
SHIFT  
F1  
DEF  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
SERVO  
PLAY  
REC INHIBIT  
REC  
ABC  
GHI  
9
EDIT  
REW  
AUDIO CH SELECT  
CH CH CH  
A
IN  
A
OUT  
7
JKL  
8
PREVIEW/  
REVIEW  
PRE-  
ROLL  
CH  
1
CH  
5
CH  
2
CH  
6
CH  
3
7
4
8
MNO PQRS  
4
5
6
3
T
BS  
ENT  
F
AUTO  
EDIT  
TUV WXYZ  
TRIM  
SET  
STOP  
FF  
1
0
2
PUSH  
LOCK  
IN  
OUT  
C
REC  
P8  
REC  
P8  
REC  
P8  
REC  
P8  
FULL  
FULL  
? B  
>Time code display  
The data, VTR status information, tape format  
information or warning information which  
corresponds to the direct menu buttons @ appear  
on this display. (See page 16 for details of the  
displays.)  
See page 38 and following for further details on  
each of the function menus.  
AASSEM button  
This button is used to perform assemble editing.  
When it is pressed, the <ASSEMBLE> menu  
appears on the time code display. Setting ASSEM  
?UNITY lamps  
VIDEO UNITY lamp  
This lights if the UNITY level applies for all the HD  
to ON using  
enables assemble editing, and the  
F1  
lamp of the ASSEM button lights.  
or SD output levels.  
Even after operation is transferred by another direct  
menu, the assemble mode will remain established  
while the ASSEM button lamp is lighted.  
AUDIO UNITY lamp  
This lights if the UNITY level applies for the PCM  
or CUE AUDIO input or output level. (The lighting  
of the lamp complies with the setting selected for  
setup menu item No.142 (AUDIO UNITY).)  
To release the assemble mode, select OFF as the  
ASSEM setting on the <ASSEMBLE> menu.  
F1  
The ASSEM button lamp now goes off and the  
assemble mode is released.  
@Direct menu buttons  
These buttons are used to switch directly to the  
function menus on the time code display.  
HOME: The most basic settings of recording,  
playback and time code operations are selected  
on this menu.  
VIDEO: The basic input and output settings for the  
video signals are selected on this menu. The  
level of the HD output signals can also be  
adjusted on this screen.  
AUDIO: The basic input and output settings for the  
audio signals are selected on this menu.  
PF1: This enables user-defined menu items to be  
registered in the function keys.  
PF2: This enables user-defined menu items to be  
registered in the function keys.  
BINSERT button  
This button is used to perform insert editing.  
When it is pressed, the <INSERT> menu appears  
on the time code display, and the function menu for  
selecting the signals to be edited is displayed.  
To select the signals to be edited, press the  
function key, and highlight the display. The  
highlighted display indicates that those signals are  
selected.  
To release the selection, press the same function  
key again.  
Use  
to  
to select the V, A1, A2, A3, A4 and  
F6  
F1  
CUE signals; use  
A5, A6, A7, A8 and TC signals.  
+
to  
to select the  
F6  
SHIFT  
F2  
TC: The settings related to the time code are  
selected on this menu. Superimposing the time  
code on the display can also be set on this  
screen.  
CADJUST dial  
This is used for the menu and other operations.  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Parts and Their Functions  
Front panel  
HD E F  
HREV, STILL and FWD lamps  
EJECT  
XL/L/M-cassette  
Do not insert S-cassette  
without adapter  
These lamps light to reflect the way in which the  
search dial is operated.  
POWER OFF  
ON  
CH1  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CUE  
REMOTE  
50P  
CH CONDITION  
MONITOR FULL/FINE  
R
9P  
RS-232C  
L
HEADPHONES  
REV: This lights when the dial is turned  
counterclockwise, and the tape runs in the REV  
direction while the SHTL, JOG or VAR button  
lamp is lighted.  
STILL: While the JOG button lamp is lighted, this  
lights when the dial rotation is stopped, and the  
tape also stops running.  
SHTL  
REV  
JOG  
VAR  
ADJUST  
PUSH-INTER  
HOME  
RF1  
TC  
RF2  
CUE  
ASSEM  
INSERT  
VIDEO UNITY  
FWD  
AUDIO UNITY DIAG  
MENU  
STAND BY PLAYER RECORDER INPUT CHECK  
SHIFT  
F1  
DEF  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
SERVO  
PLAY  
REC INHIBIT  
REC  
ABC  
GHI  
9
EDIT  
REW  
AUDIO CH SELECT  
CH CH CH  
A
IN  
A
OUT  
7
JKL  
8
PREVIEW/  
REVIEW  
PRE-  
ROLL  
CH  
1
CH  
5
CH  
2
CH  
6
CH  
3
7
4
8
MNO PQRS  
4
5
6
3
T
BS  
ENT  
F
AUTO  
EDIT  
TUV WXYZ  
TRIM  
SET  
STOP  
FF  
1
0
2
PUSH  
LOCK  
IN  
OUT  
C
REC  
P8  
REC  
P8  
REC  
P8  
REC  
P8  
FULL  
FULL  
I
J
G
In the SHTL or VAR mode, it lights when the dial  
is at the still-picture position.  
DSHTL button  
FWD: This lights when the dial is turned clockwise,  
and the tape runs in the FWD direction while the  
SHTL, JOG or VAR button lamp is lighted.  
For shuttle playback, press this button and proceed  
with the operation using the search dial G.  
When the dial is turned to the desired position, the  
tape is played at the speed corresponding to the  
angle to which the dial has been turned. A still  
picture appears when the dial is set to the center  
position.  
IAudio input and output level control dials  
These are used to adjust the recording or playback  
levels of the CH1, CH2, CH3, CH4, CH5, CH6, CH7  
and CH8 PCM audio signals.  
EJOG button  
• Switching between the LOCK or UNLOCK  
status for the volume level operations  
For jog playback, press this button and proceed  
with the operation using the search dial G.  
The tape is played at a speed within the speed  
range set using setup menu items No.310 (JOG  
FWD MAX) and No.311 (JOG REV MAX) in  
accordance with the speed at which the dial is  
turned.  
When a dial is pressed, the LED above the dial  
either lights (LOCK) or goes off (UNLOCK).  
In the LOCK (lighted) status, only the display  
segments corresponding to the current audio  
level light, and the audio level remains  
unchanged even when the dial is turned.  
In the UNLOCK (off) status, the display  
segments corresponding to the current audio  
level and all the display segments below light,  
and the audio level can be changed.  
FVAR button  
For VAR playback, press this button and proceed  
with the operation using the search dial G.  
When the dial is turned all the way in the  
counterclockwise direction, the tape speed is set to  
j4.9k, when it is set to the center position, it is set  
to still picture, and when it is turned all the way in  
the clockwise direction, it is set to i4.9k.  
The SLOW speed can be selected using setup  
menu items No.308 (VAR FWD MAX) and No.309  
(VAR REV MAX).  
• Switching between UNITY or VAR  
UNITY or VAR can be selected when the dial  
knob is pressed while holding down the  
key  
F
among the number keys in the UNLOCK status.  
The position of the segment lighted at the center  
indicates the UNITY level.  
• Switching between REC or PB  
The AUTO, REC or PB volume level function can  
be selected using  
of “AUDIO SHIFT2” on the  
F1  
GSearch dial  
AUDIO function menu.  
With AUTO, the recording controls are  
automatically selected during recording or in the  
EE or INPUT CHECK status, and the playback  
controls are automatically selected during  
playback.  
This dial is used to locate the edit points.  
Whether the dial is to be enabled by pressing the  
SHTL, JOG or VAR button or whether searches are  
to be enabled simply by turning the dial can be  
selected using setup menu item No.100 (SEARCH  
ENA).  
j
j
• Switching between CH1 CH4 and CH5 CH8  
The AUDIO CH SELECT J is used to switch  
between these two sets of channels.  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Parts and Their Functions  
Front panel  
LN  
NPREROLL button  
This button is used to locate where a transmission  
or manual editing starts on the tape.  
When it is pressed, the tape travels to the preroll  
point and it stops there.  
EJECT  
XL/L/M-cassette  
Do not insert S-cassette  
POWER OFF  
ON  
without adapter  
CH1  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CUE  
REMOTE  
50P  
CH CONDITION  
MONITOR FULL/FINE  
R
9P  
RS-232C  
L
HEADPHONES  
SHTL  
REV  
JOG  
VAR  
ADJUST  
PUSH-INTER  
HOME  
RF1  
TC  
RF2  
CUE  
ASSEM  
INSERT  
VIDEO UNITY  
FWD  
AUDIO UNITY DIAG  
MENU  
When the cue time has been registered on the  
HOME, PF1 or PF2 screen:  
The tape is prerolled from the registered cue time  
STAND BY PLAYER RECORDER INPUT CHECK  
SHIFT  
F1  
DEF  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
SERVO  
PLAY  
REC INHIBIT  
REC  
ABC  
GHI  
9
EDIT  
REW  
AUDIO CH SELECT  
CH CH CH  
A
IN  
A
OUT  
7
JKL  
8
PREVIEW/  
REVIEW  
PRE-  
ROLL  
CH  
1
CH  
5
CH  
2
CH  
6
CH  
3
7
4
8
MNO PQRS  
4
5
6
3
T
BS  
ENT  
F
AUTO  
EDIT  
TUV WXYZ  
TRIM  
SET  
STOP  
FF  
1
0
2
PUSH  
LOCK  
IN  
OUT  
C
REC  
P8  
REC  
P8  
REC  
P8  
REC  
P8  
FULL  
FULL  
using the preroll time which was set using .  
F1  
(PREROL) on the <HOME SHIFT> menu.  
J K  
M
O
When the search mode is established on the  
CUE screen:  
The tape is prerolled from the selected cue point  
JAudio channel selector button  
Use this button to select whether the audio controls  
for channels CH1 to CH4 or for channels CH5 to  
CH8 are to be controlled.  
Each time it is pressed, the channel display LED  
above the audio control is selected.  
using the preroll time which was set using  
F5  
(CU-ROL) on the <CUE SHIFT> menu.  
The preroll operation is not performed when the  
selected cue point has not been registered or  
when the cue point registration mode is  
established.  
KNumber keys  
In all other situations:  
Use these keys to input the numerical values of the  
CUE points, edit points, etc.  
By pressing a number keys from  
The tape is prerolled from the registered IN point  
(or the current tape position when the IN point has  
not been registered) using the preroll time which  
to  
while the  
1
9
key is held down, alphabet letters from A to F  
F
was set using [  
(PREROL) on the <HOME  
F1  
which are used for the user’s bit or letters from A to  
Z which are used to compose filenames can be  
input.  
Since a multiple number of letters are allocated to  
each number key, keep tapping the number key  
until the desired letter is selected. To change the  
input position, use the ADJUST dial, and then  
proceed with the input.  
SHIFT> menu.  
If the PREROLL button is pressed when the IN  
point has not been registered, the current tape  
position is automatically registered as the IN point  
(but only when ENA has been selected as the  
setup menu item No.305 (AUTO ENTRY) setting).  
When the PREROLL button is pressed together  
with the IN (A IN) or OUT (A OUT) button, the tape  
can be cued up to the registered point concerned.  
To cue up the tape for the cue time registered on  
the HOME, PF1 or PF2 screen, press the  
PREROLL button while holding down the  
among the number keys.  
LPREVIEW/REVIEW button  
PREVIEW: When the button is pressed after an edit  
point has been registered, the tape travels and the  
editing can be previewed without actually  
performing the editing.  
key  
F
If the button is pressed when the IN point has not  
been registered, the point where it was pressed is  
registered as the IN point, and preview is  
executed using this IN point.  
REVIEW: When the button is pressed after a  
section has been edited, the just edited section is  
played back, and it can be reviewed on the  
recorder’s monitor.  
OIN (A IN), SET and OUT (A OUT) buttons  
When the IN (A IN) or OUT (A OUT) button is pressed  
together with the SET button, the IN (A IN) or OUT (A  
OUT) point is registered.The A IN and A OUT buttons  
are used to register audio IN and OUT points that  
differ from the corresponding video points during  
audio split editing.  
When an IN (A IN) or OUT (A OUT) point has been  
registered, the lamp of the IN (A IN) or OUT (A OUT)  
button which has registered that point lights. When  
these buttons are pressed after points have been  
registered, the IN (A IN) or OUT (A OUT) point value  
appears on the counter display.  
MAUTO EDIT button  
When this button is pressed after the edit points  
have been registered, automatic editing is initiated.  
If the button is pressed when the IN point has not  
been registered, automatic editing is initiated with  
the point where the button was pressed serving as  
the IN point.  
When the  
button is pressed while holding down the  
C
IN (A IN) or OUT (A OUT) button, the registration of  
the IN (A IN) or OUT (A OUT) point is cleared.  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Parts and Their Functions  
Front panel  
P
T W X  
When the STOP button is pressed, the original picture  
and sound are restored.  
During playback, search, fast forwarding or rewinding, the  
input signals in the mode selected by the <ASSEMBLE>  
menu or <INSERT> menu can be monitored in the E-E  
mode while the button is held down.  
EJECT  
XL/L/M-cassette  
Do not insert S-cassette  
without adapter  
POWER OFF  
ON  
CH1  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CUE  
REMOTE  
50P  
CH CONDITION  
MONITOR FULL/FINE  
R
9P  
RS-232C  
L
HEADPHONES  
SHTL  
REV  
JOG  
VAR  
ADJUST  
PUSH-INTER  
HOME  
RF1  
TC  
RF2  
CUE  
ASSEM  
INSERT  
VIDEO UNITY  
FWD  
AUDIO UNITY DIAG  
MENU  
STAND BY PLAYER RECORDER INPUT CHECK  
SHIFT  
F1  
DEF  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
<Note>  
SERVO  
PLAY  
REC INHIBIT  
REC  
ABC  
GHI  
9
EDIT  
REW  
AUDIO CH SELECT  
CH CH CH  
A
IN  
A
OUT  
7
JKL  
8
PREVIEW/  
REVIEW  
PRE-  
ROLL  
CH  
1
CH  
5
CH  
2
CH  
6
CH  
3
7
4
8
MNO PQRS  
4
5
6
3
T
BS  
ENT  
F
No guarantees are made for the sound played back in the  
AUTO  
EDIT  
TUV WXYZ  
TRIM  
SET  
STOP  
FF  
1
0
2
PUSH  
LOCK  
IN  
OUT  
C
REC  
P8  
REC  
P8  
REC  
P8  
REC  
P8  
FULL  
FULL  
search mode.  
Q R S V  
U
U
PLAY button  
Press this button to start playback.  
When this button is pressed together with the REC  
button, recording starts; when this button is pressed  
together with the EDIT button during playback, manual  
editing starts.  
However, manual editing will not be initiated if the servo  
is not locked. When only the PLAY button is pressed  
during manual editing, editing is exited, and the playback  
mode is established.  
P TRIM buttons  
These buttons are used to make fine adjustments to the  
IN or OUT point.  
By pressing the i or j button while the IN button or OUT  
button is held down, the registered edit point can be  
adjusted in 1-frame increments. When the i button is  
pressed, the point is moved ahead by one frame;  
conversely, when the j button is pressed, it is moved  
back by one frame.  
V
W
X
REC button  
The playback phase can be adjusted by pressing the i  
or j button while holding down the PLAY button.  
When this button is pressed together with the PLAY  
button, recording starts.  
Q REW button  
SERVO lamp  
When this button is pressed, the tape is rewound.  
The rewinding speed can be selected using setup menu  
item No.102 (FF.REW MAX).  
This lamp lights when the drum servo or capstan servo  
locks.  
REC INHIBIT lamp  
This lights or goes off in accordance with the status of the  
accidental erasure prevention tab on the cassette tape  
R STOP button  
When this button is pressed, the tape stops traveling, and  
if TAPE is selected as the  
OUTPUT setting on the  
F1  
and the setting which has been selected for  
REC  
F6  
<HOME> menu, still pictures can be monitored.  
Even in the stop mode, the drum continues to rotate, and  
the tape remains tightly wound around the drum.  
Therefore, when the VTR is left in the stop mode beyond  
a specific period of time, it is automatically set to the  
standby OFF mode in order to protect the tape. The VTR  
is set to the stop mode immediately after the cassette has  
been installed.  
INH on the <HOME> menu. Recording onto the tape is  
inhibited while the lamp is lighted.  
Cassette tape’s  
accidental erasure  
prevention tab status  
REC INH  
menu setting  
REC INHIBIT  
lamp status  
Description of  
operation  
Lighted*  
(or blinks slowly).  
Recording  
disabled  
All recording operations  
are inhibited.  
__  
OFF  
ALL  
All recording operations  
are permitted.  
Off  
S FF button  
All recording operations  
are inhibited.  
Lighted  
When this button is pressed, the tape is fast forwarded.  
The fast forwarding speed can be selected using setup  
menu item No.102 (FF.REW MAX).  
Recording operations  
involving the overwriting  
of existing material are  
inhibited.  
PRE  
Blinks rapidly  
Recording  
enabled  
T EDIT button  
This button is pressed together with the PLAY button  
during playback to initiate manual editing.  
When the button is pressed in the stop mode, the input  
signals in the mode selected by the <ASSEMBLE> menu  
or <INSERT> menu can be monitored in the E-E mode.  
Normal recording  
operations are inhibited.  
Editing is possible.  
NORM  
V/CTL  
Blinks rapidly  
Blinks rapidly  
Recording of video  
signals and CTL signals  
are inhibited.  
* Whether the REC INHIBIT lamp is to light or blink is selected by  
the No.114 REC INH LAMP setup menu item setting.  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Parts and Their Functions  
Front panel  
Y Z [  
ZPLAYER and RECORDER buttons  
These buttons are operated if the VTR is to be used  
as a recorder to conduct editing operations with a  
VTR equipped with an RS-422A serial interface  
remote control connector (9 pins). Neither button  
works when the VTR is used on its own.  
PLAYER: When this button is pressed, its lamp  
lights to indicate that the player connected to the  
VTR can be operated by remote control. The  
VTR’s editing and tape transport system buttons  
can now be used to control the player.  
EJECT  
XL/L/M-cassette  
Do not insert S-cassette  
POWER OFF  
ON  
without adapter  
CH1  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CUE  
REMOTE  
50P  
CH CONDITION  
MONITOR FULL/FINE  
R
9P  
RS-232C  
L
HEADPHONES  
SHTL  
REV  
JOG  
VAR  
ADJUST  
PUSH-INTER  
HOME  
RF1  
TC  
RF2  
CUE  
ASSEM  
INSERT  
VIDEO UNITY  
FWD  
AUDIO UNITY DIAG  
MENU  
STAND BY PLAYER RECORDER INPUT CHECK  
SHIFT  
F1  
DEF  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
SERVO  
PLAY  
REC INHIBIT  
REC  
ABC  
GHI  
9
EDIT  
REW  
AUDIO CH SELECT  
CH CH CH  
A
IN  
A
OUT  
7
8
PREVIEW/  
REVIEW  
PRE-  
ROLL  
CH  
1
CH  
5
CH  
2
CH  
6
CH  
3
7
4
8
JKL  
MNO PQRS  
4
5
6
3
T
BS  
ENT  
F
AUTO  
EDIT  
TUV WXYZ  
TRIM  
SET  
STOP  
FF  
1
0
2
PUSH  
LOCK  
IN  
OUT  
C
REC  
P8  
REC  
P8  
REC  
P8  
REC  
P8  
FULL  
FULL  
RECORDER: When this button is pressed, its lamp  
lights to indicate that the editing and tape  
transport system buttons can now be used to  
operate the recorder (this VTR).  
YSTANDBY button  
The same tape tension is applied as in the regular  
stop mode. While the head drum is rotating, the  
button’s lamp lights to indicate that the standby ON  
mode is now established.  
• When the PLAYER button or RECORDER button  
is pressed while ENA has been selected as the  
setup menu item No.200 (PARA RUN) setting,  
the lamps of both buttons light to indicate that the  
VTR now serves as the master unit for parallel  
run operations. However, when this setting is  
used, it is no longer possible to perform external  
control from the REMOTE connector (9 pins).  
If the button is pressed in the stop mode, the  
standby OFF mode is established followed by the  
half loading mode. At this time, its lamp goes off.  
When the VTR is left in the stop mode beyond a  
specific period of time, it is automatically set to the  
standby OFF mode in order to protect the tape.  
In the standby OFF mode, if this button or the  
STOP button is pressed, the VTR is set to the  
standby ON mode. If a button other than the  
STOP button is pressed, the VTR is set to the  
mode that corresponds to the button pressed.  
The time taken by the VTR to transfer to the  
standby OFF mode can be selected using a setup  
menu item.  
[INPUT CHECK button  
Only while this button is held down are the input  
signals from the monitor output connector output to  
enable the input video and audio signals to be  
monitored.  
The time code generator can be checked on the  
time code display.  
Select LATCH as the setup menu item No.517  
(TCG OUT) setting in order to continue displaying  
the time code generator value even after the INPUT  
CHECK button has been released.  
<Note>  
The INPUT CHECK function does not work for the  
CUE signal and SDTI signals. Input signals can be  
monitored in the E-E mode.  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Parts and Their Functions  
Front panel  
INPUT CHECK output specifications  
VIDEO (59/60 Hz mode)  
Input selection  
AUDIO  
MONITOR (L, R) selection  
INT SG  
(59.94Hz/  
60Hz)  
HD SDI  
(59.94Hz/  
60Hz)  
Output system  
(MENU 600)  
SD SDI  
SDTI  
CH1 to CH8  
CUE  
(59.94Hz)  
(59.94 Hz)  
Audio input which has been  
set by the channels selected  
as L channels*2  
Output system  
Same as main  
system*1  
MONITOR L  
HD SDI  
(MONITOR)  
(59.94Hz/60Hz)  
INT SG  
(selected  
signal)  
HD SDI  
(input signal)  
MUTE  
(BLACK)  
Same as  
main system*  
Audio input which has been  
set by the channels selected  
as R channels*2  
Same as main  
system*1  
MONITOR R  
SD SDI  
(MONITOR)  
(59.94Hz)  
MUTE  
(BLACK)  
MUTE  
(BLACK)  
SD SDI  
(input signal)  
Same as  
main system*  
Audio input which has been  
set by the channels selected  
as L channels*2  
Same as main  
system*1  
HEAD PHONE L  
HEAD PHONE R  
LCD  
(MONITOR)  
(59.94Hz/60Hz)  
INT SG  
(selected  
signal)  
HD SDI  
(input signal)  
SD SDI  
(input signal)  
Same as  
main system*  
Audio input which has been  
set by the channels selected  
as R channels*2  
Same as main  
system*1  
VIDEO OUT3  
(59.94Hz)  
Same as  
Same as  
Same as  
Same as  
main system* main system* main system* main system*  
HD SDI (MONITOR)  
(embedded audio)  
Same as main system*1*3  
SD SDI (MONITOR)  
(embedded audio)  
Same as main system*1*3  
VIDEO (50 Hz mode)  
Input selection  
(MENU 600)  
*1: The INPUT CHECK operation is not performed. The signals  
corresponding to the VTR operation mode are output.  
*2: This is set using setup menu items No.713 to 724. However,  
the INPUT CHECK operation is not performed when video  
input SDTI is selected.  
INT SG  
(50Hz)  
HD SDI  
(50Hz)  
SD SDI  
(50Hz)  
Output system  
HD SDI  
(MONITOR)  
(50Hz)  
INT SG  
(selected  
signal)  
HD SDI  
(input signal)  
MUTE  
(BLACK)  
*3: Noise may occur if the video input and OUTREF signals are  
not synchronized.  
SD SDI  
(MONITOR)  
(50Hz)  
MUTE  
(BLACK)  
MUTE  
(BLACK)  
SD SDI  
(input signal)  
LCD  
(MONITOR)  
(50Hz)  
INT SG  
(selected  
signal)  
HD SDI  
(input signal)  
SD SDI  
(input signal)  
VIDEO OUT3  
(50Hz)  
Same as  
Same as  
Same as  
main system* main system* main system*  
<Notes>  
• The AJ-UC1700G (optional accessory) is required to  
select the SD SDI input signals.  
• The AJ-YAC150P (optional accessory) is required to  
select the SDTI input signals.  
• When the INT SG input signal is selected, the signals are  
selected by menu item No.601.  
• When the 23/24 Hz mode or 25 Hz (HD or SD) mode is  
selected, the INPUT CHECK operation is not performed.  
* When the SDTI input is selected, the INPUT CHECK operation is  
not performed.  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Parts and Their Functions  
Time code display  
1
2
SHIFT  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
EDIT:  
1Cue time display  
Editing mode  
AUTO EDIT:  
Automatic editing mode  
PREVIEW:  
Preview mode  
REVIEW:  
The currently registered cue time appears here.  
(For details of the cue time operations, refer to “Cue  
time registration, preroll and cue-up” on page 112.)  
Cue time operations can be performed on the  
HOME, PF1 and PF2 screens only.  
Review mode  
2Operation mode (speed) display  
The current operation mode (including the speed  
display) appears here.  
EJECT:  
Eject mode  
F6  
• When “ON” has been selected as the [F]  
(VARMEM) setting on the <HOME SHIFT>  
menu:  
j
i
DSPD (speeds from 1.0 to 2.0)  
With the initial speed setting of the variable  
memory  
STANDBY OFF:  
Standby OFF mode  
T.RELEASE:  
Tension release mode  
STOP:  
j
i
DSMP (speeds from 1.0 to 2.0)  
In the playback speed memory mode of the  
variable memory  
Stop mode  
j
i
DPLY (speeds from 1.0 to 2.0)  
PREROLL:  
In the variable memory playback mode  
Preroll mode  
j
i
DPRV (speeds from 1.0 to 2.0)  
PLAY:  
In the variable memory editing preview mode  
Playback mode  
j
i
DEDT (speeds from 1.0 to 2.0)  
i
PLAY :  
In the variable memory editing execution mode  
Special playback (playback phase adjustment)  
mode (in FWD direction)  
j
PLAY :  
Special playback (playback phase adjustment)  
mode (in REV direction)  
REC:  
Recording mode  
JOG (REV/STILL/FWD):  
Jog mode  
j
k
i
k
VAR (speeds from 4.9 to 4.9 ):  
Variable mode  
SHTL (speeds from 32. to 32.0 ):  
j
k
i
k
Shuttle mode  
FF:  
Fast forwarding mode  
REW:  
Rewinding mode  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Parts and Their Functions  
Time code display  
3
6
4
SHIFT  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
5
3Time counter display  
4Variable memory mode indicator  
CTL:  
TCG:  
UBG:  
tcg:  
CTL counter data  
This is displayed when “ON” has been selected as  
the  
(VARMEM) setting on the <HOME SHIFT>  
F6  
Time code data of time code generator  
User’s bit data of time code generator  
When the time code data of the time  
code generator is preset  
menu.  
While VM is lighted, variable memory operations  
can be performed at any time. (For details, refer to  
the “Variable memory function” on page 36.)  
ubg:  
When the user’s bit data of the time  
code generator is preset  
TCR/T R: Time code data of the time code reader  
¢
5
Back page menu indicator  
¢
UBR/U R: User’s bit data of the time code reader  
6Function button operation inhibited indicator  
This is displayed when the button is pressed  
BS  
If the time code data or user’s bit data could not be  
read properly, “T¢R” or “U¢R” appears on the  
display and, if the CTL signal is present, the time  
code data is supplemented by this signal.  
while the  
button is held down. When it appears,  
F
the operation of the function buttons can be  
inhibited. When the button is pressed again  
BS  
while the  
button is held down, the display is  
F
TCR 00 : 00 : 00 : 00.  
cleared, and it becomes possible to operate the  
function buttons.  
(59/60 Hz mode only)  
Drop frame marks:  
“ : ”: Non-drop frame  
“ . ”: Drop frame  
Field marks  
“
”: 1st field  
“ . ”: 2nd field  
(These marks are not displayed at any  
speed above w0.3k.)  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Parts and Their Functions  
Rear panel  
8
6 5 7 9  
=
8CUE OUT connector  
4
<
4
The analog signals recorded on the CUE tracks are  
output through this connector.  
IN  
OUT  
1
OUT  
2
OUT  
3
MONITOR (SUPER)  
CH7·8  
TC  
CUE  
IN  
MON  
L
HD SDI  
PUSH  
PUSH  
IN  
ACTIVE  
THROUGH  
SDTI  
SD SDI AUDIO CH1·2  
CH3·4  
CH5·6  
IN  
OUT  
OUT  
R
IN  
(OPTION)  
9MONITOR OUT connectors  
AUDIO  
OUT  
CH1·2  
CH3·4  
CH5·6  
CH7·8  
OUT  
4
MONITOR  
(SUPER)  
The CH1, CH2, CH3, CH4, CH5, CH6, CH7 and  
CH8 PCM audio signals or CUE signals are output  
through these connectors.  
DIGITAL AUDIO  
ANALOG  
AUDIO IN  
CH  
CH  
1
1
CH  
CH  
2
2
CH  
3
CH  
CH  
PUSH  
PUSH  
PUSH  
PUSH  
VIDEO OUT SD REF IN  
HD REF IN  
HD REF OUT  
1
PARALLEL  
ON  
ON  
ENCODER  
REMOTE  
AC IN  
AUDIO OUT  
CH  
75≠  
75≠  
REMOTE  
IN/OUT  
2
3
(WFM)  
(SUPER)  
3
4
PUSH  
PUSH  
PUSH  
OFF  
OFF  
SD  
REF OUT  
REMOTE  
OUT  
R
E
M
O
T
RS-232C  
SIGN  
G
L
D
E
:ANALOG AUDIO IN connectors  
These are the analog audio input connectors (for  
CH1, CH2, CH3 and CH4).  
2 1  
3
;
:
1AC IN socket  
;ANALOG AUDIO OUT connectors  
Using the power cord supplied, connect one end to  
this socket and the other end to the power outlet.  
The analog audio signals (CH1, CH2, CH3 and  
CH4) are output through these connectors.  
2SIGNAL GND terminal  
<
HD SERIAL DIGITAL COMPONENT AUDIO/VIDEO  
IN/OUT connector/ACTIVE THRU  
The HD digital component audio and video signals  
complying with the SMPTE 292M and 299M  
standards are input and output through this  
connector.  
This is connected to the signal ground terminal on  
the component connected to this VTR in order to  
minimize noise. It is not a safety ground.  
3Fuse holder  
A fuse is inserted here.  
Signals with the time code, menu or other  
superimposed information are output from the HD  
SDI MONITOR.  
4Fan  
The fan is used to cool down the VTR.  
If the fan has been stopped due to some kind of  
problem, “W” appears on the time code display and  
a beeping sound is heard.  
If the VTR is made to continue operating in the  
warning status, the temperature inside the deck  
rises, and when it exceeds the safety temperature,  
all the VTR’s operations will be shut down.  
For INPUT CHECK, refer to the INPUT CHECK  
output table on page 15.  
=SDTI IN and OUT connectors (SDTI, optional  
accessory)*1, SD SDI IN/ACTIVE THRU (SD up-  
converter, optional accessory)*2  
*1: These connectors handle compressed data  
input and output signals complying with the  
SMPTE 305M and 321M standards.  
5TIME CODE IN connector  
*2: These input connectors enable SD SDI signals  
complying with the SMPTE 259M-C standard to  
be up-converted to HD signals and recorded.  
This connector is used to record an external time  
code onto the tape.  
6TIME CODE OUT connector  
<Notes>  
During playback, the playback time code is output  
through this connector. During recording, the time  
code generated by the internal time code generator  
is output.  
• The optional AJ-UC1700G SD serial digital input  
board and optional AJ-YAC150P SDTI input  
board cannot be installed at the same time.  
Install one or the other.  
• SDTI does not function when the 25 Hz (HD or  
SD) or 50 Hz mode has been selected as the  
system menu item No.25 (SYSTEM FREQ)  
setting.  
7CUE IN connector  
The analog signals to be recorded on the CUE  
tracks are input through this connector.  
Audio signals from a microphone can also be  
recorded by selecting the j60 dB input mode for  
setup menu item No.704 (CUE IN LV).  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Parts and Their Functions  
Rear panel  
>
D
B
H
The signals which can be switched using the menu items  
are the TC, CTL, video, RF L/R and ENV L/R signals.  
There is no INPUT CHECK function. The signals are  
muted during line conversion.  
IN  
OUT  
1
OUT  
2
OUT  
3
MONITOR (SUPER)  
TC  
CUE  
IN  
MON  
L
HD SDI  
PUSH  
PUSH  
IN  
ACTIVE  
THROUGH  
SDTI  
SD SDI AUDIO CH1·2  
CH3·4  
CH5·6  
CH7·8  
IN  
OUT  
OUT  
R
IN  
(OPTION)  
AUDIO  
OUT  
CH1·2  
CH3·4  
CH5·6  
CH7·8  
OUT  
MONITOR  
(SUPER)  
DIGITAL AUDIO  
ANALOG  
AUDIO IN  
CH  
CH  
1
1
CH  
CH  
2
2
CH  
3
CH  
CH  
4
4
PUSH  
PUSH  
PUSH  
PUSH  
VIDEO OUT SD REF IN  
HD REF IN  
HD REF OUT  
@ SD REF IN connectors and 75-ohm termination  
switches  
1
PARALLEL  
ON  
ON  
ENCODER  
REMOTE  
AC IN  
AUDIO OUT  
CH  
75≠  
75≠  
REMOTE  
IN/OUT  
2
3
(WFM)  
(SUPER)  
3
OFF  
OFF  
SD  
REF OUT  
REMOTE  
OUT  
These are the SD reference video signal input  
connectors. Input composite signal with color burst.  
For termination, set the termination switch to ON.  
R
E
M
O
T
RS-232C  
SIGN  
G
L
D
E
? @ A C G F  
E
A HD REF IN connectors and 75-ohm termination  
switches  
>SD SERIAL DIGITAL COMPONENT AUDIO and  
VIDEO OUT connectors  
These are the HD reference video signal input  
connectors. Input tri-level sync signals with both positive  
and negative polarities.  
The digital component audio and video signals  
complying with the SMPTE 259M-C, 272M-A or  
294M standard are output from these connectors.  
They are output during DVCPRO25M, 50M, DV or  
DVCAM interchangeable playback or when signals  
are down-converted and output. Signals containing  
TC, menu or other superimposed information can  
be output from the SD SDI MONITOR.  
Using setup menu item No.606 (SD MONI O SEL),  
it is also possible to make the SD SDI MONITOR  
output the same output as SD SDI OUT1 (no  
information superimposed).  
For termination, set the termination switch to ON.  
B HD REF OUT connector  
This is the HD reference video signal output connector for  
external synchronization. Tri-level sync signals with both  
positive and negative polarities are output.  
The output based on SYS FORMAT of menu item No.020  
is delivered from the connector.  
C SD REF OUT connector  
When “SD SDI” has been selected as the  
(VID  
F1  
The composite signal used for external synchronization  
(black burst signal) is output from this connector.  
IN) setting on the <VIDEO> menu and “THRU” has  
been selected as the No.107 (EE MODE SEL)  
setting, no information is superimposed onto the SD  
SDI MONITOR output signals in the EE mode, and  
the same output as SD SDI OUT1 is delivered.  
• The AJ-UC1700G optional board is required in  
D DIGITAL AUDIO IN and OUT connectors  
These are the input and output connectors of the digital  
audio signals that comply with the AES/EBU standards.  
order to select “SD SDI” as the  
setting on the <VIDEO> menu.  
• For INPUT CHECK, refer to the INPUT CHECK  
output table on page 15. Note that the signals  
are muted during line conversion.  
(VID IN)  
F1  
E
Remote control connectors  
These connectors make it possible to use two of these  
VTRs or to connect this VTR to an external controller so  
that this VTR can be operated from an external  
component.  
Two remote control connectors are provided: one for  
IN/OUT uses and the other for OUT uses only.  
IN/OUT:For connection with an external controller  
For connection during deck-to-deck operations  
OUT: For connection during parallel run operations  
For loop-through uses  
<Note>  
In the 23/24 Hz mode, the system phase of the SD  
SDI output and analog composite video output is  
subject to change when the tape has been set to  
travel at the normal speed (1k) so that the HD SDI  
output and phase will be aligned.  
?ANALOG COMPOSITE VIDEO OUT connectors  
The analog composite video signals are output through  
these connectors. They are output during DVCPRO25M,  
50M, DV or DVCAM interchangeable playback or when  
signals are down-converted and output.  
F
ENCODER REMOTE connector  
An external encoder remote controller is connected to  
this connector when the video output signal settings are  
to be adjusted from an external component.  
Video signals containing superimposed information can  
be output through the VIDEO OUT 3 connector. Whether  
the superimposing is to be set ON or OFF is selected  
using the setup menu item No.005 (SUPER).  
The waveform monitor (WFM) signal can be output from  
the VIDEO OUT 2 connector.  
G
H
RS-232C connector  
PARALLEL REMOTE connector  
This is used when the VTR is to be operated from an  
external component.  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connections  
Example of connections performed  
for one VTR  
Example of connections performed  
for two VTRs (deck-to-deck)  
Player side:  
Source side:  
Set the REMOTE LED : on the front panel to the off  
status (LOCAL mode).  
Press the “9P” REMOTE button on the front panel  
for 2 or more seconds to set the VTR to the  
REMOTE status. (The 9P LED lights.)  
SDTI output (when SDTI, an optional  
accessory, has been installed)  
SD SDI input ACTIVE THRU (when SD  
up-converter, an optional accessory, has  
been installed)  
Recorder side:  
Set the REMOTE LED : on the front panel to the  
off status (LOCAL mode).  
SDTI input (when SDTI, an optional  
accessory, has been installed)  
SD SDI input (when SD up-converter,  
an optional accessory, has been  
installed)  
SD reference signal generator  
To audio monitor  
cmponent  
HD SDI signal  
HD SDI input (audio, video)  
Source side  
HD SDI output  
IN  
OUT  
1
OUT  
2
OUT  
3
MONITOR (SUPER)  
CH7·8  
TC  
MON  
L
HD SDI  
PUSH  
PUSH  
IN  
(ACTIVE THRU)  
ACTIVE  
THROUGH  
SDTI  
SD SDI AUDIO CH1·2  
CH3·4  
CH5·6  
IN  
OUT  
R
IN  
(OPTION)  
SD SDI outputs  
HD SDI outputs  
Digital audio inputs  
AUDIO  
OUT  
CH1·2  
CH3·4  
CH5·6  
CH7·8  
OUT  
4
MONITOR  
(SUPER)  
DIGITAL AUDIO  
ANALOG  
AUDIO IN  
CH  
CH  
1
1
CH  
CH  
2
2
CH  
3
CH  
CH  
PUSH  
PUSH  
PUSH  
PUSH  
VIDEO OUT SD REF IN  
HD REF IN  
HD REF OUT  
1
PARALLEL  
ON  
ON  
ENCODER  
REMOTE  
AC IN  
AUDIO OUT  
CH  
75≠  
75≠  
REMOTE  
IN/OUT  
2
3
(WFM)  
(SUPER)  
3
4
OFF  
OFF  
SD  
REF OUT  
Audio monitor outputs  
Digital audio outputs  
REMOTE  
OUT  
R
E
M
O
T
RS-232C  
SIGN  
G
L
D
E
IN  
OUT  
1
OUT  
2
OUT  
3
MONITOR (SUPER)  
TC  
CUE  
IN  
MON  
L
HD SDI  
PUSH  
PUSH  
IN  
ACTIVE  
THROUGH  
SDTI  
SD SDI AUDIO CH1·2  
CH3·4  
CH5·6  
CH7·8  
IN  
To video monitor  
component  
OFF  
OUT  
OUT  
R
IN  
(OPTION)  
AUDIO  
OUT  
CH1·2  
CH3·4  
CH5·6  
CH7·8  
OUT  
4
MONITOR  
(SUPER)  
DIGITAL AUDIO  
ANALOG  
AUDIO IN  
Remote  
signal (9P)  
CH  
CH  
1
1
CH  
CH  
2
2
CH  
3
CH  
CH  
PUSH  
PUSH  
PUSH  
PUSH  
VIDEO OUT SD REF IN  
1
HD REF IN  
HD REF OUT  
PARALLEL  
ON  
ON  
ENCODER  
REMOTE  
AC IN  
AUDIO OUT  
CH  
75≠  
75≠  
REMOTE  
IN/OUT  
2
3
(WFM)  
(SUPER)  
3
4
PUSH  
OFF  
OFF  
To audio monitor  
component  
SD  
REF OUT  
REMOTE  
OUT  
R
E
M
O
T
RS-232C  
SIGN  
G
L
D
E
Recorder side  
IN  
OUT  
1
OUT  
2
OUT  
3
MONITOR (SUPER)  
CH7·8  
TC  
CUE  
IN  
MON  
L
HD SDI  
PUSH  
PUSH  
IN  
ACTIVE  
THROUGH  
HD reference inputs  
(loop-through output)  
SDTI  
SD SDI AUDIO CH1·2  
CH3·4  
CH5·6  
IN  
OUT  
OUT  
R
IN  
(OPTION)  
AUDIO  
OUT  
CH1·2  
CH3·4  
CH5·6  
CH7·8  
OUT  
4
MONITOR  
(SUPER)  
SD reference inputs  
(loop-through output)  
DIGITAL AUDIO  
ANALOG  
AUDIO IN  
CH  
CH  
1
1
CH  
CH  
2
2
CH  
3
CH  
CH  
PUSH  
PUSH  
PUSH  
PUSH  
VIDEO OUT SD REF IN  
1
HD REF IN  
HD REF OUT  
PARALLEL  
ON  
ON  
ENCODER  
REMOTE  
AC IN  
AUDIO OUT  
CH  
75≠  
75≠  
REMOTE  
IN/OUT  
2
3
(WFM)  
(SUPER)  
3
4
OFF  
OFF  
SD  
REF OUT  
Video monitor output  
REMOTE  
OUT  
R
E
M
O
T
RS-232C  
SIGN  
G
L
D
(3 composite output lines)  
E
Analog audio outputs  
Analog audio inputs  
To video monitor  
component  
ON  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connections  
Example of system connections in  
23/24 Hz or 25 Hz (HD) mode  
When this VTR plays back a tape which was recorded at a frame rate of 24  
fps (25 fps) using a variable frame rate camera, the signals on the tape can  
be output after converting them to 1080/24psf (1080/25psf) to enable direct  
editing together with the AJ-HD3700 series.  
Example of system connections in  
25 Hz (SD) mode  
When this VTR plays back a tape which was recorded at a frame rate of 25  
fps using a variable frame rate camera, the signals on the tape can be  
output after converting them to 576/50i to enable direct editing together  
with the SD VTRs.  
Shown in the figure below is an example of the deck-to-deck connections.  
Input the 48 Hz (or 50 Hz) reference signal to the HD REF input connector  
as the REF input.  
Shown in the figure below is an example of the deck-to-deck connections.  
Input the 50 Hz reference signal to the SD REF input connector as the REF  
input.  
HD SDI OUT  
AJ-HD1700  
(Source side)  
SD SDI OUT  
AJ-HD1700  
(Source side)  
SD SDI signal  
IN  
OUT  
1
OUT  
2
OUT  
3
MONITOR (SUPER)  
CH7·8  
TC  
CUE  
IN  
MON  
L
HD SDI  
IN  
OUT  
1
OUT  
2
OUT  
3
MONITOR (SUPER)  
CH7·8  
PUSH  
PUSH  
TC  
CUE  
PUSH  
MON  
L
HD SDI  
IN  
PUSH  
IN  
IN  
ACTIVE  
THROUGH  
ACTIVE  
THROUGH  
SDTI  
SD SDI AUDIO CH1·2  
CH3·4  
CH5·6  
SDTI  
SD SDI AUDIO CH1·2  
CH3·4  
CH5·6  
IN  
IN  
OUT  
OUT  
R
OUT  
OUT  
R
IN  
(OPTION)  
IN  
(OPTION)  
AUDIO  
OUT  
CH1·2  
CH3·4  
CH5·6  
CH7·8  
AUDIO  
OUT  
CH1·2  
CH3·4  
CH5·6  
CH7·8  
OUT  
4
MONITOR  
(SUPER)  
OUT  
4
MONITOR  
(SUPER)  
DIGITAL AUDIO  
ANALOG  
AUDIO IN  
DIGITAL AUDIO  
ANALOG  
AUDIO IN  
CH  
CH  
1
1
CH  
CH  
2
2
CH  
3
CH  
CH  
PUSH  
PUSH  
PUSH  
PUSH  
CH  
CH  
1
1
CH  
CH  
2
2
CH  
3
CH  
CH  
PUSH  
PUSH  
PUSH  
PUSH  
VIDEO OUT SD REF IN  
1
HD REF IN  
HD REF OUT  
VIDEO OUT SD REF IN  
1
HD REF IN  
HD REF OUT  
PARALLEL  
PARALLEL  
ON  
ON  
ENCODER  
REMOTE  
ON  
ON  
ENCODER  
REMOTE  
AC IN  
AUDIO OUT  
CH  
75≠  
75≠  
REMOTE  
IN/OUT  
2
3
(WFM)  
(SUPER)  
AC IN  
AUDIO OUT  
CH  
75≠  
75≠  
REMOTE  
IN/OUT  
3
4
2
3
(WFM)  
(SUPER)  
3
4
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
SD  
REF OUT  
SD  
REMOTE  
OUT  
REF OUT  
REMOTE  
OUT  
R
E
M
O
T
RS-232C  
R
E
M
O
T
SIGN  
G
L
D
RS-232C  
SIGN  
G
L
D
E
E
™
75  
™
REMOTE  
IN/OUT  
75  
REMOTE  
IN/OUT  
Reference signal  
termina-  
tion OFF  
termination  
OFF  
Reference signal  
For 24 Hz mode:HD REF 48 Hz (interlace)  
SD REF 50 Hz (interlace)  
For 25 Hz (HD) mode:HD REF 50Hz (interlace)  
HD SDI signal  
Remote  
signal (9P)  
SD SDI  
signal  
REMOTE  
IN/OUT  
HD SDI  
IN  
™
75 termination ON  
SD SDI  
IN  
Remote  
AJ-SD955A  
(Recorder side)  
AJ-HD3700  
(Recorder side)  
signal (9P)  
AES/EBU  
ANALOG  
REMOTE  
ANALOG  
CH1/2  
VIDEO  
IN  
IN  
SDI  
OUT  
AC IN  
REF IN  
HD  
VIDEO OUT  
2
WFM  
SD SDI  
OUT1  
HD SDI  
IN  
REMOTE IN/OUT  
PUSH  
PUSH  
PUSH  
PUSH  
PUSH TC  
CH1  
CH3  
CH1  
CH3  
AUDIO  
IN  
CH2  
CH4  
CH2  
CH4  
1
3
IN  
IN  
OUT  
3
ON  
O1UT  
SD  
ON  
IN  
~AC IN  
Y
P
75  
1•2 3•4  
CH3/4  
IN  
ON  
1
2
3
OFF  
(
)
SUPER  
CH  
ACTIVE  
ACTIVE  
75™  
75™  
THROUGH  
THROUGH  
O2UT  
CH  
CH  
CH  
5•6 7•8  
REMOTE  
OUT  
INPUT  
OUT2  
1•2 3•4  
OFF  
SD  
OFF  
ACTIVE  
THROUGH  
TC  
B
OUT  
CH1/2  
OUT  
REF VIDEO  
IN  
MONITOR  
(
)
SUPER  
SPARE  
MONITOR  
HD  
SD  
ENCODER REMOTE  
RS-232C  
CH  
CH  
CH CH  
5•6 7•8  
OUTPUT  
ON  
1•2 3•4  
P
75  
R
CH3/4  
OUT  
OPTION  
OFF  
(SUPER)  
(
)
AUDIO  
OUT  
MON  
L
SUPER  
V/A  
REF OUT  
DIGITAL AUDIO  
OPTION  
SDTI  
Y
1
VIDEO  
OUT  
REMOTE  
IN  
REMOTE  
REMOTE  
IN/OUT  
RS-232C  
OUT  
CONTROL  
IN  
OUT  
PARALLEL  
IN/OUT  
PARALLEL  
(
)
50P  
MON  
R
CONTROL  
PANEL  
1
2
2
P
B
(WFM)  
AUDIO IN  
PUSHH  
TIME CODE  
OUT  
3
P
R
(SUPER)  
PUSHH  
1
PUSH
2
3
PUSHH  
4
PUSH
5
PUSHN  
SIGNAL  
GND  
SERVICE ONLY  
AUDIO OUT  
CH  
MONITOR  
CH  
1
CH  
2
3
CH  
4
CUE  
L
R
SIGNAL  
GND  
™
75 termination ON  
REMOTE  
OUT  
Video monitor  
Video monitor  
Note concerning tapes played back by this VTR  
•
Use tapes which have been shot by a variable frame rate  
camera.  
Do not use tapes which are copies of shot tapes or edited tapes.  
Doing so will cause the tape management information to be lost,  
and normal conversion and playback may not be possible as a  
result.  
To convert a tape, which was recorded at a frame rate other than  
24fps (25fps), to 1080/24psf (1080/25psf), use a frame rate  
converter (AJ-FRC27) which is available as an optional  
accessory.  
<Notes>  
•
When the tape begins to travel at 1k speed, the video may be  
disturbed and the audio muted for several frames in order to  
synchronize the REF input with the tape.  
•
•
•
VITC signals are not output to the SD SDI and VIDEO OUT  
connectors in the 23/24 Hz mode.  
In the 25 (HD) Hz mode, the output video signals of the SD SDI  
and VIDEO OUT connectors are delayed by approximately 1 field  
in relation to the HD SDI output.  
•
•
HD SDI output is muted in the 25 (SD) Hz mode.  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connections  
Example of connections with an editing controller  
Recorder  
EJECT  
AV monitor  
XL/L/M-cassette  
Do not insert S-cassette  
without adapter  
POWER OFF  
ON  
Video monitor signals  
CH1  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CUE  
REMOTE  
50P  
CH CONDITION  
MONITOR FULL/FINE  
R
9P  
RS-232C  
L
HEADPHONES  
SHTL  
REV  
JOG  
VAR  
ADJUST  
PUSH-INTER  
HOME  
RF1  
TC  
RF2  
CUE  
ASSEM  
INSERT  
VIDEO UNITY  
FWD  
AUDIO UNITY DIAG  
MENU  
STAND BY PLAYER RECORDER INPUT CHECK  
SHIFT  
F1  
DEF  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
SERVO  
PLAY  
REC INHIBIT  
REC  
ABC  
GHI  
9
EDIT  
REW  
AUDIO CH SELECT  
CH CH CH  
A
IN  
A
OUT  
7
JKL  
8
PREVIEW/  
REVIEW  
PRE-  
ROLL  
CH  
1
CH  
5
CH  
2
CH  
6
CH  
3
7
4
8
Audio monitor  
signals  
MNO PQRS  
4
5
6
3
T
BS  
ENT  
F
AUTO  
EDIT  
TUV WXYZ  
TRIM  
SET  
STOP  
FF  
1
0
2
PUSH  
LOCK  
IN  
OUT  
C
REC  
P8  
REC  
P8  
REC  
P8  
REC  
P8  
FULL  
FULL  
To REMOTE IN/OUT  
connector  
Av monitor  
Editing controller  
Reference signal  
generator  
AV switcher  
Remote signals  
To  
REMOTE  
IN/OUT  
To REMOTE IN/OUT  
connector  
EJECT  
EJECT  
XL/L/M  
-
cassette  
XL/L/M-cassette  
Do not insert S-cassette  
without adapter  
Do not insert S-cassette  
POWER OFF  
ON  
without adapter  
POWER OFF  
ON  
CH1  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CUE  
CH1  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CUE  
REMOTE  
50P  
REMOTE  
50P  
CH CONDITION  
MONITOR FULL/FINE  
R
CH CONDITION  
MONITOR FULL/FINE  
R
9P  
RS-232C  
9P  
RS-232C  
L
L
HEADPHONES  
HEADPHONES  
SHTL  
REV  
JOG  
VAR  
SHTL  
REV  
JOG  
VAR  
ADJUST  
PUSH-INTER  
ADJUST  
PUSH-INTER  
HOME  
RF1  
TC  
RF2  
CUE  
ASSEM  
INSERT  
HOME  
RF1  
TC  
RF2  
CUE  
ASSEM  
INSERT  
VIDEO UNITY  
VIDEO UNITY  
FWD  
FWD  
AUDIO UNITY DIAG  
MENU  
AUDIO UNITY DIAG  
MENU  
STAND BY PLAYER RECORDER INPUT CHECK  
STAND BY PLAYER RECORDER INPUT CHECK  
SHIFT  
F1  
DEF  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
SHIFT  
F1  
DEF  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
SERVO  
PLAY  
REC INHIBIT  
REC  
SERVO  
PLAY  
REC INHIBIT  
REC  
ABC  
GHI  
9
ABC  
GHI  
9
EDIT  
REW  
EDIT  
REW  
AUDIO CH SELECT  
CH CH CH  
A
IN  
A
OUT  
AUDIO CH SELECT  
CH CH CH  
A
IN  
A
OUT  
7
JKL  
8
7
JKL  
8
PREVIEW/  
REVIEW  
PRE-  
ROLL  
PREVIEW/  
REVIEW  
PRE-  
ROLL  
CH  
1
CH  
5
CH  
2
CH  
6
CH  
3
7
4
8
CH  
1
CH  
5
CH  
2
CH  
6
CH  
3
7
4
8
MNO PQRS  
MNO PQRS  
Reference signal  
4
5
6
3
T
BS  
ENT  
F
4
5
6
3
T
BS  
ENT  
F
AUTO  
EDIT  
AUTO  
EDIT  
TUV WXYZ  
TUV WXYZ  
TRIM  
SET  
TRIM  
SET  
STOP  
FF  
STOP  
FF  
1
0
2
1
0
2
PUSH  
LOCK  
PUSH  
LOCK  
IN  
OUT  
IN  
OUT  
C
C
REC  
P8  
REC  
P8  
REC  
P8  
REC  
P8  
REC  
P8  
REC  
P8  
REC  
P8  
REC  
P8  
FULL  
FULL  
FULL  
FULL  
Source unit  
Source unit  
Av monitor  
Av monitor  
<Note>  
When disconnecting the remote signals (9P) from one component  
and re-connecting them to another component, check the settings,  
etc. of the editing controller.  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Concerning tapes  
Consumer-use DV and DVCAM  
cassettes  
EJECT  
XL/L/M-cassette  
Do not insert S-cassette  
without adapter  
POWER OFF  
ON  
S cassettes  
CH1  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CUE  
REMOTE  
50P  
CH CONDITION  
MONITOR FULL/FINE  
R
9P  
RS-232C  
L
These tapes are exclusively designed for  
consumer-use DV and DVCAM camera recorders.  
They can be played using a cassette adapter  
(optional accessory).  
HEADPHONES  
SHTL  
REV  
JOG  
VAR  
ADJUST  
PUSH-INTER  
HOME  
RF1  
TC  
RF2  
CUE  
ASSEM  
INSERT  
VIDEO UNITY  
FWD  
AUDIO UNITY DIAG  
MENU  
STAND BY PLAYER RECORDER INPUT CHECK  
SHIFT  
F1  
DEF  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
SERVO  
PLAY  
REC INHIBIT  
REC  
ABC  
GHI  
9
EDIT  
REW  
AUDIO CH SELECT  
CH CH CH  
A
IN  
A
OUT  
7
8
PREVIEW/  
REVIEW  
PRE-  
ROLL  
CH  
1
CH  
5
CH  
2
CH  
6
CH  
3
7
4
8
JKL  
MNO PQRS  
However, bear in mind that long-duration  
cassette tapes (80 minutes in the standard  
mode and 120 minutes in the LP mode) cannot  
be used.  
4
5
6
3
T
BS  
ENT  
F
AUTO  
EDIT  
TUV WXYZ  
TRIM  
SET  
STOP  
FF  
1
0
2
PUSH  
LOCK  
IN  
OUT  
C
REC  
P8  
REC  
P8  
REC  
P8  
REC  
P8  
FULL  
FULL  
It is recommended that tapes bearing the  
Panasonic brand be used as the consumer-use DV  
tapes.  
• Bear in mind that inserting a cassette tape  
without the use of a cassette adapter will cause  
malfunctioning.  
M cassette size  
L cassette size  
M cassettes  
DVCPRO HD LP:  
Tapes capable of up to 32 minutes of recording and  
playback  
XL cassette size  
DVCPRO 25/50/50P/HD playback tapes  
L cassettes  
DVCPRO HD LP:  
Tapes capable of up to 92 minutes of recording and  
playback  
Align the cassette with the center of the insertion slot,  
and push it in gently.  
DVCPRO 25/50/50P/HD playback tapes  
For consumer-use DV or DVCAM applications:  
These are playback tapes in the standard  
consumer-use DV or DVCAM cassettes.  
It is recommended that tapes bearing the  
Panasonic brand be used as the consumer-use DV  
tapes.  
The cassette tape will be loaded automatically.  
<Precautions when playing back consumer-use  
DV and DVCAM tapes>  
• It is not possible to play back consumer-use tapes  
which have been recorded in the LP mode.  
• The maximum transport speed of a consumer-use  
DV or DVCAM cassette tape is 32k.  
• The maximum still time for a consumer-use DV or  
DVCAM cassette tape is 10 seconds.  
XL cassettes  
DVCPRO HD LP:  
• From the perspective of protecting consumer-use  
DV and DVCAM cassette tapes, minimize the  
number of times the tapes are cued up at the  
same place as far as possible.  
Tapes capable of up to 126 minutes of recording  
and playback  
• When consumer-use DV and DVCAM cassette  
tapes are used, the maximum time for STILL  
TIMER is set to 10 seconds and the total time  
elapsing when the VTR is left standing in the  
STILL mode is set to 1 minute.  
• When editing material which has been recorded  
onto a consumer-use DV or DVCAM cassette  
tape, first record the material onto a DVCPRO HD  
tape or another VTR used for broadcasting  
applications.  
• Noise may occur when performing slow playback  
using consumer-use DV or DVCAM cassette  
tapes.  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Turning on the power and inserting the cassette  
Before starting to operate the VTR, check whether the  
equipment has been connected properly.  
1
3
2
Turn on the VTR’s power.  
1
2
EJECT  
XL/L/M-cassette  
Do not insert S-cassette  
without adapter  
POWER OFF  
ON  
Check that the AUTO OFF lamp is off.  
CH1  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CUE  
REMOTE  
50P  
CH CONDITION  
MONITOR FULL/FINE  
R
9P  
RS-232C  
L
If condensation or some other problem has  
occurred, the AUTO OFF lamp lights, and no  
further operations can be performed.  
HEADPHONES  
SHTL  
REV  
JOG  
VAR  
ADJUST  
PUSH-INTER  
HOME  
RF1  
TC  
AUDIO UNITY DIAG  
RF2  
CUE  
ASSEM  
INSERT  
VIDEO UNITY  
FWD  
MENU  
STAND BY PLAYER RECORDER INPUT CHECK  
SHIFT  
F1  
DEF  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
SERVO  
PLAY  
REC INHIBIT  
REC  
ABC  
GHI  
9
EDIT  
REW  
AUDIO CH SELECT  
CH CH CH  
A
IN  
A
OUT  
7
JKL  
8
PREVIEW/  
REVIEW  
PRE-  
ROLL  
CH  
1
CH  
5
CH  
2
CH  
6
CH  
3
7
4
8
MNO PQRS  
4
5
6
3
T
BS  
ENT  
F
AUTO  
EDIT  
TUV WXYZ  
Insert the cassette tape.  
Without forcing it, insert the cassette tape at the  
prescribed position.  
TRIM  
SET  
STOP  
FF  
3
4
1
0
2
PUSH  
LOCK  
IN  
OUT  
C
REC  
P8  
REC  
P8  
REC  
P8  
REC  
P8  
FULL  
FULL  
4
Check that the STOP lamp is lighted.  
When the tape is inserted, the cylinder starts  
rotating automatically, the tape is loaded, and the  
VTR is set to the STOP mode. The EJECT lamp  
goes off.  
STOP and STANDBY modes  
2
The VTR is set to the STOP mode when its STOP  
button is pressed. The STOP lamp lights, and the  
tape stops running.  
1
EJECT  
XL/L/M-cassette  
Do not insert S-cassette  
POWER OFF  
ON  
without adapter  
CH1  
CH CONDITION  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CUE  
REMOTE  
50P  
•
In order to protect the tape, the VTR is set to  
standby OFF after the time set by setup menu  
item No.400 (STILL TIMER) has elapsed. If the  
STOP, REW, FF or PLAY button is now  
pressed, the VTR will be set to the  
corresponding mode.  
MONITOR FULL/FINE  
R
9P  
RS-232C  
L
HEADPHONES  
SHTL  
REV  
JOG  
VAR  
ADJUST  
HOME  
RF1  
TC  
RF2  
CUE  
ASSEM  
PUSH-INTER  
VIDEO UNITY  
INSERT  
FWD  
AUDIO UNITY DIAG  
MENU  
STAND BY PLAYER RECORDER INPUT CHECK  
SHIFT  
F1  
DEF  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
SERVO  
PLAY  
REC INHIBIT  
REC  
ABC  
GHI  
9
EDIT  
REW  
AUDIO CH SELECT  
CH CH CH  
A
IN  
A
OUT  
7
8
PREVIEW/  
REVIEW  
PRE-  
ROLL  
CH  
1
CH  
5
CH  
2
CH  
6
CH  
3
7
4
8
JKL  
MNO PQRS  
4
5
6
3
T
BS  
ENT  
F
AUTO  
EDIT  
TUV WXYZ  
TRIM  
SET  
STOP  
FF  
1
0
2
PUSH  
LOCK  
IN  
OUT  
C
REC  
P8  
REC  
P8  
REC  
P8  
REC  
P8  
FULL  
FULL  
The VTR is set to the STANDBY ON/OFF mode  
when its STANDBY button is pressed. The  
standby ON mode is established while the button’s  
lamp is lighted. When the button is pressed in the  
standby OFF mode, the VTR is set to the standby  
ON mode.  
2
1
When the button is pressed while the VTR is in the  
STOP mode, it is set to the standby OFF mode  
and the half-loading status, and the button’s lamp  
goes off.  
<Precautions for STILL TIMER setting>  
The cumulative total standby time at the same place  
increases when programs are transmitted or the same  
material is used repeatedly. In order to protect the  
tape, keep the standby time at the same place on the  
tape as short as possible by, for instance, selecting a  
maximum of 30 seconds or so as the setup menu item  
No.400 (STILL TIMER) setting.  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording  
Set the accidental erasure prevention tab on the  
cassette tape to the “recording” position, and insert  
the tape.  
Press the PLAY button while holding down the  
REC button.  
The REC and PLAY lamps light, and recording  
starts.  
1
6
7
Press the STOP button to set the VTR to the stop  
mode.  
2
When the STOP button is pressed, the recording  
ends, and the VTR is set to the stop mode.  
Select “EE” as the OUTPUT setting using  
the <HOME> menu. E-E pictures now appear on  
the TV monitor.  
on  
F1  
3
4
<Notes>  
•
During recording, check that the SERVO lamp is  
lighted. The playback pictures will be disturbed if it  
is blinking or off.  
Check that the REC INHIBIT lamp is off.  
If the lamp is lighted, select “OFF” as the R INH  
•
If analog signals (ANA1 to ANA4) have been  
selected as the CH5 to CH8 input signals on the  
AUDIO menu, their recording levels are tied in with  
the recording levels which have been set for the  
CH1 to CH4 signals.  
setting using  
on the <HOME> menu.  
F6  
If the inserted cassette has already been recorded  
on using a format other than DVCPRO HD-LP, the  
recording inhibited status (factory setting) will be  
set by setup menu item No.118.  
•
When SDTI has been selected as the video signals  
to be recorded, the audio signals which will be  
recorded are also automatically set to SDTI.  
Select the video and audio input signals, and  
adjust the audio levels.  
5
Selecting the video and audio input signals  
1Connect the signals to be recorded.  
2Select the input signals using  
on the  
on the  
F1  
F6  
<VIDEO> menu and to  
F1  
<AUDIO> menu or <AUDIO SHIFT1> menu.  
Adjust the audio levels  
1Adjust the audio input levels of the CH1, CH2,  
CH3, CH4, CH5, CH6, CH7, CH8 audio signals  
and analog cue signal selected on the AUDIO  
menu.  
When the audio UNITY lamp on the front panel  
is lighted, the audio signals will be recorded at  
the appropriate levels.  
2Before adjusting the recording level, check that  
the REC LED is lighted and that the audio  
adjustment dial is in the unlocked status (LOCK  
LED off).  
If the dial is in the LOCK status (LOCK LED  
lighted), press it. The LOCK LED goes off, and  
the lock is released.  
In addition, the analog cue audio recording level  
is adjusted using setup menu item No.790 (CUE  
REC VOL) so that it will not exceed j20 dB.  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback  
Playback phase adjustment function  
Insert the cassette tape, and set the VTR to the  
STOP mode.  
1
If two VTRs are to be used to play the same program,  
the playback phase between the VTRs can be  
adjusted by changing the playback speed of one of  
the VTRs.  
Press the PLAY button.  
Normal playback commences.  
2
Adjust the audio playback levels.  
Press the TRIM button (“i” or “j” button) while  
3
1
Before adjusting the playback levels, check that  
the PB LED is lighted and that the audio  
adjustment dial is in the unlocked status. If the dial  
is locked (indicated by the lighted LOCK LED),  
press it. The LOCK LED goes off, and the lock is  
released. The analog cue audio level is adjusted  
using setup menu item No.791 (CUE PB VOL).  
Normally, the VTR is kept in the UNITY status (the  
segment display of the control lights at the center).  
holding down the PLAY button. Each time it is  
pressed, the playback speed is accelerated or  
decelerated in increments of the number of  
playback framing fields selected by the setup menu  
item No.109 (CAP.LOCK) setting.  
The SERVO lamp remains off while the tape is  
being played at the accelerated or decelerated  
speed.  
Upon completion of the playback phase  
adjustment, release the PLAY button.  
The VTRs now return to the standard playback  
speed, and the SERVO lamp lights.  
2
To end the playback, press the STOP button. The  
VTR is now set to the STOP mode.  
4
<Note>  
During playback, check that the SERVO lamp is  
lighted. The playback pictures will be disturbed if the  
lamp is off or blinking.  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Jog/Shuttle  
Jog mode  
Variable mode  
Press the JOG button.  
1
Press the VAR button.  
1
Turn the search dial.  
2
Turn the search dial.  
The playback picture speed changes from j4.9k  
to i4.9k depending on the dial position.  
The maximum shuttle speed can be changed by  
selecting the setup menu item No.308 (VAR FWD  
MAX) and No.309 (VAR REV MAX) settings.  
Noise will be generated at all speeds other than  
j1k to i2k. (For all tapes other than DVCPRO  
HD-LP recorded ones, the noise-free speed range  
is j1.0k to i1.1k.)  
2
The dial’s click-stops are released, and the tape is  
played back at the speed corresponding to the  
speed at which the dial is turned.  
The maximum jog speed can be changed by  
selecting the setup menu item No.310 (JOG FWD  
MAX) and No.311 (JOG REV MAX) settings.  
When the dial is no longer turned, a still picture will  
appear.  
To transfer the VTR from the jog mode to another  
mode, press the button that corresponds to the  
mode concerned.  
3
To transfer the VTR from the variable mode to  
another mode, press the STOP button or the  
button of the mode concerned.  
3
<Note>  
Shuttle mode  
At the factory setting, the VTR is set to be transferred  
to the shuttle mode, jog mode or variable mode when  
the search dial is turned.  
In cases where it is not convenient for the VTR to be  
transferred directly to the variable speed mode, it can  
be transferred via the search button. Select “KEY” as  
the setup menu item No.100 (SEARCH ENA) setting.  
Press the SHTL button.  
1
Turn the search dial.  
2
The playback picture speed changes from 0 up to  
w32k depending on the dial position.  
This speed can be switched to w9.8k, w16k or  
w32k using setup menu item No.101 (SHTL  
MAX).  
The dial has a click-stop at the center position  
where a still picture will appear.  
To transfer the VTR from the shuttle mode to  
another mode, press the STOP button or the  
button of the mode concerned.  
3
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Manual Editing  
Select the editing mode.  
ASSEM button:  
Assemble (frame-to-frame continuity) editing is  
performed using this button.  
INSERT button:  
Insert editing is performed using this button.  
While monitoring the TV monitor, search the  
position where the editing is to be started (IN  
point), and press the PLAY and EDIT buttons  
together at this position.  
1
4
5
Similarly, while monitoring the TV monitor, search  
the position where the editing is to be terminated  
(OUT point), and press the PLAY or STOP button  
at this position. The VTR is set to the PLAY or  
STOP mode, and the editing is terminated.  
On the time code display, select the channels to be  
edited.  
ASSEM:  
Set ASSEM to ON using the  
2
button.  
F1  
INSERT:  
To select V, A1, A2, A3, A4 and CUE channels,  
press the to buttons; to select A5, A6, A7,  
F1  
F6  
A8 and TC channels, press the  
+
to  
F2  
SHIFT  
+
buttons. The highlighted channels  
F6  
SHIFT  
will now be edited.  
Press the PLAY button.  
3
Preroll  
Press the PREROLL button.  
The VTR now performs the preroll operation.  
<Note>  
1
The time code or CTL signal must be continuously  
recorded between the edit IN point and preroll point.  
When the cue time has been registered on the  
HOME, PF1 or PF2 screen:  
The tape is prerolled from the registered cue time  
using the preroll time which was set using  
F1  
(PREROL) on the <HOME SHIFT> menu.  
When the search mode is established on the  
CUE screen:  
The tape is prerolled from the selected cue point  
using the preroll time which was set using  
F5  
(CU-ROL) on the <CUE SHIFT> menu.  
The preroll operation is not performed when the  
selected cue point has not been registered or when  
the cue point registration mode is established.  
In all other situations:  
The tape is prerolled from the registered IN point  
(or the current tape position when the IN point has  
not been registered) using the preroll time which  
was set using  
(PREROL) on the <HOME  
F1  
SHIFT> menu.  
If the PREROLL button is pressed when the IN  
point has not been registered, the current tape  
position is automatically registered as the IN point  
(but only when ENA has been selected as the  
setup menu item No.305 (AUTO ENTRY) setting).  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Automatic Editing (deck-to-deck)  
“Editing” refers to the work involved in using pre-  
recorded tapes to bring different contents together or  
delete unnecessary parts and bring together only the  
necessary parts.  
Switch settings and adjustments  
When using this VTR as the recorder  
Set the VTR to the LOCAL status (which is  
indicated when the REMOTE LED is OFF).  
The basic editing steps are as follows.  
Set the POWER  
switch to ON.  
Using the REMOTE button, set the player to  
REMOTE and the recorder to LOCAL (ensure that  
the REMOTE LED is not lighted).  
1
EJECT  
XL/L/M-cassette  
Do not insert S-cassette  
without adapter  
POWER OFF  
ON  
CH1  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CUE  
REMOTE  
50P  
CH CONDITION  
MONITOR FULL/FINE  
R
9P  
RS-232C  
L
HEADPHONES  
Select the editing mode (ASSEM or INSERT).  
2
SHTL  
REV  
JOG  
VAR  
ADJUST  
PUSH-INTER  
HOME  
RF1  
TC  
RF2  
CUE  
ASSEM  
INSERT  
VIDEO UNITY  
FWD  
AUDIO UNITY DIAG  
MENU  
STAND BY PLAYER RECORDER INPUT CHECK  
SHIFT  
F1  
DEF  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
SERVO  
PLAY  
REC INHIBIT  
REC  
Register the edit points of the recorder and player.  
ABC  
GHI  
9
EDIT  
REW  
AUDIO CH SELECT  
CH CH CH  
3
A
IN  
A
OUT  
7
JKL  
8
PREVIEW/  
REVIEW  
PRE-  
ROLL  
CH  
1
CH  
5
CH  
2
CH  
6
CH  
3
7
4
8
MNO PQRS  
4
5
6
3
T
BS  
ENT  
F
AUTO  
EDIT  
TUV WXYZ  
TRIM  
SET  
STOP  
FF  
1
0
2
PUSH  
LOCK  
IN  
OUT  
C
REC  
P8  
REC  
P8  
REC  
P8  
REC  
P8  
FULL  
FULL  
Check and modify, if necessary, the edit points.  
4
Adjust the recording  
levels.  
Preview the material before editing it.  
5
Switch the time counter display to TC  
or CTL.  
Proceed with the editing.  
6
When using this VTR as the player  
Review the edited results.  
7
Press the 9P button for 2 or more seconds  
to set the VTR to the REMOTE status which  
is indicated when the REMOTE LED is ON).  
Set the POWER  
switch to ON.  
EJECT  
XL/L/M-cassette  
Do not insert S-cassette  
without adapter  
POWER OFF  
ON  
CH1  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CUE  
REMOTE  
50P  
CH CONDITION  
MONITOR FULL/FINE  
R
9P  
RS-232C  
L
HEADPHONES  
SHTL  
REV  
JOG  
VAR  
ADJUST  
PUSH-INTER  
HOME  
RF1  
TC  
RF2  
CUE  
ASSEM  
INSERT  
VIDEO UNITY  
FWD  
AUDIO UNITY DIAG  
MENU  
STAND BY PLAYER RECORDER INPUT CHECK  
SHIFT  
F1  
DEF  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
SERVO  
PLAY  
REC INHIBIT  
REC  
ABC  
GHI  
9
EDIT  
REW  
AUDIO CH SELECT  
CH CH CH  
A
IN  
A
OUT  
7
JKL  
8
PREVIEW/  
REVIEW  
PRE-  
ROLL  
CH  
1
CH  
5
CH  
2
CH  
6
CH  
3
7
4
8
MNO PQRS  
4
5
6
3
T
BS  
ENT  
F
AUTO  
EDIT  
TUV WXYZ  
TRIM  
SET  
STOP  
FF  
1
0
2
PUSH  
LOCK  
IN  
OUT  
C
REC  
P8  
REC  
P8  
REC  
P8  
REC  
P8  
FULL  
FULL  
Adjust the playback  
levels.  
Switch the time counter display to TC  
or CTL.  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Automatic Editing (deck-to-deck)  
Selecting the editing mode  
Registering the edit points  
Select the editing mode.  
ASSEM button:  
Assemble (frame-to-frame continuity) editing is  
Locate the edit IN point by performing the jog or  
shuttle operation. Set the tape to the still picture  
status at the desired position.  
1
1
performed in this mode.  
INSERT button:  
For a detailed description of the jog and shuttle  
operations, refer to page 27.  
Insert editing is performed in this mode.  
Press the IN button and SET button together.  
The edit IN point is now registered.  
The edit IN point value appears on the display.  
2
On the time code display, select the channels to be  
edited.  
2
ASSEM:  
Locate the edit OUT point by performing the jog or  
shuttle operation. Set the tape to the still picture  
status at the desired position.  
3
Set ASSEM to ON using the  
button.  
F1  
INSERT:  
To select V, A1, A2, A3, A4 and CUE channels,  
Press the OUT button and SET button together.  
The edit OUT point is now registered.  
The edit OUT point value appears on the display.  
4
press the to buttons; to select A5, A6, A7,  
F1  
F6  
A8 and TC channels, press the  
+
to  
F2  
SHIFT  
+
buttons. The highlighted channels  
F6  
SHIFT  
will now be edited.  
The edit points can be registered directly using the  
number keys.  
1. Select the <ASSEMBLE> or <INSERT> menu.  
5
Press the PLAYER or RECORDER button to select  
the VTR which is to be operated.  
[Setting for editing using two VTRs]  
PLAYER:  
Press this button if the player VTR is to be  
operated to register the edit points.  
RECORDER:  
3
2. Press the  
button to highlight the edit point. Turn  
T
the ADJUST dial to move the highlighting to the IN  
point or OUT point.  
3. Press the  
button again, and input the desired edit  
T
point directly using the number keys. Turn the  
ADJUST dial to move from one digit to the next.  
4. Press the  
button to register the point.  
ENT  
Press this button if the recorder VTR (this VTR) is  
to be operated to register the edit points.  
To abort the registration at any time, press the  
button.  
C
To reset a particular edit point (to 00:00:00:00), press  
the button, align the highlighting with the edit  
point concerned, and press the  
[ASSEM screen]  
T
button again.  
T
IN point  
OUT point  
Next, press the  
button and  
button together.  
F
0
Finally, press the  
button to register the point.  
ENT  
EJECT  
XL/L/M-cassette  
Do not insert S-cassette  
without adapter  
POWER OFF  
ON  
CH1  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CUE  
REMOTE  
50P  
CH CONDITION  
MONITOR FULL/FINE  
R
9P  
RS-232C  
L
HEADPHONES  
SHIFT  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
SHTL  
REV  
JOG  
VAR  
ADJUST  
PUSH-INTER  
HOME  
RF1  
TC  
RF2  
CUE  
ASSEM  
INSERT  
VIDEO UNITY  
FWD  
AUDIO UNITY DIAG  
MENU  
STAND BY PLAYER RECORDER INPUT CHECK  
SHIFT  
F1  
DEF  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
SERVO  
PLAY  
REC INHIBIT  
REC  
ABC  
GHI  
9
EDIT  
REW  
AUDIO CH SELECT  
CH CH CH  
A
IN  
A
OUT  
7
JKL  
8
PREVIEW/  
REVIEW  
PRE-  
ROLL  
CH  
1
CH  
5
CH  
2
CH  
6
CH  
3
7
4
8
MNO PQRS  
4
5
6
3
T
BS  
ENT  
F
[INSERT screen]  
AUTO  
EDIT  
TUV WXYZ  
TRIM  
SET  
STOP  
FF  
1
0
2
PUSH  
LOCK  
IN  
OUT  
C
REC  
P8  
REC  
P8  
REC  
P8  
REC  
P8  
FULL  
FULL  
Marker  
IN point  
OUT point  
2, 4  
1, 3  
5
Match frame processing function  
When two VTRs are used to perform the editing  
operations, there will be a total of 4 edit points: the IN  
and OUT points for the player and the IN and OUT points  
for the recorder. However, the last point is automatically  
calculated so only three of the edit points need to be  
registered.  
SHIFT  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
AUDIO IN point  
AUDIO OUT point  
Negative duration function  
Use setup menu items No.300 (IN/OUT DEL) and  
No.301 (NEGA FLASH) in combination.  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Automatic Editing (deck-to-deck)  
Checking the edit points  
Modifying edit points  
Press the IN (or OUT) button to check the edit  
point.  
The value of the registered edit point appears on  
the display.  
Re-registering an edit point  
1
1
Locate the new edit point by performing the jog or  
shuttle operation, and press the IN (or OUT) button  
and SET button at the same time to re-register the  
edit point.  
While holding down the IN (or OUT) button, press  
the PREROLL button to check the picture at the  
edit point.  
2
Modifying an edit point in 1-frame increments  
(trimming function)  
Press the TRIM button while holding down the IN  
2
The tape is cued up to the edit IN (or OUT) point,  
and a still picture of the point appears.  
(or OUT) button.  
Each time the i button is pressed, the point is  
moved ahead by one frame.  
Conversely, each time the j button is pressed, the  
• If “STOP” has been selected as the setup menu  
item No.307 (AFTER CUE-UP) setting, the VTR  
is set to the E-E mode provided that EE has  
been selected as the <HOME> menu  
F1  
point is moved back by one frame.  
(OUTPUT) setting.  
Resetting edit points  
1Resetting both an edit IN point and OUT  
3
By holding down the IN and OUT buttons at the  
same time, check the editing duration. The  
duration appears on the display.  
3
point  
Press  
(TC CLR = RESET) on the <HOME>  
F4  
menu.  
(This takes effect only in the CTL mode.)  
How the duration is calculated  
• When two edit points have been set  
The duration between the two points is  
calculated.  
• When only one edit point has been set  
The duration between the data which has been  
set and the current address is calculated.  
• When no edit points have been set  
The duration of the previously edited section is  
calculated.  
2Resetting either an edit IN point or OUT point  
Press the  
button among the number keys  
C
while holding down the IN (or OUT) button.  
<Notes>  
• An edit OUT point can be reset even while  
editing is in progress.  
• In the eject mode, the IN and OUT points are  
automatically reset.  
EJECT  
3
1
XL/L/M-cassette  
Do not insert S-cassette  
without adapter  
POWER OFF  
ON  
CH1  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CUE  
REMOTE  
50P  
CH CONDITION  
MONITOR FULL/FINE  
R
EJECT  
9P  
RS-232C  
L
XL/L/M-cassette  
Do not insert S-cassette  
without adapter  
HEADPHONES  
POWER OFF  
ON  
SHTL  
REV  
JOG  
VAR  
ADJUST  
PUSH-INTER  
HOME  
RF1  
TC  
RF2  
CUE  
ASSEM  
INSERT  
VIDEO UNITY  
CH1  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CUE  
REMOTE  
50P  
CH CONDITION  
MONITOR FULL/FINE  
R
FWD  
AUDIO UNITY DIAG  
MENU  
9P  
RS-232C  
L
HEADPHONES  
STAND BY PLAYER RECORDER INPUT CHECK  
SHTL  
REV  
JOG  
VAR  
ADJUST  
PUSH-INTER  
HOME  
RF1  
TC  
RF2  
CUE  
ASSEM  
INSERT  
VIDEO UNITY  
SHIFT  
F1  
DEF  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
SERVO  
PLAY  
REC INHIBIT  
REC  
ABC  
GHI  
9
AUDIO UNITY DIAG  
MENU  
FWD  
EDIT  
REW  
AUDIO CH SELECT  
CH CH CH  
A
IN  
A
OUT  
7
JKL  
8
PREVIEW/  
REVIEW  
PRE-  
ROLL  
CH  
1
CH  
5
CH  
2
CH  
6
CH  
3
7
4
8
MNO PQRS  
STAND BY PLAYER RECORDER INPUT CHECK  
4
5
6
3
T
BS  
ENT  
F
AUTO  
EDIT  
TUV WXYZ  
TRIM  
SET  
STOP  
FF  
1
0
2
SHIFT  
F1  
DEF  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
PUSH  
LOCK  
SERVO  
PLAY  
REC INHIBIT  
REC  
IN  
OUT  
C
REC  
P8  
REC  
P8  
REC  
P8  
REC  
P8  
ABC  
GHI  
9
EDIT  
REW  
FULL  
FULL  
AUDIO CH SELECT  
CH CH CH  
A
IN  
A
OUT  
7
JKL  
8
PREVIEW/  
REVIEW  
PRE-  
ROLL  
CH  
1
CH  
5
CH  
2
CH  
6
CH  
3
7
4
8
MNO PQRS  
4
5
6
3
T
BS  
ENT  
F
AUTO  
EDIT  
TUV WXYZ  
TRIM  
SET  
STOP  
FF  
1
0
2
PUSH  
LOCK  
IN  
OUT  
C
REC  
P8  
REC  
P8  
REC  
P8  
REC  
P8  
FULL  
FULL  
2 1, 3  
3
2
2
1
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Automatic Editing (deck-to-deck)  
Previewing  
Automatic editing  
After the edit points have been registered, press  
the PREVIEW button.  
Regular preview is now conducted.  
Press the AUTO EDIT button.  
1
1
Automatic editing is now executed.  
• To suspend editing at any time, press the STOP  
button.  
<Notes>  
• When the edit OUT point is reached, the tape is  
postrolled, after which it stops.  
• If the edit IN point has not been registered, the  
position where the PREVIEW button was  
pressed is registered as the edit IN point.  
• To stop the preview at any time, press the  
STOP button.  
• When the PREVIEW button is pressed again  
after the IN point during the course of a preview,  
the preview will start again from the beginning.  
• When the edit OUT point is reached, the tape is  
postrolled, after which it stops automatically.  
Postrolling  
In the case of assemble editing, editing continues  
for about 2 seconds after the edit OUT point is  
passed, and the tape is then returned to the OUT  
point, after which it stops.  
In the case of insert editing, the PLAY mode is  
established after the edit OUT point has been  
passed, and the tape is then returned to the OUT  
point, after which it stops.  
Retry function  
EJECT  
Even when the STOP button has been pressed to  
suspend editing, editing can be repeated from the  
beginning simply by pressing the AUTO EDIT  
button again.  
XL/L/M-cassette  
Do not insert S-cassette  
POWER OFF  
ON  
without adapter  
CH1  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CUE  
REMOTE  
50P  
CH CONDITION  
MONITOR FULL/FINE  
R
9P  
RS-232C  
L
HEADPHONES  
SHTL  
REV  
JOG  
VAR  
ADJUST  
PUSH-INTER  
HOME  
RF1  
TC  
RF2  
CUE  
ASSEM  
INSERT  
VIDEO UNITY  
FWD  
AUDIO UNITY DIAG  
MENU  
STAND BY PLAYER RECORDER INPUT CHECK  
Auto tag function  
SHIFT  
F1  
DEF  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
SERVO  
PLAY  
REC INHIBIT  
REC  
ABC  
GHI  
9
EDIT  
REW  
AUDIO CH SELECT  
CH CH CH  
A
IN  
A
OUT  
7
JKL  
8
PREVIEW/  
REVIEW  
PRE-  
ROLL  
CH  
1
CH  
5
CH  
2
CH  
6
CH  
3
7
4
8
If, upon completion of editing, when the AUTO  
EDIT button is pressed although the next edit point  
has not yet been registered, the previous edit OUT  
point is registered as the IN point, and editing is  
executed.  
To release the auto tag mode, press one of the  
transport system buttons (such as the PLAY  
button).  
MNO PQRS  
4
5
6
3
T
BS  
ENT  
F
AUTO  
EDIT  
TUV WXYZ  
TRIM  
SET  
STOP  
FF  
1
0
2
PUSH  
LOCK  
IN  
OUT  
C
REC  
P8  
REC  
P8  
REC  
P8  
REC  
P8  
FULL  
FULL  
1
<Note>  
The registered points are automatically cleared  
after editing has been executed. However, the  
previous edit points can be recalled by pressing  
the TRIMi (or TRIMj) button and SET button at  
the same time.  
EJECT  
XL/L/M-cassette  
Do not insert S-cassette  
without adapter  
POWER OFF  
ON  
CH1  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CUE  
REMOTE  
50P  
CH CONDITION  
MONITOR FULL/FINE  
R
9P  
RS-232C  
L
HEADPHONES  
SHTL  
REV  
JOG  
VAR  
ADJUST  
PUSH-INTER  
HOME  
RF1  
TC  
RF2  
CUE  
ASSEM  
INSERT  
VIDEO UNITY  
FWD  
AUDIO UNITY DIAG  
MENU  
STAND BY PLAYER RECORDER INPUT CHECK  
SHIFT  
F1  
DEF  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
SERVO  
PLAY  
REC INHIBIT  
REC  
ABC  
GHI  
9
EDIT  
REW  
AUDIO CH SELECT  
CH CH CH  
A
IN  
A
OUT  
7
JKL  
8
PREVIEW/  
REVIEW  
PRE-  
ROLL  
CH  
1
CH  
5
CH  
2
CH  
6
CH  
3
7
4
8
MNO PQRS  
4
5
6
3
T
BS  
ENT  
F
AUTO  
EDIT  
TUV WXYZ  
TRIM  
SET  
STOP  
FF  
1
0
2
PUSH  
LOCK  
IN  
OUT  
C
REC  
P8  
REC  
P8  
REC  
P8  
REC  
P8  
FULL  
FULL  
1
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Automatic Editing (deck-to-deck)  
Reviewing  
Upon completion of the editing, press the REVIEW  
button.  
Review is now started by the recorder.  
• To stop the review at any time, press the STOP  
button.  
1
• When the edit OUT point is reached, the tape is  
postrolled, after which it stops.  
EJECT  
XL/L/M-cassette  
Do not insert S-cassette  
without adapter  
POWER OFF  
ON  
CH1  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CUE  
REMOTE  
50P  
CH CONDITION  
MONITOR FULL/FINE  
R
9P  
RS-232C  
L
HEADPHONES  
SHTL  
REV  
JOG  
VAR  
ADJUST  
PUSH-INTER  
HOME  
RF1  
TC  
RF2  
CUE  
ASSEM  
INSERT  
VIDEO UNITY  
FWD  
AUDIO UNITY DIAG  
MENU  
STAND BY PLAYER RECORDER INPUT CHECK  
SHIFT  
F1  
DEF  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
SERVO  
PLAY  
REC INHIBIT  
REC  
ABC  
GHI  
9
EDIT  
REW  
AUDIO CH SELECT  
CH CH CH  
A
IN  
A
OUT  
7
JKL  
8
PREVIEW/  
REVIEW  
PRE-  
ROLL  
CH  
1
CH  
5
CH  
2
CH  
6
CH  
3
7
4
8
MNO PQRS  
4
5
6
3
T
BS  
ENT  
F
AUTO  
EDIT  
TUV WXYZ  
TRIM  
SET  
STOP  
FF  
1
0
2
PUSH  
LOCK  
IN  
OUT  
C
REC  
P8  
REC  
P8  
REC  
P8  
REC  
P8  
FULL  
FULL  
1
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Audio Split Editing  
The video edit points and audio edit points can be  
registered independently, and editing can be executed  
with the video points offset from the audio points.  
Audio edit points cannot be registered when the  
assemble editing mode has been selected.  
EJECT  
XL/L/M-cassette  
Do not insert S-cassette  
POWER OFF  
ON  
without adapter  
CH1  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CUE  
REMOTE  
50P  
CH CONDITION  
MONITOR FULL/FINE  
R
9P  
RS-232C  
L
HEADPHONES  
SHTL  
REV  
JOG  
VAR  
ADJUST  
PUSH-INTER  
HOME  
RF1  
TC  
RF2  
CUE  
ASSEM  
INSERT  
VIDEO UNITY  
FWD  
AUDIO UNITY DIAG  
MENU  
STAND BY PLAYER RECORDER INPUT CHECK  
After registering the edit points, proceed with the  
same operations as for insert editing.  
SHIFT  
F1  
DEF  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
SERVO  
PLAY  
REC INHIBIT  
REC  
ABC  
GHI  
9
EDIT  
REW  
AUDIO CH SELECT  
CH CH CH  
A
IN  
A
OUT  
7
JKL  
8
PREVIEW/  
REVIEW  
PRE-  
ROLL  
CH  
1
CH  
5
CH  
2
CH  
6
CH  
3
7
4
8
MNO PQRS  
4
5
6
3
T
BS  
ENT  
F
AUTO  
EDIT  
TUV WXYZ  
TRIM  
SET  
STOP  
FF  
1
0
2
PUSH  
LOCK  
IN  
OUT  
C
REC  
P8  
REC  
P8  
REC  
P8  
REC  
P8  
FULL  
FULL  
∫Registering the edit points  
Video IN point:  
While holding down the IN button, press the SET  
A-IN button A-OUT button  
button.  
Video OUT point:  
While holding down the OUT button, press the SET  
∫Modifying the edit points  
Video IN point:  
While holding down the IN button, press the TRIMi  
button or TRIMj button.  
Video OUT point:  
button.  
Audio IN point:  
While holding down the A-IN button, press the SET  
While holding down the OUT button, press the  
TRIMi button or TRIMj button.  
Audio IN point:  
button.  
Audio OUT point:  
While holding down the A-OUT button, press the  
While holding down the A-IN button, press the  
TRIMi button or TRIMj button.  
Audio OUT point:  
While holding down the A-OUT button, press the  
TRIMi button or TRIMj button.  
SET button.  
<Note>  
If the editing mode is changed to assemble editing  
after the audio edit points have been registered, the  
audio edit points will be cleared.  
∫Cueing the tape up to the edit points  
Cue-up to video IN point:  
∫Clearing the edit points  
Video IN point:  
While holding down the IN button, press the  
PREROLL button.  
Cue-up to video OUT point:  
While holding down the OUT button, press the  
PREROLL button.  
Cue-up to audio IN point:  
While holding down the A-IN button, press the  
PREROLL button.  
While holding down the IN button, press the  
button among the number keys.  
Video OUT point:  
While holding down the OUT button, press the  
button among the number keys.  
Audio IN point:  
While holding down the A-IN button, press the  
button among the number keys.  
Audio OUT point:  
While holding down the A-OUT button, press the  
button among the number keys.  
C
C
C
C
Cue-up to audio OUT point:  
While holding down the A-OUT button, press the  
PREROLL button.  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Audio Split Editing  
∫Duration display  
The duration can be indicated on the display.  
Between the video IN and OUT points:  
Press the IN button and OUT button at the same  
time.  
Between the audio IN and OUT points:  
Press the A-IN button and A-OUT button at the  
same time.  
Match frame processing function  
When two VTRs are used to perform the audio split  
editing operations, there will be a total of 8 edit  
points: the video IN and OUT points for the player,  
the video IN and OUT points for the recorder, the  
audio IN and OUT points for the player, and the  
audio IN and OUT points for the recorder.  
When five of the eight edit points are registered, the  
remaining three points are automatically calculated  
so only five of the edit points can be registered.  
∫When a VTR not equipped with the split  
editing function is used as the player  
When a VTR for which the video and audio edit  
points cannot be set independently is used as the  
player, split editing is still possible by setting the  
audio IN point and OUT point in the recorder and  
setting the data of three points as the video edit  
points.  
<Note>  
If, during audio split editing, the video OUT point (or  
audio OUT point) only is registered without the  
audio OUT (or video OUT point) having been  
registered and automatic editing is then executed,  
editing will continue until either the audio OUT point  
(or video OUT point) is registered or the STOP  
button is pressed to suspend the editing operation.  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Variable memory function  
Variable memory function selection  
Variable memory playback operation procedure  
The variable memory mode can be selected by setting  
2
(VARMEM) on the <HOME SHIFT> menu to  
F6  
EJECT  
“ON.”  
XL/L/M-cassette  
Do not insert S-cassette  
without adapter  
POWER OFF  
ON  
When  
(VARMEM) is set to “OFF,” the variable  
F6  
CH1  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CUE  
REMOTE  
50P  
CH CONDITION  
MONITOR FULL/FINE  
R
9P  
RS-232C  
L
memory mode is canceled, and the regular mode is  
established.  
HEADPHONES  
SHTL  
REV  
JOG  
VAR  
ADJUST  
PUSH-INTER  
HOME  
RF1  
TC  
RF2  
CUE  
ASSEM  
INSERT  
VIDEO UNITY  
FWD  
AUDIO UNITY DIAG  
MENU  
STAND BY PLAYER RECORDER INPUT CHECK  
<Note>  
SHIFT  
F1  
DEF  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
SERVO  
PLAY  
REC INHIBIT  
REC  
Bear in mind that when the 23/24 Hz or 25 Hz (HD or  
SD) mode has been selected as the system menu  
item No.25 (SYSTEM FREQ) setting,  
ABC  
GHI  
9
EDIT  
REW  
AUDIO CH SELECT  
CH CH CH  
A
IN  
A
OUT  
7
JKL  
8
PREVIEW/  
REVIEW  
PRE-  
ROLL  
CH  
1
CH  
5
CH  
2
CH  
6
CH  
3
7
4
8
MNO PQRS  
4
5
6
3
T
BS  
ENT  
F
AUTO  
EDIT  
TUV WXYZ  
TRIM  
SET  
STOP  
FF  
1
0
2
PUSH  
LOCK  
IN  
OUT  
C
REC  
P8  
REC  
P8  
REC  
P8  
REC  
P8  
(VARMEM)  
F6  
FULL  
FULL  
will no longer appear on the display and the variable  
memory mode cannot be selected.  
1
6
5
4
3
Outline  
To perform variable memory playback operations, set  
the VTR to the variable memory mode, and take the  
steps below.  
This VTR is provided with two variable memory  
functions, as follows. These functions can be used in  
the variable memory mode.  
Register the IN point using the SET button and IN  
button. There is no need to set the OUT point for  
variable memory playback.  
1
Variable memory playback:  
Any section of the tape can be played back at variable  
speeds in the VAR mode, the changes in the speed  
can be stored in the memory, and the tape can be  
played back at the memorized speed.  
Set the initial speed (j1.0k to i2.0k) using the  
search dial while holding down the SET button.  
2
Variable memory editing:  
Using the VTR as a controller (recorder in the deck-to-  
deck mode) to control the playback speed of the  
player, editing can be performed in the variable speed  
mode.  
When the SET button and PREVIEW/REVIEW  
3
button are pressed at the same time, the tape is  
automatically prerolled and played back at the  
initial speed setting up to the IN point.  
After the tape has passed the IN point, turn the  
search dial to store the playback speed in the  
memory.  
4
Press the STOP button to stop the tape.  
5
When the PREVIEW/REVIEW button is pressed,  
variable memory playback is performed at the  
memorized speed.  
6
<Notes>  
• After passing the IN point, the tape is played back  
in accordance with the settings in the memory, and  
it continues to run at the last speed stored in the  
memory until the STOP button is pressed.  
• Whatever is stored in the memory will be cleared  
when the VTR exits the variable memory mode. It  
is also cleared when the POWER switch is set to  
“OFF.”  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Variable memory function  
Variable memory editing operation procedure  
9
4
6
When the AUTO EDIT button is pressed, variable  
memory editing is executed. Once editing has  
been executed, the memorized speeds will be  
cleared except for the initial speed which is not  
cleared.  
8
9
1
5
EJECT  
XL/L/M  
-
cassette  
Do not insert S-cassette  
POWER OFF  
ON  
without adapter  
CH1  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CUE  
REMOTE  
50P  
CH CONDITION  
MONITOR FULL/FINE  
R
9P  
RS-232C  
L
HEADPHONES  
SHTL  
REV  
JOG  
VAR  
ADJUST  
PUSH-INTER  
HOME  
RF1  
TC  
RF2  
CUE  
ASSEM  
INSERT  
VIDEO UNITY  
By pressing the PREVIEW/REVIEW button, the  
edited results can be checked.  
FWD  
AUDIO UNITY DIAG  
MENU  
STAND BY PLAYER RECORDER INPUT CHECK  
SHIFT  
F1  
DEF  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
SERVO  
PLAY  
REC INHIBIT  
REC  
ABC  
GHI  
9
EDIT  
REW  
AUDIO CH SELECT  
CH CH CH  
A
IN  
A
OUT  
7
JKL  
8
PREVIEW/  
REVIEW  
PRE-  
ROLL  
CH  
1
CH  
5
CH  
2
CH  
6
CH  
3
7
4
8
MNO PQRS  
4
5
6
3
T
BS  
ENT  
F
AUTO  
EDIT  
TUV WXYZ  
TRIM  
SET  
STOP  
FF  
1
0
2
PUSH  
LOCK  
<Notes>  
IN  
OUT  
C
REC  
P8  
REC  
P8  
REC  
P8  
REC  
P8  
FULL  
FULL  
• Whatever is stored in the memory will be cleared  
when the VTR exits the variable memory mode. It  
is also cleared when the POWER switch is set to  
“OFF.”  
• Phase synchronization is not performed during  
playback up to the IN point of the variable memory  
editing. Therefore, depending on the VTR used as  
the player and its speed setting, no guarantees are  
made for the accuracy of the IN point.  
• When conducting variable memory editing in the  
speed range of j1.0k to i2.0k, use VTRs with  
which these speeds are guaranteed for both the  
recorder and player.  
8
3
2
To perform variable memory editing operations, set  
this VTR, which is connected as the recorder to the  
variable memory mode, and take the steps below.  
Select the editing mode on the <ASSEMBLE> or  
1
<INSERT> menu.  
Select the VTR to be operated by pressing the  
RECORDER or PLAYER button.  
2
Register the IN and OUT points using the SET  
button and IN and OUT buttons. The player’s OUT  
point cannot be registered.  
3
Press the PLAYER button to select the player  
VTR, and then set the initial speed using the  
search dial while holding down the SET button.  
4
When the SET button and PREVIEW/REVIEW  
5
button are pressed at the same time, the tapes in  
both the player and recorder are automatically  
prerolled, and the player VTR plays back the tape  
at the initial speed setting up to the IN point.  
After the tape has passed the IN point, turn the  
search dial to store the playback speed of the  
player VTR in the memory.  
6
When the tape passes the OUT point that was set  
by the recorder, the storing of the playback speed  
in the memory ends.  
7
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function menus  
The function menus are used to set the functions which are frequently used.  
The function menus are selected directly using the direct menu buttons on the front panel.  
General description  
General menus  
Special menus  
<HOME>, <HOME SHIFT>  
<<SYSTEM MENU>>  
The most basic settings for recording, playback and  
The SYSTEM menu is displayed on-screen, enabling  
TC operations are set on these menu screens.  
various adjustments to be made.  
<VIDEO>, <VIDEO SHIFT>  
<<SETUP MENU>>  
The basic input/output settings for the video signals  
are performed and, moreover, the level of the HD  
output signals can also be adjusted on these menu  
screens.  
The SETUP menu is displayed on-screen, enabling  
various adjustments to be made.  
<<FILE>>  
The current setting information, including the SETUP  
menu contents, can be provided with titles and either  
saved in or loaded from the backup memory in one of  
4 variations.  
<AUDIO>, <AUDIO SHIFT1>, <AUDIO SHIFT2>  
The basic input/output settings for the audio signals  
are performed on these menu screens.  
<TC>, <TC SHIFT>  
The TC-related settings are performed on these menu  
screens.  
The settings for superimposing time codes on the  
display can also be performed on these menu  
screens.  
<<PF1 FT ASSIGN>>, <<PF1 BK ASSIGN>>  
<<PF2 FT ASSIGN>>, <<PF2 BK ASSIGN>>  
The SETUP menu items which can be registered are  
displayed on-screen, and they can be registered into  
or deleted from the function buttons.  
<<IC CARD MENU>>  
<PF1 FT>, <PF1 BK>, <PF2 FT>, <PF2 BK>  
Up to 24 frequently used menu items which have  
been registered can be used on these menu screens.  
The current setting information, including the SETUP  
menu contents, can be provided with titles and saved  
onto or loaded from the IC card memory in one of 8  
variations.  
<CUE>, <CUE SHIFT>  
A maximum of 60 cue points can be set on these  
menu screens. In the PAGE mode, 10 pages with 6  
cue points on each page are provided so that the cue  
points can be managed on a page-by-page basis.  
<<IC CARD/ERR LOG>>  
The contents of the error logs can be provided with  
titles and saved onto or loaded from the IC card  
memory in one of 8 variations.  
<DIAG>, <DIAG SHIFT>  
<<IC CARD/MULTI CUE>>  
The warnings and hour-meter can be checked on  
these menu screens. On the SHIFT menu screen,  
error log files can be checked, deleted or saved onto  
or loaded from IC cards.  
The MULTI CUE menu items can be provided with  
titles and saved onto or loaded from the IC card  
memory in one of 8 variations.  
<<50P IN ASSIGN>>, <<50P OUT ASSIGN>>  
Using the front panel controls and on-screen menus,  
the functions are registered into the input pins of the  
parallel remote (50PIN) connector and the statuses  
are registered into its output pins.  
<MENU>, <MENU SHIFT>  
These enable movement to the screens for operations  
(adjustments, saving data onto or loading it from the  
internal memory or IC cards) relating to the SYSTEM  
and SETUP menus.  
<ASSEMBLE>  
The ASSEMBLE editing mode is selected on this  
menu screen.  
<INSERT>  
The INSERT editing mode and editing channels are  
selected on this menu screen.  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GENERAL  
DESCRIPTION  
Function menus  
Allocating the function keys  
Items allocated to function keys  
Menu (6 types)  
Menu hierarchy  
F1  
F2  
F3  
TC/CTL  
OUTREF  
WFM  
F4  
F5  
F6  
R INH  
VARMEM  
DW CON  
SUP LV  
B-CT  
1st  
OUTPUT  
PREROL  
VID IN  
TC CLR  
CAPSTN  
HOME  
VIDEO  
2nd (SHIFT)  
1st  
INT SG  
UP CON  
HUE  
2nd (SHIFT)  
3rd (F+SHIFT)  
1st  
V LV  
C LV  
B-BR  
A3 IN  
A7 IN  
BR  
A1 IN  
A5 IN  
VOLUME  
TC SRC  
SUPER  
CT  
R-BR  
R-CT  
A2 IN  
A6 IN  
DIN 12  
DIN 56  
RECCUE  
TCG MD  
C VPOS  
A4 IN  
A8 IN  
DIN 34  
DIN 78  
M MIX  
DF MOD  
TIMER  
2nd (SHIFT)  
3rd (SHIFT)  
1st  
AUDIO  
TCG RG  
DISPLY  
RUN MD  
C TYPE  
TC  
2nd (SHIFT)  
1st  
C HPOS  
PF1  
2nd (SHIFT)  
1st  
No factory settings (any items can be allocated to any keys).  
PF2  
2nd (SHIFT)  
1st  
PREV  
NEXT  
CARD  
HOURS  
CARD  
CARD  
PF1 BK  
MODE  
PAGE  
CLR  
AL CLR  
CU-ROL  
CUE  
MULTICUE function  
2nd (SHIFT)  
1st  
ROTATE  
WARN  
STEP  
DIAG  
ERROR LOG function  
2nd (SHIFT)  
1st  
AL CLR  
SETUP  
50P IN  
FILE  
SYSTEM  
PF2 BK  
MENU  
2nd (SHIFT)  
PF1 FT  
ASSEM  
PF2 FT  
50P OT  
ASSEM  
INSERT  
A5  
A1  
A6  
A2  
A7  
A3  
A8  
A4  
TC  
V
CUE  
SYSTEM  
SYSTEM MENU (ON SCREEN)  
CANCEL  
CANCEL  
SAVE >  
CANCEL  
RESET  
RESET  
SET  
SET  
EXIT  
EXIT  
EXIT  
EXIT  
SETUP  
: PREV  
P.LOAD  
: PREV  
; NEXT  
LOAD <  
; NEXT  
SETUP MENU (ON SCREEN)  
FILE  
LOCK  
SET  
USER FILE BACKUP function  
PF1, PF2  
MENU ASSIGN function  
RESET  
DELETE  
RESET  
CARD  
IC CARD function (MENU)  
IC CARD function (ERRLOG)  
IC CARD function (MULTI CUE)  
EXIT  
EXIT  
FORMAT  
SAVE <  
LOAD >  
LOCK  
SET  
50PIN  
: PREV  
; NEXT  
CANCEL  
50-pin ASSIGN function  
Warning mark  
When a warning occurs in this VTR, the warning mark (W) blinks. If the DIAG button is then pressed, the corresponding warning message is  
displayed on the screen. ( See DIAG screen.)  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function menus  
How to switch the settings  
Toggle:  
Each time a function button is pressed, the setting is  
changed or entered.  
F i toggle*:  
When a function button is pressed while the F button  
is held down, the setting can be changed or entered  
each time.  
Toggle i ADJ:  
When a function button is pressed, the setting is  
highlighted, and the status in which the setting can be  
changed is established.  
The ADJUST dial is used to change the setting.  
When the same function button is pressed again and  
the highlighting is released, the setting is entered.  
Press:  
When a function button is pressed, the setting can be  
changed while the button is held down or at the  
instant when it is pressed. When the function button  
is released, the original setting is restored.  
F i press*:  
When a function button is pressed while the F button  
is held down, the setting can be changed while the  
button is held down or at the instant when it is  
pressed. When the function button is released, the  
original setting is restored.  
* When only the function button is pressed, message  
display “Press  
i
” etc. blinks.  
F5  
F
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
HOW TO SWITCH  
THE SETTINGS  
Function menus  
<HOME>  
The most basic settings for recording, playback and  
TC operations are set on this menu screen.  
Status display 1  
Warning mark  
Status display 2  
Name of menu displayed  
Remaining tape/total tape  
Operation mode/speed  
SHIFT  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
System frequency display during 24 Hz, 25 Hz (HD and SD)  
modes  
When 24 Hz mode or 25 Hz (HD or SD) mode has been selected  
for the system menu item No. 25 (SYSTEM FREQ), the selected  
system frequency contents are displayed for the F1 function button,  
making it possible to check the currently selected system frequency  
mode.  
SHIFT  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
SYSTEM  
23/24  
23/24  
The 23/24 Hz mode is selected.  
The 25 (HD) Hz mode is selected.  
The 25 (SD) Hz mode is selected.  
Time counter  
Cue time  
Back menu indicator  
25 (HD)  
25 (SD)  
F1  
Variable memory mode indicator  
Status display 1  
VTR  
Description of settings  
PB FMT  
Playback format  
This displays the format used  
for playback.  
1080i LP  
720p LP  
1080i SP  
720p SP  
422  
These settings indicate the DVCPRO HD-LP recording and playback  
mode.  
These settings indicate the DVCPRO HD-SP playback mode.  
These settings indicate the DVCPRO (50 Mbps format) playback mode.  
420p  
411  
DV  
These settings indicate the DVCPRO (25 Mbps format), DV and DVCAM  
playback modes.  
DVCAM  
1080i  
1
REC FMT*  
Recording format  
This displays the format used  
for recording.  
The tape is recorded using the 1080i format.  
The tape is recorded using the 720p format.  
A cassette tape has not been inserted.  
720p  
- - -  
2
TM INFO*  
Tape management  
information  
This displays the frame rate  
(shooting speed) information  
which is recorded on a tape  
shot by a variable frame rate  
camera.  
24P  
24PA  
25P  
These settings indicate the recorded frame rate.  
INVALID  
The tape management information is invalid.  
<Note>  
In some cases, the tape management information may be erroneously  
overwritten by insert editing or tape dubbing, and it may not be possible to  
perform editing properly.  
*1: This status is not displayed when the 23/24 Hz or 25 Hz (HD or SD) mode has been selected as the system menu item  
No.25 (SYSTEM FREQ) setting.  
*2: This status is not displayed when the 59/60 Hz or 50 Hz mode has been selected as the system menu item No.25  
(SYSTEM FREQ) setting.  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function menus  
Status display 1 (continued)  
VTR  
Description of settings  
REF  
Output reference  
This displays the output  
reference status.  
HD23  
HD24  
HD25  
HD50  
HD59  
HD60  
IN50  
The HD REF input signal has been selected as the reference. The frame  
frequency is 23.98 Hz.  
The HD REF input signal has been selected as the reference. The frame  
frequency is 24 Hz.  
The HD REF input signal has been selected as the reference. The frame  
frequency is 25 Hz.  
The HD REF input signal has been selected as the reference. The field  
frequency is 50 Hz.  
The HD REF input signal has been selected as the reference. The field  
frequency is 59.94 Hz.  
The HD REF input signal has been selected as the reference. The field  
frequency is 60 Hz.  
The HD serial input signal has been selected as the reference. The field  
frequency is 50 Hz.  
IN59  
The HD serial input signal has been selected as the reference. The field  
frequency is 59.94 Hz.  
IN60  
The HD serial input signal has been selected as the reference. The field  
frequency is 60 Hz.  
INT23  
INT24  
INT25  
INT50  
INT59  
INT60  
NTSC59  
The signal (23.98 Hz) from the internal generator has been selected as the reference.  
The signal (24 Hz) from the internal generator has been selected as the reference.  
The signal (25 Hz) from the internal generator has been selected as the reference.  
The signal (50 Hz) from the internal generator has been selected as the reference.  
The signal (59.94 Hz) from the internal generator has been selected as the reference.  
The signal (60 Hz) from the internal generator has been selected as the reference.  
The SD REF input signal has been selected as the reference. The field  
frequency is 59.94 Hz.  
PAL50  
The SD REF input signal has been selected as the reference. The field  
frequency is 50 Hz.  
INT59N  
The SD REF signal has been selected by the OUT REF setting. Since the  
SD REF signal is not input, the signal (59.94 Hz) from the internal  
generator is selected as the reference.  
INT50P  
The SD REF input signal has been selected by the OUT REF setting.  
Since the SD REF signal is not input, the signal (50 Hz) from the internal  
generator is selected as the reference.  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
HOME  
Function menus  
<HOME>  
Playback reference signal (OutRef) specifications for tape playback  
59.94 Hz/60 Hz, 50 Hz mode  
OUTREF setting (menu 031)  
Input signal provided (“Yes”)/not provided (“No”)  
HD_REF_IN SD_REF_IN  
INPUT  
Yes  
No  
AUTO  
EXT_HD_REF  
HD_REF_IN  
HD_REF_IN  
HD_REF_IN  
HD_REF_IN  
Internal HD  
Internal HD  
Internal HD  
Internal HD  
EXT_SD_REF  
SD_REF_IN  
SD_REF_IN  
Internal SD  
Internal SD  
SD_REF_IN  
SD_REF_IN  
Internal SD  
Internal SD  
INPUT  
INPUT  
HD_REF_IN  
HD_REF_IN  
HD_REF_IN  
HD_REF_IN  
SD_REF_IN  
SD_REF_IN  
INPUT  
Yes  
Internal HD  
INPUT  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
Internal HD  
INPUT  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
Internal HD  
INPUT  
No  
Yes  
No  
No  
Internal HD  
Internal HD  
23.98/24Hz, 25 Hz (HD) mode  
25 Hz (SD) mode  
Input signal provided  
(“Yes”)/not provided (“No”)  
Input signal provided (“Yes”)/  
not provided (“No”)  
OUT REF setting (Menu 031)  
HD_REF_IN  
HD_REF_IN  
SD_REF_IN  
AUTO  
HD_REF  
SD_REF  
Yes  
No  
HD_REF_IN HD_REF_IN SD_REF_IN  
HD_REF_IN HD_REF_IN Internal SD  
SD_REF_IN Internal HD SD_REF_IN  
Yes  
No  
HD_REF_IN  
Internal HD  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
Internal HD  
Internal HD  
Internal SD  
Internal HD: HD playback reference, 74MHzCLK operates at FreeRun setting.  
Internal SD: SD playback reference, 4fscCLK operates at FreeRun setting.  
59.94 Hz/60 Hz operation specifications for tape playback  
OUTREF setting (menu 031)  
Input signal provided (“Yes”)/not provided (“No”)  
HD_REF_IN SD_REF_IN  
INPUT  
AUTO  
EXT_HD_REF  
EXT_SD_REF  
INPUT  
Complies with HD  
REF IN frequency.  
Complies with HD  
REF IN frequency.  
Complies with INPUT  
frequency.  
Yes  
59.94Hz  
Yes  
Complies with HD  
REF IN frequency.  
Complies with HD  
REF IN frequency.  
Complies with Menu  
030 setting.  
No  
Yes  
No  
59.94Hz  
59.94Hz  
59.94Hz  
59.94Hz  
59.94Hz  
59.94Hz  
59.94Hz  
Yes  
Complies with HD  
REF IN frequency.  
Complies with HD  
REF IN frequency.  
Complies with INPUT  
frequency.  
No  
Complies with HD  
REF IN frequency.  
Complies with HD  
REF IN frequency.  
Complies with Menu  
030 setting.  
Complies with Menu  
030 setting.  
Complies with INPUT  
frequency.  
Yes  
No  
59.94Hz  
59.94Hz  
Yes  
Complies with Menu  
030 setting.  
Complies with Menu  
030 setting.  
No  
Complies with INPUT Complies with Menu  
Complies with INPUT  
frequency.  
Yes  
No  
frequency.  
030 setting.  
No  
Complies with Menu  
030 setting.  
Complies with Menu  
030 setting.  
Complies with Menu  
030 setting.  
Menu 030: HD FREQUENCY 59.94/60 selection  
<Note>  
Operation cannot be performed in the 60 Hz mode during SD tape playback.  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function menus  
<HOME>  
Status display 2  
Remaining tape/total tape display  
The lengths of the remaining tape and total tape of the  
inserted cassette are displayed in increments of minutes.  
Indicator  
SCH  
Description of setting  
This lights when the SCH phase of the SDREF  
signal is within the prescribed range.  
Example:  
(10 minutes remaining on a 92-minute tape)  
Total tape  
REM 10/ 92  
CF  
DF  
This lights when color framing is locked.  
Remaining tape  
This lights during recording or playback in the  
drop frame mode.  
<Note>  
<Note>  
Slight errors may occur. The remaining tape value  
blinks when less than 3 minutes of the tape remain.  
If the time code data could not be read properly  
(“T¢R” is displayed), the display of the previous  
status is held.  
Cue time display  
This displays the currently registered cue time. (For  
details on the cue time operation, refer to “Cue point  
registration, preroll and cue-up.”)  
Cue time operations can be performed on the HOME  
screen only.  
Operation mode (speed) display  
This indicates the current operation mode (including  
the speed display).  
Display  
EJECT  
Operation mode  
Eject mode  
Time counter displays  
STANDBY OFF  
T.RELEASE  
STOP  
Standby OFF mode  
Tension release mode  
Stop mode  
Display  
Description  
CTL counter data  
CTL  
TCG  
UBG  
tcg  
PREROLL  
PLAY  
Preroll mode  
Time code data of time code generator  
Playback mode  
User’s bit data of time code generator  
Special playback (playback phase  
adjustment) mode (FWD direction)  
PLAY i  
When the time code data of time code  
generator is preset  
Special playback (playback phase  
adjustment) mode (REV direction)  
ubg  
When the user’s bit data of time code  
generator is preset  
PLAY j  
Time code data of time code reader  
TCR/T¢R  
UBR/U¢R  
REC  
Recording mode  
Jog mode  
User’s bit data of time code reader  
JOG  
REV/STILL/FWD  
If the time code data or user’s bit data could not be  
¢
¢
read out properly, “T R” or “U R” is displayed. If the  
CTL signal is present, the time code data is  
supplemented by CTL.  
VAR (speed)  
[j4.9 to i4.9]  
Variable mode  
Shuttle mode  
SHTL (speed)  
[j32.0 to i32.0]  
FF  
REW  
EDIT  
AUTO EDIT  
PREVIEW  
REVIEW  
Fast forwarding mode  
Rewinding mode  
Editing mode  
Field mark  
TCR 00:00:00:00.  
[1st field: “ ”/2nd field: “.”]  
(This does not appear when the i0.3k or  
j0.3k speed is exceeded.)  
Automatic editing mode  
Preview mode  
Drop frame mark (59/60 Hz mode only)  
[Non-drop frame mode: “:”/drop frame  
mode: “.”]  
Review mode  
When function F6 (VARMEM) on <HOME SHIFT> is “ON”  
DSPD (speed)  
[j1.0 to i2.0]  
DSMP (speed)  
[j1.0 to i2.0]  
DPLY (speed)  
[j1.0 to i2.0]  
Initial speed setting of variable memory  
Variable memory mode indicator  
F6  
This is displayed when the  
(VARMEM) function  
Playback speed memory mode of variable  
memory  
button on <HOME SHIFT> is set to “ON.” While  
is lighted, variable memory operations can be  
performed at any time.  
VM  
Playback mode of variable memory  
(For details, refer to “Variable memory function.”)  
DPRV (speed)  
[j1.0 to i2.0]  
DEDT (speed)  
Preview mode of variable memory editing  
Execution mode of variable memory editing  
[j1.0 to i2.0]  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
HOME  
Function menus  
<HOME>  
Registering TCG values  
1. Selecting the values  
3. Entering the input values  
Press the button. The value input is  
Press the  
Press the  
TC/CTL button to select TC.  
F3  
T
ENT  
button. The selected item (cue time  
registered, and the normal display is restored.  
or TC) is now highlighted.  
Turn the ADJUST dial to select TC.  
<Notes>  
• To cancel the registration, press the  
button.  
C
Again press the  
highlighted, and the mode for inputting numerical  
values is established.  
button. A single digit is  
T
• If the input value is outside the registration  
enable range, the alarm blinks, and  
INVALID  
the value cannot be registered until it has been  
corrected.  
<Notes>  
• The UBG value and cue time can be registered  
in the same way. The CTL value cannot be  
registered.  
• TC or UB can be registered only when the  
internal time code generator has been selected.  
2. Inputting numbers and letters  
Press the  
to  
number keys to input  
0
9
numerical values.  
Use the buttons to input A, B and C, and  
+
F
7
the  
+
buttons to input D, E and F.  
F
8
To move the input digit, turn the ADJUST dial.  
To input a minus sign, press the and  
]
]
F
TRIMj  
buttons when the left-most digit is highlighted.  
To input a plus sign, press the and  
F
TRIMi  
buttons when the left-most digit is highlighted or  
press the button.  
0
(The display goes blank.)  
To clear all the digits to zero, press the  
buttons.  
and  
F
0
<Notes>  
• When the  
button is tapped while the  
7
F
button is held down, the display changes in the  
following sequence: A > B > C > A > B and  
so on. The same applies when D, E and F are  
input using  
and  
.
F
8
• If, when “REV” has been selected as the setup  
menu item No.144 (TC INPUT) setting, the  
F
button is released while a letter is being input,  
the displayed character will be entered.  
• Letters can be input only while a UBG value is  
being registered.  
• The input of a minus number is possible only  
while the cue time is being registered after  
“d12h” is selected as the setup menu No.002  
(TAPE TIMER) setting and CTL is selected by  
the  
TC/CTL button.  
F3  
• If “REV” has been selected as the setup menu  
item No.144 (TC INPUT) setting, the input  
starts from the highest order digit (the display  
appears from the far right). However, turning  
the ADJUST dial once will restore the NORMAL  
input mode.  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function menus  
<HOME>  
Function  
button/item  
Switching  
method  
Corresponding setup  
menu item  
Setting  
TAPE  
Description of setting  
For selecting the output signals.  
F1  
Toggle  
No. 140  
OUTPUT  
EE  
OUTPUT  
<In the STOP mode>  
TAPE: In the STOP mode, the signals played back from the  
tape are output.  
During recording or editing (*), simultaneous playback  
signals are output.  
*: Setup menu item No.302 (CONFI EDIT) must be set.  
EE: The input signals selected by the setup menu items  
No.600 (VIDEO IN SEL) and No.713 (CH1 IN SEL) to  
No.724 (D IN SEL 78) settings are output.  
F2  
___  
___  
___  
___  
___  
___  
F3  
TC/CTL*  
Toggle  
TC  
UB  
For selecting the time counter display.  
2
CTL  
TC: The time code value is displayed.  
UB: The user’s bit value is displayed.  
CTL: The control signal (time data) is displayed.  
F4  
TC CLR*  
Press  
RESET  
For resetting the time counter display.  
If the F4 button is pressed while the control signal (time  
data) is displayed on the time counter, it is reset to zero.  
___  
___  
1
F5  
___  
___  
___  
___  
F6  
OFF  
No. 113  
Refer to the setup menu.  
F i toggle  
R INH  
ALL  
REC INH  
<Note>  
PRE  
NORM  
V/CTL  
The setting can be changed from OFF to ALL simply by  
operating the function button without pressing the F button.  
F1 (SHIFT)  
PREROL  
0s --- 5s ---  
30s  
No. 000  
P-ROLL TIME  
Refer to the setup menu.  
___  
Toggle i  
ADJ  
F2 (SHIFT)  
___  
___  
___  
___  
F3 (SHIFT)  
OUTREF  
AUTO  
INPUT  
No. 031  
OUT REF  
Refer to the setup menu.  
F i toggle  
HD_REF  
SD_REF  
F4 (SHIFT)  
CAPSTN  
2F  
4F  
8F  
No. 109  
CAP. LOCK  
Refer to the setup menu.  
F i toggle  
F5 (SHIFT)  
___  
___  
___  
___  
___  
___  
F6 (SHIFT)  
Toggle  
OFF  
ON  
For selecting the variable memory mode.  
1
VARMEM*  
OFF:The variable memory mode is not used.  
ON: The status is established in which variable memory  
playback or variable memory editing is enabled.  
*1: This item is not displayed when the 23/24 Hz or 25 Hz (HD or SD) mode has been selected as the system menu item No.25 (SYSTEM  
FREQ) setting.  
*2: CTL cannot be selected when the 23/24 Hz or 25 Hz (HD or SD) mode has been selected as the system menu item No.25 (SYSTEM  
FREQ) setting. TC is selected when the power is turned on.  
*The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VIDEO  
Function menus  
<VIDEO>  
The basic input/output settings for the video signals  
are set, and the level of the HD output signals can  
also be adjusted on these menu screens.  
1. Video signal input switching, internal signal  
source type changing, and up-converter aspect  
ratio conversion  
2. Video signal output level adjustments  
Time counter  
SHIFT  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
3. LCD monitor brightness and color adjustments  
F
SHIFT  
This display appears when the  
+
buttons are  
SHIFT  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
pressed. Refer to setup menu items No.670 to 675.  
SHIFT  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
Function  
button/item  
Switching  
method  
Corresponding setup  
menu item  
Setting  
Description of setting  
Refer to the setup menu.  
F1  
Toggle  
INT SG  
No. 600  
VID IN  
HDSDI  
SDTI  
VIDEO IN SEL  
The SD SDI and SDTI settings will not appear if the optional  
boards have not been installed.  
SDSDI  
F2  
INT SG  
Toggle  
100%CB  
75%CB  
SMPTE  
ARIB  
No. 601  
VIDEO INT SG  
Refer to the setup menu.  
MB  
RAMP  
BLACK  
PLL  
EQ  
F3  
Toggle  
CTL  
No. 00  
Refer to the setup menu.  
WFM  
TC  
WFM SEL  
VIDEO  
RF L  
RF R  
ENV L  
ENV R  
F4  
___  
___  
___  
___  
___  
F5  
UP CON  
Toggle  
FIT_V  
FIT_H  
FIT_HV  
No. 621  
UPCONV MODE  
Refer to the setup menu.  
F6  
DW CON  
Toggle  
FIT_V  
FIT_H  
FIT_HV  
14:9  
No. 620  
DOWNCON MODE  
Refer to the setup menu.  
13:9  
*The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function menus  
<VIDEO>  
Function  
button/item  
Switching  
method  
Corresponding setup  
menu item  
Setting  
Description of setting  
When “CMPST” is selected as the setup menu item No.650 (STYLE) setting  
F1 (SHIFT)  
___  
___  
___  
___  
___  
___  
F2 (SHIFT)  
___  
___  
___  
___  
F3 (SHIFT)  
V LV  
0.0% ---  
100.0% ---  
200.0%  
No. 662  
V LEVEL  
Refer to the setup menu.  
To return to the UNITY (100.0%) level, use F i Press.  
Toggle i  
ADJ  
F4 (SHIFT)  
C LV  
0.0% ---  
100.0% ---  
141.3%  
No. 663  
C LEVEL  
Refer to the setup menu.  
To return to the UNITY (100.0%) level, use F i Press.  
Toggle i  
ADJ  
F5 (SHIFT)  
HUE  
No. 664  
HUE  
Refer to the setup menu.  
To return to the UNITY (0.0) level, use F i Press.  
Toggle i  
ADJ  
j31.0 ---  
0.0 ---  
i31.0  
F6 (SHIFT)  
SUP LV  
No. 665  
SETUP LVL  
Refer to the setup menu.  
To return to the UNITY (0.0%) level, use F i Press.  
Toggle i  
ADJ  
j10.0% ---  
0.0% ---  
i10.0%  
When “CMPNT” is selected as the setup menu item No.650 (STYLE) setting  
F1 (SHIFT)  
___  
___  
___  
___  
___  
___  
F2 (SHIFT)  
___  
___  
___  
___  
F3 (SHIFT)  
Y HD  
0.0% ---  
100.0% ---  
141.3%  
No. 653  
Y LVL(HD)  
Refer to the setup menu.  
To return to the UNITY (100.0%) level, use F i Press.  
Toggle i  
ADJ  
F4 (SHIFT)  
Pb HD  
0.0% ---  
100.0% ---  
141.3%  
No. 654  
Pb LVL(HD)  
Refer to the setup menu.  
To return to the UNITY (100.0%) level, use F i Press.  
Toggle i  
ADJ  
F5 (SHIFT)  
Pr HD  
0.0% ---  
100.0% ---  
141.3%  
No. 655  
Pr LVL(HD)  
Refer to the setup menu.  
To return to the UNITY (100.0%) level, use F i Press.  
Toggle i  
ADJ  
F6 (SHIFT)  
BK HD  
No. 656  
BK LVL(HD)  
Refer to the setup menu.  
To return to the UNITY (0.0%) level, use F i Press.  
Toggle i  
ADJ  
j10.0% ---  
0.0% ---  
i10.0%  
*The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AUDIO  
Function menus  
<AUDIO>  
The basic input/output settings for the audio signals  
are set on these menu screens.  
1. Audio signal input selection (CH1jCH4)  
3. Audio volume control switching, CUE audio  
recording signal selection, and audio monitor  
mix switching  
SHIFT  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
2. Audio signal input selection (CH5-CH8)  
SHIFT  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
SHIFT  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
Function  
button/item  
Corresponding setup  
menu item  
Setting  
Setting  
Description of setting  
F1  
A1 IN  
Toggle  
Toggle  
INT SG  
DIGI  
ANA  
No. 713  
CH1 IN SEL  
Refer to the setup menu.  
Refer to the setup menu.  
F2  
A2 IN  
INT SG  
DIGI  
No. 714  
CH2 IN SEL  
ANA  
F3  
DIN 12  
Toggle  
Toggle  
AES  
SDI  
No. 721  
D IN SEL 12  
Refer to the setup menu.  
Refer to the setup menu.  
F4  
A3 IN  
INT SG  
DIGI  
No. 715  
CH3 IN SEL  
ANA  
F5  
A4 IN  
Toggle  
INT SG  
DIGI  
No. 716  
CH4 IN SEL  
Refer to the setup menu.  
ANA  
F6  
DIN 34  
Toggle  
Toggle  
AES  
SDI  
No. 722  
D IN SEL 34  
Refer to the setup menu.  
Refer to the setup menu.  
F1 (SHIFT1)  
A5 IN  
INT SG  
DIGI  
No. 717  
CH5 IN SEL  
ANA1  
F2 (SHIFT1)  
A6 IN  
Toggle  
INT SG  
DIGI  
No. 718  
CH6 IN SEL  
Refer to the setup menu.  
ANA2  
F3 (SHIFT1)  
DIN 56  
Toggle  
Toggle  
AES  
SDI  
No. 723  
D IN SEL 56  
Refer to the setup menu.  
Refer to the setup menu.  
F4 (SHIFT1)  
A7 IN  
INT SG  
DIGI  
No. 719  
CH7 IN SEL  
ANA3  
F5 (SHIFT1)  
A8 IN  
Toggle  
Toggle  
INT SG  
DIGI  
ANA4  
No. 720  
CH8 IN SEL  
Refer to the setup menu.  
Refer to the setup menu.  
F6 (SHIFT1)  
DIN 78  
AES  
SDI  
No. 724  
D IN SEL 78  
*The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function menus  
<AUDIO>  
Function  
button/item  
Switching  
method  
Corresponding setup  
menu item  
Setting  
REC  
Description of setting  
Refer to the setup menu.  
F1 (SHIFT2)  
VOLUME  
Toggle  
No. 141  
VOLUME  
PB  
For switching what is to be controlled by the audio volume  
controls. (The levels of all the CH1jCH8 channels are controlled.)  
AUTO  
F2 (SHIFT2)  
___  
___  
___  
___  
___  
F3 (SHIFT2)  
RECCUE  
Toggle  
CUE  
CH1  
CH2  
CH3  
CH4  
CH5  
CH6  
CH7  
CH8  
No. 733  
REC CUE  
Refer to the setup menu.  
i
CH1  
CH3  
CH5  
CH7  
CH1  
2
4
6
8
8
i
i
i
j
F4 (SHIFT2)  
___  
___  
___  
Toggle  
___  
___  
___  
___  
___  
F5 (SHIFT2)  
___  
___  
F6 (SHIFT2)  
M MIX  
OFF  
No. 737  
MONI MIX  
Refer to the setup menu.  
L
R
L/R  
*The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TC  
Function menus  
<TC>  
The TC-related settings are performed on these menu  
screens.Whether the TC is to be superimposed onto  
the display can also be set on this screen.  
SHIFT  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
SHIFT  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
Function  
button/item  
Switching  
method  
Corresponding setup  
menu item  
Setting  
Description of setting  
F1  
Toggle  
When HD SDI, INT SG or SDTI is selected:  
No. 507  
Refer to the setup menu.  
TC SRC  
INT  
TC SOURCE  
EXT_L  
SLTC  
SVITC  
When SD SDI is selected:  
INT  
EXT_L  
VITC  
F2  
___  
___  
___  
___  
___  
F3  
TCG MD  
Toggle  
REGEN  
PRE  
No. 503  
TCG MODE  
Refer to the setup menu.  
AUTO  
F4  
TCG RG  
Toggle  
TC&UB  
TC  
No. 505  
TCG REGEN  
Refer to the setup menu.  
UB  
F5  
RUN MD  
Toggle  
F i toggle  
Toggle  
REC  
FREE  
No. 504  
RUN MODE  
Refer to the setup menu.  
Refer to the setup menu.  
Refer to the setup menu.  
Refer to the setup menu.  
Refer to the setup menu.  
Refer to the setup menu.  
F6  
DF MOD  
DF  
NDF  
No. 511  
DF MODE  
F1 (SHIFT)  
SUPER  
OFF  
ON  
No. 005  
SUPER  
F2 (SHIFT)  
C HPOS  
0 --- 6 --- 37  
No. 007  
CHARA H-POS  
Toggle i  
ADJ  
F3 (SHIFT)  
C VPOS  
0 --- 23 --- 32  
No. 008  
CHARA V-POS  
Toggle i  
ADJ  
F4 (SHIFT)  
DISPLY  
Toggle  
TIME  
No. 006  
DISPLAY SEL  
T&STA  
T&S&M  
T&RT  
T&YMD  
T&MDY  
T&DMY  
F5 (SHIFT)  
C TYPE  
Toggle  
Toggle  
WHITE  
W/OUT  
No. 009  
CHARA TYPE  
Refer to the setup menu.  
Refer to the setup menu.  
F6 (SHIFT)  
TIMER  
d
12h  
No. 002  
TAPE TIMER  
24h  
*The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function menus  
<CUE>  
A maximum of 60 cue points can be set on these menu  
Moving to registered points  
screens. When “AUTO” has been selected as the  
F3  
The highlighting on the registered point display area is  
moved by turning the ADJUST dial. It is moved in the  
ascending order of points when the dial is turned  
clockwise and in the descending order of points when  
it is turned counterclockwise. When “AUTO” has  
(PAGE) setting on the AUTO PAGE mode <CUE SHIFT>  
menu, up to 10 pages of cue points with 6 cue points on  
each page can be managed on a page-by-page basis.  
The 60 cue points are indicated using the page number  
display and registered point display areas.  
<Note>  
Cue points cannot be registered, prerolled, etc. if a  
setting other than “ENA” has been selected as the setup  
menu item No.001 (LOCAL ENA) setting in the REMOTE  
mode.  
been selected as the  
(PAGE) setting on the  
F3  
<CUE SHIFT> menu, the highlighting can be moved  
also to the previous or next page.  
• Depending on the setting selected for  
F4  
(ROTATE) on the <CUE SHIFT> menu, the  
following applies to moving the highlighting in the  
ascending order of points.  
Page number display area  
Cue point data display areas  
When “OFF” is set:  
Registered point display area  
The highlighting cannot be moved from page 9 to  
page 0.  
When “ON” is set:  
The highlighting can be moved from page 9 to page 0.  
In moving in the descending order of points, the  
highlighting cannot be moved from page 0 to page 9.  
•
SHIFT  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
Search point and registered point  
operations  
Each time the  
(MODE) button of the <CUE>  
F3  
menu is pressed, the search mode and cue point  
registration mode are switched alternately. Perform  
the search point or registered point operations in the  
respective mode.  
• When the power is turned on, the search point or  
registered point, whichever was established when  
the power was last turned off, is established.  
SHIFT  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
Page number display area  
The page number from 0 to 9 is indicated here.  
Registered point display area  
On each page, six cue point data managed by  
registered point numbers are displayed. A point  
whose registered point number is highlighted is  
targeted for registration and search.  
• When the setting for  
(PAGE) or  
(ROTATE)  
F4  
F3  
on the <CUE SHIFT> menu has been changed,  
“01” (page 0/point no.1) is set for both the search  
and registered points.  
Shown below is the correlation between the page  
numbers and registered point numbers.  
Cue point registration mode  
It is possible to register points to which the tape is to  
be prerolled. When the display page has been  
Page no. Registered points Page no. Registered points  
0
1
2
3
4
01–06  
11–16  
21–26  
31–36  
41–46  
5
6
7
8
9
51–56  
61–66  
71–76  
81–86  
91–96  
changed using the  
(PREV) or  
(NEXT) button  
F2  
F1  
on the <CUE> menu, the following applies depending  
on the setting for  
(PAGE) on the <CUE SHIFT>  
F3  
menu.  
When “MANU” is set:  
Both the search and registered points move to the top  
of the changed page.  
When “AUTO” is set:  
Only the registered point moves to the top of the  
changed page; the search point does not move.  
Page operations  
Pages can be scrolled in the forward or reverse direction  
F1  
F2  
using the [F1] (PREV) or [F2] (NEXT) function buttons.  
F4  
•
Depending on the setting selected for [F4] (ROTATE)  
on the <CUE SHIFT> menu, the following applies to  
scrolling pages in the forward direction.  
When “OFF” is set:  
Page 0 cannot be scrolled forward from page 9.  
When “ON” is set:  
Page 0 can be scrolled forward from page 9.  
In scrolling pages in the reverse direction, page 9  
cannot be scrolled in reverse from page 0.  
•
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CUE  
Function menus  
<CUE>  
Search mode  
When “AUTO” is set:  
The desired search point can be selected, and the  
tape can be prerolled to that point.  
When the display page has been changed using the  
When a page become full during the cue point  
registration process, operation automatically moves to  
the next page, and registration continues. When  
CUE96 on the last page is reached, registration is  
[
(PREV) or  
(NEXT) button on the <CUE>  
F2  
F1  
2
menu, the following applies depending on the setting  
for (PAGE) on the <CUE SHIFT> menu.  
automatically terminated. (* )  
F3  
A change must be made to the points to be registered  
if more cue points are to be registered. Check that  
the cue point registration mode is established, change  
the page, and change the points to be registered. In  
this case, the search point will not be changed.  
When “MANU” is set:  
Both the search and registered points move to the top  
of the changed page.  
When “AUTO” is set:  
Only the search point moves to the top of the changed  
page; the registered point does not move.  
(*2)If “ON” is selected as the  
(ROTATE) setting  
F4  
on the <CUE SHIFT> menu, the registration of the  
cue points will rotate from page 9 (CUE96) to  
page 0 (CUE01).  
Cue point registration  
Turn the ADJUST dial to highlight the point which is to  
be registered. When the  
button is pressed, the  
SET  
When registering cue points by number  
1. Turn the ADJUST dial to highlight the desired  
registered point display area.  
current tape position is registered as the cue point.  
The following applies depending on the setting for  
(PAGE) on the <CUE SHIFT> menu.  
When “MANU” is set:  
F3  
2. Press the  
button twice. Only the “10’s” hour  
T
Operations are performed on the selected page.  
Press the button to register the points in  
SET  
digit of the selected cue point is now highlighted,  
and the change enable status is established.  
<Note>  
When “REV” has been selected as the setup menu  
item No.144 (TC INPUT) setting, the input of the  
number will start from the higher-order digit (it will  
be displayed starting from the far right).  
succession (CUE¢1 > CUE¢2 > ... > CUE¢6) on  
the selected page. (Any points already registered will  
be overwritten.)  
The registration is automatically terminated when  
1
CUE¢6 is registered on the page. (* )  
A change must be made to the points to be registered  
if more cue points are to be registered. Check that  
the cue point registration mode is established, change  
the page, and change the points to be registered. In  
this case, the search point will also move  
automatically to the top (CUE¢1) of the changed  
page.  
3. Input the number using the number keys.  
Movement from one digit to the next is done  
automatically after one number has been input.  
The desired digit can also be selected by turning  
the ADJUST dial.  
(*1)If “ON” is selected as the  
] (ROTATE) setting  
4. To enter the number, press the  
button.  
ENT  
F4  
on the <CUE SHIFT> menu, the registration of the  
cue points will rotate on the same page in the  
following order: CUE¢1 > CUE¢2 > ... >  
CUE¢6 > CUE¢1 > CUE¢2 > ...  
When the display screen is switched or when the  
button is pressed during the input process, the  
change enable status is released, and the setting is  
canceled.  
C
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function menus  
<CUE>  
Clearing registered points  
Clearing individual registered points  
$
Clearing all the registered points together  
$
When  
(AL CLR) on the <CUE> menu is pressed  
When the  
(CLR) button on the <CUE> menu is  
F4  
F5  
while the  
button is held down, all the cue point data  
F
pressed, the currently selected cue point data is  
cleared.  
* The point is cleared only when “ENTRY” (cue point  
registration mode) is selected as the setting for F3 ]  
(MODE) on the <CUE> menu.  
currently selected is cleared. The range of the points  
which are cleared is as follows depending on the  
setting for  
(PAGE) on the <CUE SHIFT> menu.  
F3  
When “MANU” is set:  
All the points on the currently selected page are  
cleared.  
When “AUTO” is set:  
All the points on all the pages are cleared.  
Search operations  
Turn the ADJUST dial to highlight the desired  
registered point.  
When the PREROLL button is pressed, the preroll  
operation is initiated. The tape will not be prerolled if  
no cue points have been registered.  
Since the tape is not prerolled even if the PREROLL  
button is pressed when the cue point registration  
mode is established, be absolutely sure to check that  
the search mode is established.  
After clearing, the search and registered points  
appear as follows depending on the setting for  
(PAGE) on the <CUE SHIFT> menu.  
When “MANU” is set:  
F3  
A return is made to the top (CUE¢1) of the page  
concerned.  
When “AUTO” is set:  
(The time selected by the <CUE SHIFT> menu [  
F5  
(CU-ROL) setting, which is different from the normal  
preroll time, takes effect as the preroll time in this  
mode.)  
A return is made automatically to the top (CUE01) of  
the first page.  
* Points are cleared whether “ENTRY” (cue point  
registration mode) or “SEARCH” (search mode) is selected  
as the setting for [ F3 ] (MODE) on the <CUE> menu.  
Function  
button/item  
Switching  
method  
Corresponding setup  
Setting  
Description of setting  
menu item  
F1  
PREV  
Press  
Press  
For multi-cue page forward scrolling.  
___  
___  
F2  
NEXT  
For multi-cue page reverse scrolling.  
___  
___  
___  
___  
___  
F3  
MODE  
Toggle  
Press  
SEARCH  
ENTRY  
For selecting the search or cue point registration mode.  
F4  
CLR  
For clearing the currently selected cue data.  
ENTRY must be selected as the F3 (MODE) setting.  
___  
F5  
AL CLR  
When MANU is selected by SHIFT + F3 (PAGE): All the cue  
data on the currently displayed page is cleared.  
When AUTO is selected by SHIFT + F3 (PAGE): All the cue  
data on all the pages is cleared.  
FiPress  
___  
F6  
___  
___  
FiPress  
Toggle  
___  
___  
___  
___  
___  
For calling the MULTI CUE file operation menu.  
Refer to the setup menu.  
Refer to the setup menu.  
Refer to the setup menu.  
___  
F2 (SHIFT)  
CARD  
F3 (SHIFT)  
PAGE  
MANU  
AUTO  
No. 131  
PAGE MODE  
F4 (SHIFT)  
ROTATE  
Toggle  
OFF  
ON  
No. 132  
ROTA MODE  
F5 (SHIFT)  
CU-ROL  
0s --- 5s ---  
15s  
No. 011  
CU-ROLL TIME  
Toggle i  
ADJ  
F6 (SHIFT)  
___  
___  
___  
___  
* This item is not displayed when the 23/24 Hz or 25 Hz (HD or  
SD) mode has been selected as the system menu item No.25  
(SYSTEM FREQ) setting.  
*The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DIAG  
Function menus  
<DIAG>  
The warnings and hour-meter can be checked on  
these menu screens. On the SHIFT menu screen,  
error log files can be checked, deleted or saved onto  
or loaded from IC cards.  
Warning messages  
which are saved  
Description  
(Refer to page 118 and following.)  
NO RF  
A blank section on the tape lasting more  
second has been detected.  
(During normal playback)  
than  
1
Warning mark  
SV NOT LOCKED  
LOW RF  
The servo has been disengaged for more  
than 3 seconds.  
(During recording,  
normal playback or editing)  
An envelope level which is about 1/3 of  
normal or a CTL level which is about 1/6  
of normal has been detected for more  
than 1 second. (During recording, normal  
playback or editing)  
SHIFT  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
HIGH ERROR RATE The error rate has deteriorated, and  
correction or compensation has been  
applied to the video or audio playback  
signals. (During normal playback)  
LCD monitor displays  
Warning display  
When a warning occurs in this VTR, the warning mark  
(W) blinks at the top left of the screen. If (WARN)  
Operation mode display  
F1  
is now pressed, the details of the warning can be  
checked out on the LCD monitor.  
Saved warning status display  
When more than one warning has occurred, turn the  
ADJ dial to scroll through the messages.  
Time code display  
Hour-meter display  
When  
(HOURS) is pressed, the hour-meter  
F2  
information can be checked out on the LCD monitor.  
Warning display  
Error log function  
Operation mode display  
This indicates the operation mode at the point when  
the warning was saved.  
Warning display  
The error log mode can be selected by pressing the  
button and switching the screen to <DIAG  
SHIFT  
SHIFT>.  
This indicates the warning message which is saved.  
Saved warning status display  
This indicates the number of the currently displayed  
warning which has been saved and the total number  
of warnings which have been saved.  
Time code display  
SHIFT  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
General description  
This indicates the time code at the point when the  
When the following warnings have occurred while the  
tape is running, the warning messages, time codes  
and operating modes are saved, and a list of this  
information can be read out on the LCD monitor. Up  
to 99 warnings which have occurred can be saved. If  
the storage capacity of 99 warnings is exceeded, the  
processing that is conducted as a result is based on  
the setup menu item No.015 (AUTO STEP) setting.  
warning was saved.  
Cueing up the tape to the warning point  
The warning list displayed on the LCD monitor can be  
scrolled by turning the ADJ dial. When the warning  
occurrence point to be checked is selected and the  
PREROLL button is pressed, the tape is cued up to  
the position of the time code which has been saved.  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function menus  
<DIAG>  
Function  
button/item  
Switching  
method  
Corresponding setup  
menu item  
Setting  
Description of setting  
F1  
WARN  
For displaying the warning messages on the LCD monitor.  
___  
___  
___  
___  
___  
___  
Toggle  
FiPress  
___  
___  
FiPress  
___  
___  
___  
___  
___  
___  
___  
___  
F2  
HOURS  
For displaying the hour-meter on the LCD monitor.  
___  
___  
___  
___  
___  
F3  
___  
___  
F4  
___  
___  
F5  
___  
___  
F6  
___  
___  
Refer to the setup menu.  
For calling the error log file operation menu.  
___  
F1 (SHIFT)  
STEP  
OFF  
ON  
No. 015  
AUTO STEP  
F2 (SHIFT)  
CARD  
___  
___  
___  
___  
___  
___  
F3 (SHIFT)  
___  
___  
___  
___  
___  
F4 (SHIFT)  
___  
___  
F5 (SHIFT)  
AL CLR  
For clearing error log files.  
___  
F6 (SHIFT)  
___  
Concerning the setup menu item No.015 (AUTO  
STEP) setting (default: OFF)  
Up to 99 warning messages can be saved by the error  
log function, and this setup menu item determines  
what kind of save processing is to be conducted when  
this storage capacity is exceeded.  
OFF: 99 messages are set as the upper limit, and no  
further messages of warnings that occur will be  
saved.  
ON: 99 messages are saved, and any further  
message of a warnings that occurs is saved in  
No.99. The warning messages already saved  
are each shifted down by one number in  
succession.  
Messages saved when ON is selected as the setting  
No. in which  
message is  
saved  
No. in which  
message is  
saved  
Saved warning  
Saved warning  
1/99  
2/99  
Warning 1  
Warning 2  
1/99  
2/99  
Warning 2  
Warning 3  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
99/99  
Warning 99  
99/99  
Warning 100  
When up to 99 messages have been saved  
and the 100th warning has occurred  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MENU  
Function menus  
<MENU>  
These enable movement to the menu screens for  
operations (adjustments, saving data onto or loading it  
from the internal memory or IC cards) relating to the  
SYSTEM and SETUP menus.  
SHIFT  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
SHIFT  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
Function  
button/item  
Switching  
method  
Corresponding setup  
menu item  
Setting  
Description of setting  
F1  
FILE  
For calling the operation menu for saving the SYSTEM and  
SETUP adjustment values (in the internal memory).  
FiPress  
FiPress  
___  
___  
___  
___  
___  
___  
___  
___  
___  
___  
___  
___  
___  
___  
F2  
CARD  
For calling the operation menu for saving the SYSTEM and  
SETUP adjustment values (onto the IC card).  
___  
___  
___  
___  
___  
___  
___  
___  
___  
___  
___  
F3  
___  
___  
For calling the SYSTEM adjustment operation menu.  
For calling the SETUP adjustment operation menu.  
___  
F4  
SYSTEM  
FiPress  
FiPress  
___  
F5  
SETUP  
F6  
___  
F1 (SHIFT)  
PF1 FT  
For calling the PF1/function button assignment operation  
menu.  
FiPress  
FiPress  
FiPress  
FiPress  
FiPress  
FiPress  
F2 (SHIFT)  
PF1 BK  
For calling the PF1/function button assignment operation  
menu.  
F3 (SHIFT)  
PF2 FT  
For calling the PF2/function button assignment operation  
menu.  
F4 (SHIFT)  
PF2 BK  
For calling the PF2/function button assignment operation  
menu.  
F5 (SHIFT)  
50P IN  
For calling the 50-pin (input pin) assignment operation  
menu.  
F6 (SHIFT)  
50P OT  
For calling the 50-pin (output pin) assignment operation  
menu.  
*The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function menus  
<ASSEMBLE>  
The ASSEMBLE editing mode is selected on this  
menu screen.  
IN point  
OUT point  
SHIFT  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
Automatic editing and manual editing  
• When the editing mode has been selected (the  
button is lighted), automatic editing or  
ASSEM  
manual editing can be performed even after the  
ASSEMBLE screen has been exited.  
• After the edit IN and OUT points have been  
IN  
OUT  
buttons are lighted),  
registered (the  
and  
the tape can be prerolled to an IN point or cued up  
to an IN or OUT point even after the ASSEMBLE  
screen has been exited.  
Function  
button/item  
Switching  
method  
Corresponding setup  
menu item  
Setting  
Description of setting  
F1  
ASSEM  
Toggle  
OFF  
ON  
For setting the editing mode to ON or OFF.  
When the display is highlighted, the ASSEMBLE editing  
mode is set to ON, and the ASSEM button lights.  
___  
F2  
___  
___  
___  
___  
___  
___  
___  
___  
___  
___  
___  
___  
___  
___  
___  
___  
___  
___  
___  
___  
___  
F3  
___  
F4  
___  
F5  
___  
F6  
___  
*The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INSERT  
Function menus  
<INSERT>  
The INSERT editing mode and editing channels are  
selected on this menu screen.  
Marker  
OUT point  
IN point  
SHIFT  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
AUDIO IN point  
AUDIO OUT point  
Registering the edit points  
After the edit IN and OUT points have been  
IN  
OUT  
buttons light.  
registered, the  
and  
Automatic editing and manual editing  
• When the editing mode has been selected (the  
INSERT  
button is lighted), automatic editing or  
manual editing can be performed even after the  
INSERT screen has been exited.  
• After the edit IN and OUT points have been  
IN  
OUT  
buttons are lighted),  
registered (the  
and  
the tape can be prerolled to an IN point or cued up  
to an IN or OUT point even after the INSERT  
screen has been exited.  
Function  
button/item  
Switching  
method  
Corresponding setup  
menu item  
Setting  
Description of setting  
F1  
V
Toggle  
For setting the editing mode to ON or OFF and selecting  
the editing channels.  
___  
___  
With the exception of the function button (F1), two channels  
are allocated.  
F2  
A5, A1  
Use the SHIFT button to move the marker up or down, and  
while specifying the channels, press the function buttons to  
select them. Pressing the SHIFT button on other screens  
serves a different purpose (screen switching) from its use  
here.  
For setting the editing mode to ON or OFF.  
When one of the channel displays is highlighted, the  
INSERT editing mode is set to ON, and the INSERT button  
lights.  
F3  
A6, A2  
F4  
A7, A3  
F5  
A8, A4  
F6  
T, CUE  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function menus  
<SETUP MENU/SYSTEM MENU>  
When the SETUP MENU or SYSTEM MENU opera-  
tion menu is selected, a menu list appears on the  
monitor, and the respective items can be set.  
2. Changing the settings  
1. In the menu item selection status, press the  
ADJ dial.  
At this time, the setting of the menu item  
indicated by the menu item selection cursor  
blinks on the monitor.  
SETUP menu  
Change mark  
2. Turn the ADJ dial to select the setting. (Turn it  
clockwise to move up through the settings and  
counterclockwise to move down through the  
settings.)  
When the ADJ dial is pressed again, the menu  
item selection status is restored.  
<Notes>  
SHIFT  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
SYSTEM menu  
Change mark  
• Setting items which have submenus  
SHIFT  
A submenu is opened by pressing the  
button. The same operations as the ones  
described above are then used to change the  
settings.  
SHIFT  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
• Canceling individual items  
F3  
When  
(CANCEL) is pressed, the setting  
Monitor display menu  
operation is canceled, and the item selection  
status is restored.  
Item selection cursor  
Item number  
3. Entering settings  
Category  
(After a setting has been entered, the menu  
operation is forcibly exited.)  
Setting number  
F5  
Press  
(SET) to enter a setting.  
4. Exiting the menu operation  
F6  
When the  
(EXIT) button is pressed in the  
menu item selection status, the menu operation is  
exited, and the original operation screen is  
restored.  
F6  
However, if the  
(EXIT) button is pressed after  
Setting  
a setting has been changed without that setting  
having been entered, a confirmation message will  
be displayed.  
Item name  
Item number  
Settings  
Confirmation message  
1. Selecting the menu items  
Confirmation item  
Description of setting  
Select the menu item by turning the ADJ dial.  
(The cursor is moved down when the dial is turned  
clockwise and up when it is turned counter-  
clockwise.)  
EXIT confirmation  
EXIT?  
When an attempt has been  
made to exit the menu  
operation after a setting has  
been changed without that  
setting having been entered  
F3: CANCEL  
F5: SET(and EXIT)  
F6: EXIT(without SET)  
• Forward or reverse page scrolling (SETUP  
menu only)  
The menu list is organized by category, and the  
pages can be scrolled in the forward or reverse  
direction on a category by category basis.  
<Note>  
F1  
F2  
(: PREV),  
(; NEXT)  
The “!” mark appears at the bottom left of the screen  
when a setting has been changed.  
<Note>  
The screen may continue to scroll for a few  
moments after the ADJ dial has been turned.  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SETUP MENU/  
SYSTEM MENU  
Function menus  
<SETUP MENU/SYSTEM MENU>  
Flow of setting changes  
Press the ADJ dial.  
Press SHIFT.  
Submenu  
Change the setting  
Open the  
screen.  
Turn the ADJ dial.  
F i F4 (item reset)  
Turn the ADJ dial.  
F i F4 (item reset)  
Select the menu  
item  
Close the  
screen.  
F6 (EXIT)  
Change the setting  
Press the ADJ dial.  
Turn the ADJ dial.  
F i F4 (item reset),  
FiF5 (SET)  
SETUP MENU function buttons  
Function  
button/item  
Switching  
method  
Corresponding setup  
Setting  
Description of setting  
menu item  
F1  
: PREV  
Press  
Press  
Press  
Press  
Press  
Press  
For scrolling the on-screen menu pages in the forward  
direction.  
___  
___  
F2  
; NEXT  
For scrolling the on-screen menu pages in the reverse  
direction.  
___  
___  
___  
___  
___  
___  
___  
___  
___  
___  
F3  
CANCEL  
___  
F4  
RESET  
For resetting an item (while a setting is being changed).  
For entering what has been set.  
F5  
SET  
F6  
EXIT  
For exiting the special menu (and transferring to the original  
menu). (Confirmation message provided)  
F1 (SHIFT)  
F2 (SHIFT)  
F3 (SHIFT)  
F4 (SHIFT)  
F5 (SHIFT)  
F6 (SHIFT)  
___  
___  
___  
___  
___  
SYSTEM MENU  
function buttons  
Function  
button/item  
Switching  
method  
Corresponding setup  
menu item  
Setting  
Description of setting  
F1  
F2  
___  
___  
___  
___  
___  
F3  
CANCEL  
Press  
___  
___  
___  
___  
___  
F4  
RESET  
Press  
Press  
Press  
For resetting an item (while a setting is being changed).  
F5  
SET  
For entering what has been set.  
___  
___  
___  
___  
F6  
EXIT  
For exiting the special menu (and transferring to the original  
menu). (Confirmation message provided)  
F1 (SHIFT)  
F2 (SHIFT)  
F3 (SHIFT)  
F4 (SHIFT)  
F5 (SHIFT)  
F6 (SHIFT)  
___  
___  
___  
___  
___  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function menus  
<FILE>  
The current setting information, including the SETUP  
menu contents, can be provided with titles and either  
saved in or loaded from the backup memory in one of  
4 variations.  
Settings  
1. Selecting the memory target  
SHIFT  
Press the  
button.  
The operation target switches alternately between  
F1  
F
When  
(FILE) is pressed while the  
button is held  
C
1
4
VTR MEMORY  
and VTR MEMORY  
to  
.
down on the <MENU> screen, the following function  
menu is displayed.  
2. Selecting the operation file in the selected  
memory  
Memory selection cursor  
Memory name  
The number of the currently selected file is  
highlighted on the display. When the ADJ dial is  
turned, the highlighting moves to the left or right,  
enabling operation files to be selected.  
3. Transferring files between memories  
F2  
1
After selecting the operation file, press  
(LOAD).  
SHIFT  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
The contents of files selected in VTR MEMORY  
File title  
(VTR)  
4
C
to  
When  
the factory setting mode is established.  
can be transferred to VTR MEMORY  
.
F
F2  
is selected and  
(LOAD) is pressed,  
File title  
(VTR)  
File status  
(VTR)  
F3  
Alternatively, when  
contents of a file in VTR MEMORY  
transferred to a file selected in VTR MEMORY  
(SAVE) is pressed, the  
C
can be  
File number  
(VTR)  
File number  
(VTR)  
1
4
to . (The titles are also transferred at the same  
time.)  
Warning  
message  
4. Editing the title of the selected file  
Press the ADJ dial after selecting the operation  
file.  
C
• This VTR comes with VTR MEMORY  
for storing  
1
4
the current settings (*) and VTR MEMORY  
for storing these settings as a backup.  
• Each VTR MEMORY can be provided with a title.  
to  
The first digit of the title display area is highlighted,  
and the file title can be edited.  
• Data can be saved and loaded and titles can be  
• To input a number, press the number keys.  
• To input letters, tap the numbers keys until the  
letter to be input appears while holding down  
C
copied between VTR MEMORY  
and VTR  
1
4
MEMORY  
to  
.
F
• The file locking facility for preventing data from  
the  
button.  
being overwritten can be engaged for VTR  
More than one letter is allocated to each  
number key.  
1
4
MEMORY  
to  
.
• Turn the ADJ dial to move from one digit to the  
next in the title display area.  
• To enter the title, press the ADJ dial again.  
* The term “settings” used here refers to all the settings on  
the setup menus excluding the SYSTEM menu, what has  
been registered in the PF1 and PF2 menu items, and the  
contents of some of the function buttons.  
<Notes>  
• When the display screen has been switched or  
Name of memory area  
VTR MEMORY C  
VTR MEMORY 1  
VTR MEMORY 2  
VTR MEMORY 3  
VTR MEMORY 4  
Initial title (up to 8 characters)  
C
the  
button has been pressed during title  
CURRENT  
USER1  
USER2  
USER3  
USER4  
editing, the editing enable status is canceled,  
and the setting becomes invalid.  
F
• A space can be input by pressing the  
button  
3
and  
button.  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FILE  
Function menus  
<FILE>  
Settings  
5. File overwrite inhibit facility  
It is possible to lock the overwrite inhibit facility for  
1
4
individual files in VTR MEMORY  
to . Select  
F5  
the file to be locked, and press  
(LOCK) to lock  
it.  
If  
F5  
(LOCK) is pressed again, the facility is  
unlocked.  
The locked or unlocked mode is displayed in the  
file status.  
≤
µ
[ : Unlocked status, : locked status]  
Function  
button/item  
Switching  
method  
Corresponding setup  
menu item  
Setting  
OFF  
USER1  
USER2  
USER3  
USER4  
Description of setting  
Refer to the setup menu.  
F1  
Press  
A02  
P.ON LOAD  
P. LOAD  
F2  
LOAD  
Press  
Press  
For downloading data to the current file.  
For downloading data to the backup file.  
___  
___  
___  
(
)
F3  
SAVE  
___  
F4  
___  
___  
Press  
___  
___  
___  
___  
___  
___  
___  
F5  
LOCK  
For locking the backup file.  
F6  
EXIT  
___  
___  
___  
F1 (SHIFT)  
F2 (SHIFT)  
F3 (SHIFT)  
F4 (SHIFT)  
F5 (SHIFT)  
F6 (SHIFT)  
___  
___  
___  
___  
*The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function menus  
<PF1/PF2>  
Up to 24 frequently used setup menu items can be  
registered. The items are registered on the function  
menus shown below. (No settings have been  
registered before the VTR leaves the factory.)  
4. Entering the menu items.  
Press the ADJ dial.  
The target of the ADJ dial operation returns to the  
front panel. Whatever was selected in step 3  
above is displayed for the registered menu  
number and name.  
To display one of the function menus, press  
(PF1  
F1  
FT),  
(PF1 BK),  
(PF2 FT) or  
(PF2 BK)  
F4  
F2  
F3  
while holding down the  
button on the <MENU  
F
5. To select a menu item for another function button,  
SHIFT> screen.  
repeat steps 1, 2, 3 and 4 above.  
Selection marker  
6. Saving the settings in a PF registration file  
To save what has been set in the function buttons  
Registered menu number  
in a PF registration file, press  
(SET).  
F5  
Menu name  
If F6 (EXIT) is pressed without the settings  
having been saved, the settings will be canceled.  
When menu items are registered, they can be  
called simply by pressing the PF1 or PF2 direct  
menu button.  
SHIFT  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
When  
is pressed :  
PF1  
<PF1 FT>  
Item selection cursor  
When  
is pressed after pressing  
is pressed :  
:
:
SHIFT  
PF1  
PF2  
<PF1 BK>  
When  
<PF2 FT>  
Item number  
Category  
PF2  
Setting number  
When  
is pressed after pressing  
SHIFT  
<PF2 BK>  
Clearing the menu items  
1. Turn the ADJ dial to move the selection marker,  
and select one of the function buttons  
whose menu items are to be cleared.  
to  
F6  
F1  
Setting  
2. Press  
(RESET).  
The registered menu  
F4  
Item name  
number and name displays will now go blank.  
Item number  
3. To clear the menu items from other function  
Registration  
buttons, repeat steps 1 and 2 above.  
1. Selecting the function buttons  
Turn the ADJ dial to move the selection marker,  
and select one of the function buttons to  
4. To save what has been set in the function buttons  
in a PF registration file, press  
(SET).  
F5  
F1  
F6  
If  
(EXIT) is pressed without the settings  
F6  
into which the menu items are to be registered.  
having been saved, the above settings will be  
canceled.  
2. Entering the function button  
Press the ADJ dial.  
The display of the function button entered is  
highlighted.  
Clearing all the function button settings  
Press  
(RESET) while holding down the  
button.  
F4  
F
All the registered menu number and name displays  
will now go blank.  
All the contents of the PF registration file are cleared.  
(They cannot be restored.)  
3. Selecting menu items  
Turn the ADJ dial, and select the menu item for  
the function button which was selected in step 1  
above.  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PF1/PF2  
Function menus  
<PF1/PF2>  
Flow of function button registration  
Press the  
ADJ dial.  
Open the  
screen.  
Select the function  
Select the menu  
items.  
button to be registered.  
Close the  
screen.  
F6 (EXIT)  
Press the  
ADJ dial.  
F3 (cancel)  
Turn the ADJ dial.  
Turn the ADJ dial.  
F1 (forward page scroll)  
F2 (reverse page scroll)  
F4 (one button reset)  
F i F4 (all buttons reset)  
F5 (settings entered)  
PF1/PF2 function buttons  
Function  
button/item  
Switching  
method  
Corresponding setup  
menu item  
Setting  
Description of setting  
F1  
: PREV  
Press  
Press  
Press  
Press  
For scrolling the on-screen menu pages in the forward  
direction.  
___  
___  
___  
___  
F2  
; NEXT  
For scrolling the on-screen menu pages in the reverse  
direction.  
___  
___  
F3  
CANCEL  
For releasing the menu item selection status.  
F4  
RESET  
For clearing one button: what has been selected for the pin  
by the individual reset selection marker is cleared.  
___  
___  
For clearing all the buttons: what has been registered in all  
the pins is deleted from the PF registration files.  
FiPress  
F5  
SET  
Press  
Press  
For entering the settings. (No confirmation message  
provided)  
___  
___  
___  
___  
F6  
EXIT  
For exiting the special menu (and transferring to the original  
menu). (Confirmation message provided)  
F1 (SHIFT)  
F2 (SHIFT)  
F3 (SHIFT)  
F4 (SHIFT)  
F5 (SHIFT)  
F6 (SHIFT)  
___  
___  
___  
___  
___  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function menus  
<PF1/PF2>  
PF1/PF2 function button names  
When SETUP menu items have been registered in the function buttons, the names of these function buttons are  
displayed as set forth in the table below.  
Setup menu  
item No.  
Name of setup menu  
item  
Setup menu  
item No.  
Name of setup menu  
item  
Function button name  
Function button name  
000  
001  
002  
003  
004  
005  
006  
007  
008  
009  
010  
011  
012  
013  
014  
015  
020  
022  
023  
030  
031  
P-ROLL TIME  
LOCAL ENA  
PREROL  
L ENA  
132  
133  
134  
135  
140  
141  
142  
143  
144  
145  
ROTA MODE  
KEY BEEP  
ROTATE  
KEY BP  
AL BP  
TAPE TIMER  
REMAIN SEL  
SYNCHRONIZE  
SUPER  
TIMER  
ALARM BEEP  
DET BEEP  
REMAIN  
SYNCR  
SUPER  
DISPLY  
C HPOS  
C VPOS  
C TYPE  
MONI C  
CU-ROL  
REC AJ  
DET ST  
DET AJ  
STEP  
DET BP  
OUTPUT  
VOLUME  
A UNI  
OUTPUT  
VOLUME  
DISPLAY SEL  
CHARA H-POS  
CHARA V-POS  
CHARA TYPE  
MONI CONTROL  
CU-ROLL TIME  
REC ADJUST  
DET STOP  
AUDIO UNITY  
CASSTT LIGHT  
TC INPUT  
CAS LT  
TC IN  
FRONT LCD  
F LCD  
200  
202  
204  
205  
206  
207  
208  
209  
212  
PARA RUN  
ID SEL  
PR RUN  
ID SEL  
RS232C SEL  
BAUD RATE  
DATA LENGTH  
STOP BIT  
RS232C  
BAND R  
DATA L  
ST BIT  
DET ADJUST  
AUTO STOP  
SYS FORMAT  
PB FORMAT  
FORMAT SEL  
HD FREQUENCY  
OUT REF  
SYS FT  
PB FT  
PARITY  
PARITY  
RET AK  
MSTR P  
FMT SL  
HD FRQ  
OUTREF  
RETURN ACK  
MASTER PORT  
300  
301  
302  
303  
304  
305  
306  
307  
308  
309  
310  
311  
312  
320  
321  
322  
323  
324  
IN/OUT DEL  
HD FRQ  
OUTREF  
CONFI  
100  
101  
102  
104  
105  
106  
107  
108  
109  
110  
111  
112  
113  
114  
115  
116  
118  
131  
SEARCH ENA  
SHTL MAX  
SEARCH  
STL MX  
F/R MX  
REF AL  
AT EE  
NEGA FLASH  
CONFI EDIT  
FF.REW MAX  
REF ALARM  
AUTO EE SEL  
EJECT EE SEL  
EE MODE SEL  
PLAY DELAY  
CAP.LOCK  
AUD EDIT IN  
AUD EDIT OUT  
AUTO ENTRY  
CF ADJ SEL  
AUD I  
AUD O  
AT ENT  
CF ADJ  
AF CUP  
V F MX  
V R MX  
J F MX  
EJ EE  
EE MD  
PL DLY  
CAPSTN  
AT REW  
MEM ST  
FRZ MD  
R INH  
AFTER CUE-UP  
VAR FWD MAX  
VAR REV MAX  
JOG FWD MAX  
JOG REV MAX  
POSTROLL TM  
EDIT RPLCE1  
EDIT RPLCE2  
EDIT RPLCE3  
EDIT RPLCE4  
EDIT RPLCEC  
AUTO REW  
MEMORY STOP  
FRZ MODE SEL  
REC INH  
J R MX  
POSROL  
RPLCE1  
RPLCE2  
RPLCE3  
RPLCE4  
RPLCEC  
REC INH LAMP  
EJECT SW INH  
EJECT LAMP  
SP MODE INH  
PAGE MODE  
INH LP  
EJ SW  
INH LP  
SP MD  
PAGE  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PF1/PF2  
Function menus  
<PF1/PF2>  
Setup menu  
item No.  
Name of setup menu  
item  
Setup menu  
item No.  
Name of setup menu  
item  
Function button name  
Function button name  
400  
401  
402  
403  
STILL TIMER  
STILL  
634  
635  
636  
637  
638  
639  
640  
641  
642  
650  
651  
653  
654  
655  
656  
658  
659  
660  
661  
662  
663  
664  
665  
670  
671  
672  
673  
674  
675  
676  
680  
681  
684  
685  
686  
687  
688  
695  
480pHO  
480pSO  
480iHD  
480iSD  
IUC MD  
IUC RH  
IUC RV  
IUC EH  
IUC EV  
STYLE  
HUE S  
Y HD  
480p#HD_OUT  
480p#SD_OUT  
480i#HD_OUT  
480i#SD_OUT  
IN U/C MODE  
I U/C RESP H  
I U/C RESP V  
I U/C ENH H  
I U/C ENH V  
STYLE  
SRC PROTECT  
DRUM STDBY  
STOP PROTECT  
SRC PT  
DRUM  
STP PT  
500  
501  
502  
503  
504  
505  
506  
507  
508  
509  
510  
511  
512  
513  
514  
515  
516  
517  
VITC BLANK  
VITC POS-1  
VITC POS-2  
TCG MODE  
RUN MODE  
TCG REGEN  
REGEN MODE  
TC SOURCE  
BINARY GP  
PHASE CORR  
TCG CF FLAG  
DF MODE  
VI BLK  
VI PS1  
VI PS2  
TCG MD  
RUN MD  
TCG RG  
REG MD  
TC SRC  
BINARY  
P CORR  
TG CFF  
DF MOD  
TC REF  
VITC O  
ENBD V  
ENBD L  
TC ADV  
TCG O  
HUE STYLE (SD)  
Y LVL (HD)  
Pb LVL (HD)  
Pr LVL (HD)  
BK LVL (HD)  
Y LVL (SD)  
Pb HD  
Pr HD  
BK HD  
Y SD  
Pb LVL (SD)  
Pr LVL (SD)  
BK LVL (SD)  
V LEVEL  
Pb SD  
Pr SD  
TC OUT REF  
VITC OUT  
BK SD  
V LV  
HD EMBD VITC  
HD EMBD LTC  
TC OUT ADV  
TCG OUT  
C LEVEL  
C LV  
HUE (C PHASE)  
SETUP (BK) LVL  
BRIGHT  
HUE  
SUP LV  
BR  
600  
601  
602  
603  
604  
605  
606  
620  
621  
622  
623  
624  
625  
626  
627  
628  
629  
630  
631  
632  
633  
VIDEO IN SEL  
VIDEO INT SG  
SDI IN MODE  
V-MUTE SEL  
FREEZE SEL  
INTERPOLATE  
SD MON O SEL  
DOWNCON MODE  
UPCONV MODE  
D/C RESP H  
VID IN  
R-BRIGHT  
R-BR  
INT SG  
SDI IN  
B-BRIGHT  
B-BR  
CONTRAST  
R-CONTRAST  
B-CONTRAST  
BLK CLIP  
CT  
V-MUTE  
FRZ SL  
INTPLT  
SD MOS  
DW CON  
UP CON  
D/C RH  
D/C RV  
U/C RH  
U/C RV  
D/C EH  
D/C EV  
U/C EH  
U/C EV  
1080HO  
1080SO  
720pHO  
720pSO  
R-CT  
B-CT  
B LIP  
CC (F1) BLANK  
CC (F2) BLANK  
EDH (SD)  
CC1 BK  
CC2 BK  
EDH SD  
ESR SD  
CCR SD  
SDI IX  
CC REC  
BK L  
ESR MODE (SD)  
CCR MODE (SD)  
SDI INDEX O  
CC REC  
D/C RESP V  
U/C RESP H  
U/C RESP V  
D/C ENH H  
BLANK LINE  
D/C ENH V  
U/C ENH H  
U/C ENH V  
1080i#HD_OUT  
1080i#SD_OUT  
720p#HD_OUT  
720p#SD_OUT  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function menus  
<PF1/PF2>  
Setup menu  
item No.  
Name of setup menu  
item  
Setup menu  
item No.  
Name of setup menu  
item  
Function button name  
Function button name  
700  
701  
702  
703  
704  
705  
706  
707  
708  
709  
710  
711  
712  
713  
714  
715  
716  
717  
718  
719  
720  
721  
722  
723  
724  
725  
726  
727  
728  
729  
730  
731  
732  
733  
734  
735  
736  
737  
738  
739  
740  
741  
CH1 IN LV  
A1 ILV  
A2 ILV  
A3 ILV  
A4 ILV  
AC ILV  
A1 OLV  
A2 OLV  
A3 OLV  
A4 OLV  
AC OLV  
ML OLV  
MR OLV  
MONI O  
A1 IN  
742  
743  
744  
745  
746  
747  
748  
749  
750  
751  
752  
753  
754  
755  
756  
757  
758  
759  
760  
761  
762  
763  
790  
791  
CH5 CUE SEL  
CH6 CUE SEL  
CH7 CUE SEL  
CH8 CUE SEL  
MONI CH SEL  
MON AUTO SEL  
MONI SEL INH  
AUDIO PB VR  
ANA CH1 SEL  
ANA CH2 SEL  
ANA CH3 SEL  
ANA CH4 SEL  
SD SDI CH1 SL  
SD SDI CH2 SL  
SD SDI CH3 SL  
SD SDI CH4 SL  
JOG PROC  
A5 CSL  
A6 CSL  
A7 CSL  
A8 CSL  
MON CH  
MON AT  
MS INH  
APB VR  
AA1 SL  
AA2 SL  
AA3 SL  
AA4 SL  
SSA1SL  
SSA2SL  
SSA3SL  
SSA4SL  
JOG P  
CH2 IN LV  
CH3 IN LV  
CH4 IN LV  
CUE IN LV  
CH1 OUT LV  
CH2 OUT LV  
CH3 OUT LV  
CH4 OUT LV  
CUE OUT LV  
MONIL OUT LV  
MONIR OUT LV  
MONI OUT  
CH1 IN SEL  
CH2 IN SEL  
CH3 IN SEL  
CH4 IN SEL  
CH5 IN SEL  
CH6 IN SEL  
CH7 IN SEL  
CH8 IN SEL  
D IN SEL12  
D IN SEL34  
D IN SEL56  
D IN SEL78  
REC CH1  
A2 IN  
A3 IN  
A4 IN  
A5 IN  
DV PB ATT  
DV ATT  
R PTMT  
A INSG  
A RC  
A6 IN  
REC PT MUTE  
AUDIO INT SG  
AUD RATE CON  
METER SCALE  
CUE REC VOL  
CUE PB VOL  
A7 IN  
A8 IN  
DIN 12  
DIN 34  
DIN 56  
DIN 78  
REC A1  
REC A2  
REC A3  
REC A4  
REC A5  
REC A6  
REC A7  
REC A8  
RECCUE  
PB FD  
M SCL  
CR VOL  
CP VOL  
A02  
P.ON LOAD  
P.LOAD  
REC CH2  
REC CH3  
REC CH4  
REC CH5  
REC CH6  
REC CH7  
REC CH8  
REC CUE  
PB FADE  
HD EMBD AUD  
SD EMBD AUD  
MONI MIX  
HDEM A  
SDEM A  
M MIX  
CH1 CUE SEL  
CH2 CUE SEL  
CH3 CUE SEL  
CH4 CUE SEL  
A1 CSL  
A2 CSL  
A3 CSL  
A4 CSL  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CARD  
Function menus  
<CARD>  
The settings and information can be saved onto or  
Warning message 1  
loaded from the IC card memory. When  
(CARD)  
F2  
Warnings concerning the IC card are displayed here.  
NO CARD  
is pressed on the <MENU> screen while the  
button  
F
is held down, the function menu shown below is  
displayed.  
The IC card has not been inserted.  
UNFORMATTED CARD  
The IC card is not formatted.  
HD150 FORMAT!  
This card was formatted by the AJ-HD150.  
[MENU/ERROR LOG/MULTI CUE]  
Memory name  
Memory selection  
cursor  
HD1500 FORMAT!  
This card was formatted by the AJ-HD1500.  
Warning message 2  
BATTERY!  
This appears when the battery inside the IC card has  
no charge left. It signifies that it is time to replace the  
battery.  
SHIFT  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
Warning message 1  
PROTECT!  
The IC card protection is set to ON.  
SYSTEM MENU/SETUP MENU/50PIN ASSIGN  
File title (CARD)  
File number  
File title (VTR)  
File status  
File number  
(VTR)  
(CARD)  
File status (CARD)  
File status (VTR)  
Blank  
No storage files are present.  
- - - - -  
Storage files are present. The target file is in the  
(Unlocked status) unlocked status.  
≤
Storage files are present. The target file is in the  
(Locked status) locked status.  
µ
SHIFT  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
File status (CARD)  
File status (VTR)  
Warning message 2  
MULTI CUE  
SHIFT  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
ERROR LOG  
SHIFT  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
<Notes>  
• IC cards are not compatible with other VTR models.  
• The IC cards which can be used are the 68-pin two-  
piece type of SRAM cards (64KB or more) with  
replaceable battery. Model number BN-064HSR is  
recommended.  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function menus  
<CARD>  
[MENU/ERROR LOG/MULTI CUE]  
• The SETUP MENU (current, USER1 to USER4)  
and SYSTEM MENU settings, 50PIN ASSIGN  
registration data, MULTI CUE registered points and  
ERROR LOG data in the VTR MEMORY in this  
VTR can be saved in and loaded from the IC cards.  
• Titles can be provided for all the data files, and  
when the files are saved or loaded, the titles are  
also copied at the same time.  
• For those data files which have been saved in the  
IC card, a file lock facility can be engaged to  
prevent the data in those files from being  
overwritten.  
IC card data layout Lock  
VTR memory data layout Lock  
SETUP MENU  
50 PIN ASSIGN  
SYSTEM MENU  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
SETUP MENU Current  
(what has been  
registered for  
the PF1, PF2  
k
≤
≤
≤
≤
USER1  
USER2  
menu items,  
USER3  
≤
≤
≤
<> contents of  
USER4  
some function  
buttons)  
50 PIN ASSIGN Current  
≤
Settings  
<>  
1. Selecting the targeted memory  
Press the  
button.  
SHIFT  
The operation target is switched alternately  
between the IC CARD MEMORY and VTR  
MEMORY.  
SYSTEM MENU Current  
≤
2. Selecting the operation files inside the  
selected memory  
The number of the currently selected file is  
highlighted.  
Turn the ADJ dial to select the file to be operated.  
• For SYSTEM MENU, SETUP MENU and 50PIN  
ASSIGN  
<>  
The details of the registration status display for  
the IC CARD MEMORY are automatically  
switched depending on whether S (SYSTEM  
MENU), C1234 (SETUP MENU) or P (50PIN  
ASSIGN) is selected at the VTR MEMORY  
side.  
IC card data layout Lock  
VTR memory data layout Lock  
MULTI CUE  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
MULTI CUE  
Current  
k
≤
<>  
3. Transferring files between memories  
>
• VTR MEMORY IC CARD MEMORY  
First select the operation file, and then press  
(SAVE).  
F2  
>
• IC CARD MEMORY VTR MEMORY  
ERROR LOG  
ERROR LOG  
Current  
k
First select the operation file, and then press  
(LOAD).  
F3  
<Note>  
The title is also transferred at the same time.  
≤
<>  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CARD  
Function menus  
<CARD>  
4. Editing the title of a selected file  
5. File overwrite inhibit facility  
First select the operation file, and then press the  
ADJ dial.  
It is possible to lock the overwrite inhibit facility for  
individual files in the IC CARD MEMORY.  
• Locking a file  
The first digit of the title display area is highlighted,  
indicating that the file title can now be edited.  
• To input a number, press the number keys.  
• To input letters, tap the numbers keys until the  
letter to be input appears while holding down  
Select the file to be locked, and press  
(LOCK).  
F5  
• Unlocking a file  
Press  
(LOCK) again.  
F5  
F
the  
button.  
<Note>  
More than one letter is allocated to each  
number key.  
• Press the ADJ dial to move from one digit to the  
next on the title display area.  
The locked or unlocked status is displayed in the  
file status.  
≤
µ
[ : Unlocked status, : locked status]  
• To enter the title, press the ADJ dial again.  
<Notes>  
• When the display screen has been switched or  
C
the  
button has been pressed during title  
editing, the editing enable status is canceled,  
and the setting becomes invalid.  
F
• A space can be input by pressing the  
button  
3
and  
button.  
Function  
button/item  
Switching  
method  
Corresponding setup  
menu item  
Setting  
Description of setting  
F1  
FORMAT  
For formatting the IC card.  
FiPress  
___  
___  
___  
___  
___  
F2  
SAVE<  
Press  
Press  
For transferring data to the IC card files.  
For transferring data from the IC card files.  
For deleting IC card files.  
___  
___  
___  
F3  
LOAD>  
F4  
DELETE  
FiPress  
F5  
LOCK  
Press  
For locking IC card files or VTR MEMORY files.a  
___  
___  
___  
___  
F6  
EXIT  
___  
___  
F1 (SHIFT)  
F2 (SHIFT)  
F3 (SHIFT)  
F4 (SHIFT)  
F5 (SHIFT)  
F6 (SHIFT)  
___  
___  
___  
___  
___  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function menus  
<50P IN/OUT ASSIGN>  
Using the front panel controls and on-screen menus,  
functions are registered into the input pins of the  
parallel remote (50PIN) connector and the statuses  
are registered into its output pins.  
Pins in which functions can be registered  
IN pins: Pins 6 to 20, 22, 23, 25  
OUT pins: Pin 21, 24, pins 32 to 46, 48  
All other pins are reserved and cannot be changed.  
When  
(50P IN) or  
(50P OT) is pressed while  
F6  
F5  
the  
button is held down on the <MENU SHIFT>  
F
IN pins  
OUT pins  
menu, the function menu shown below appears, and  
functions can be registered or deleted.  
Selection marker  
21  
24  
26  
Range of pins to which any  
items can be assigned  
<Power>  
1
2
REC  
27 REC  
28 PLAY  
29 FF  
30 REW  
31 STOP  
32  
Registered item name  
Registered value  
PLAY  
FF  
3
4
REW  
STOP  
5
6
:
l
:
Range of pins to which  
SHIFT  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
l
any items can be  
assigned  
Range of pins to which  
any items can be  
assigned  
;
20  
22  
23  
25  
;
46  
48  
Item selection cursor  
Item number  
Category  
Setting number  
47 <GND>  
49 <GND>  
50 <GND>  
Items which can be registered in the input and  
output pins  
Items identical to the setup menu items can be  
registered in both the input and output pins. In  
addition, there are a set of special items can be also  
registered in the input pins and another set for the  
output pins.  
Setting  
Item name  
Item number  
<Note>  
Registered item names  
Setup menu items and 50PIN special menu items can  
be registered in the parallel remote connector pins,  
and the names of these menu items are displayed.  
System menu and submenu items cannot be  
registered.  
Item no.  
Registration in input pins  
Registration in output pins  
000  
100  
200  
300  
400  
500  
600  
700  
Registered values  
One setting for the registered menu item is displayed  
in each of the pins.  
Setup menu list  
When active signals are input to the IN pins in which  
the setup menu items mentioned above have been  
registered, the settings for the registered menu items  
take effect inside the VTR.  
When the settings for the registered menu items tally  
with the registered values, active signals are output  
from the registered OUT pins.  
B00  
C00  
Special IN menu list  
<No display>  
<No display>  
Special OUT menu list  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
50P IN/OUT  
ASSIGN  
Function menus  
<50P IN/OUT ASSIGN>  
Registering functions in the input pins/Active inputs  
Registering functions in the output pins/Active outputs  
Resetting all the items and values  
Press  
(RESET) while holding down the  
button.  
F4  
F
All the registered item names and registered values  
are now set to the factory settings. (These settings  
cannot be restored.)  
1. Selecting the 50-pin connector pins  
Turn the ADJ dial to move the selection marker and  
select the pin of the 50-pin connector into which the  
menu item is to be registered.  
Special IN menu list  
No.  
SUPER  
DISPLAY  
2. Entering the 50-pin connector pins  
Description of setting  
Press the ADJ dial.  
The entered 50-pin connector pin display is highlighted.  
Functions not featured on the setup menua  
B00  
STBY ON  
For transferring to the STANDBY ON mode.  
3. Selecting the menu item  
Turn the ADJ dial and select the menu item for the pin  
of the 50-pin connector which was selected in step 1  
above.  
B01  
STBY OFF  
For transferring to the STANDBY OFF mode.  
For alternately transferring to the STANDBY ON  
B02  
4. Entering the menu item  
Press the ADJ dial.  
STBY ONOFF and OFF mode.  
B03  
EJECT  
For transferring to the EJECT mode.  
The on-screen setting display now blinks.  
B04  
CUE  
For prerolling the tape to the IN point when the  
IN point has been registered; for prerolling the  
tape to the current point when the IN point has  
not been registered.  
5. Selecting the setting  
Turn the ADJ dial and select the setting for the  
menu item which was selected in step 3 above.  
B05  
IN SET  
For registering the edit IN point.  
6. Entering the setting  
Press the ADJ dial  
.
What is to be operated by the ADJ dial returns to the  
front panel. Whatever was selected in step 3 is  
displayed as the registered item name and whatever was  
selected in step 5 is displayed as the registered value.  
B06  
STILL  
For transferring to the still picture (STILL) mode.  
The 9-pin connector functions.  
B07  
422 REM ON  
B08  
422 REM OFF  
The 9-pin connector does not function.  
7. To select menu items and settings for other 50-pin  
connector pins, repeat steps 1 to 6.  
B09  
TC EXT  
For returning TC SOURCE to the previous EXT  
mode.  
(No switching occurs if the EXT mode is  
currently established.)  
8. Saving the data in the 50-pin registration file  
To save what has been set in the 50-pin connector in  
F5  
the 50-pin registration file, press  
(SET).  
(EXIT) is pressed without the above settings  
have been saved, those settings will be canceled.  
B10  
For switching TC SOURCE to INT and TCG  
F6  
If  
TC INT AUTO MODE to AUTO.  
B11  
TC EXT_L  
REG  
For switching TC SOURCE to EXT_L and TCG  
MODE to REGEN.  
Clearing  
SRC PROTECT and STOP PROTECT settings switched simultaneously  
1. Turn the ADJ dial to move the selection marker and select the  
pin of the 50-pin connector whose menu item is to be cleared.  
B20  
For switching the tape protection mode operation to  
half-loading in the event that the VTR has been left  
standing in the STOP mode or the STILL mode while  
any of the search modes (JOG, VAR or SHTL) was  
established.  
PROTECT  
HALF  
2.  
F4  
Press  
(RESET). The registered item name  
and registered value displays now go blank.  
B21  
PROTECT  
T-REL  
For switching the tape protection mode operation to  
tension release when the VTR has been left standing  
in the STOP mode or the STILL mode while any of the  
search modes (JOG, VAR or SHTL) was established.  
3. To clear the menu items in other 50-pin connector  
pins, repeat steps 1 and 2.  
4.  
To save what has been set in the 50-pin connector in  
F5  
the 50-pin registration file, press  
(SET).  
(EXIT) is pressed without the above settings  
have been saved, those settings will be canceled.  
F6  
If  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function menus  
<50P IN/OUT ASSIGN>  
Special IN menu list (continued)  
No.  
SUPER  
DISPLAY  
No.  
Description of setting  
Down-conversion status 3  
SUPER  
Description of setting  
DISPLAY  
C16  
DC3  
UPCON MODE and DOWNCON MODE settings switched simultaneously  
B22  
UD FIT_V  
For switching the picture angle during down-conversion to  
letter box and the picture angle during up-conversion to the  
top/bottom cut status in the vertical direction.  
C17  
UC1  
Up-conversion status 1  
Up-conversion status 2  
Up-conversion/down-conversion status 1  
Up-conversion/down-conversion status 2  
Up-conversion/down-conversion status 3  
Error status 0  
C18  
UC2  
B23  
UD FIT_H  
For switching the picture angle during down-  
conversion to the side cut mode and the picture angle  
during up-conversion to the side panel mode.  
C19  
UD1  
B24  
UD FIT_HV  
For switching the picture angle during down-  
conversion to the squeeze mode and the picture  
angle during up-conversion to the stretch mode.  
C20  
UD2  
C21  
UD3  
Special OUT menu list  
C22  
ERR0  
No.  
SUPER  
DISPLAY  
Description of setting  
EJECT status  
C23  
ERR1  
Error status 1  
C00  
EJECT  
C24  
Error status 2  
ERR2  
C01  
STANDBY ON status  
STBY ON  
C26  
CH GREEN  
Channel condition green LED  
Channel condition amber LED  
Channel condition red LED  
Servo lock LED  
C02  
CUE  
CUE-UP completed status  
STILL status  
C27  
CH AMBER  
C03  
STILL  
C28  
CH RED  
C04  
Status in which the front panel STOP button is  
PANEL STOP pressed down  
C29  
SERVO LOCK  
C05  
Status of whether to inhibit overwrite during  
PRE CTL  
normal recording  
C30  
Video UNITY LED  
V UNITY  
C06  
9-pin connector function status  
422 REM ON  
C31  
Audio UNITY LED  
A UNITY  
C07  
REMOTE  
50-pin connector function status  
Recording inhibit status 1  
Recording inhibit status 2  
Tape recording inhibit status 1  
Tape recording inhibit status 2  
TC input status 1  
C08  
REC INH1  
C09  
REC INH2  
C10  
CAS INH1  
C11  
CAS INH2  
C12  
TC SRC1  
C13  
TC input status 2  
TC SRC2  
C14  
DC1  
Down-conversion status 1  
Down-conversion status 2  
C15  
DC2  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
50P IN/OUT  
ASSIGN  
Function menus  
<50P IN/OUT ASSIGN>  
The statuses established by a multiple number of pins  
in the special OUT menu list are displayed. Pin status  
“1” signifies “active low” and “0” signifies “open.”  
Up-conversion statuses  
C17  
UC1  
C18  
UC2  
Up-conversion status  
0
0
1
0
1
0
Stretch mode  
Side panel mode  
Top and bottom cut in vertical direction  
Error statuses  
C22  
C23  
C24  
Error status  
ERR0 ERR1 ERR2  
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
SERVO NOT LOCKED (priority level 1)  
SERVO LOCKED (priority level 4)  
HIGH ERROR (amber) (priority level 3)  
HIGH ERROR (red) (priority level 2)  
Up-conversion down-conversion statuses  
C19 C20 C21  
UD1 UD2 UD3  
Down-conversion  
status  
Up-conversion  
status  
0
0
0
1
0
0
Squeeze mode  
Side cut mode  
Stretch mode  
Side panel mode  
TC input statuses  
Top and bottom cut  
in vertical direction  
1
1
0
1
0
1
Letter box mode  
C12  
TC SRC1  
C13  
TC SRC2  
TC input status  
Any other combination  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
External SLTC  
External LTC  
External SVITC (or external VITC with SD input)  
INT  
Tape recording inhibit statuses  
C10  
CAS INH1  
C11  
CAS INH2  
Tape recording inhibit status  
0
0
0
1
Cassette recording enabled  
Cassette accidental erasure prevented  
Recording inhibit statuses  
C08  
C09  
Recording inhibit statuses  
REC INH1 REC INH2  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Overwriting prohibited during normal recording  
All recording onto cassette prohibited  
Recording inhibit mode other than the 2 above modes  
Recording onto cassette enabled  
Down-conversion statuses  
C14  
DC1  
C15  
DC2  
C16  
DC3  
Down-conversion status  
Squeeze mode  
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
Side cut modea  
Letter box mode  
14:9  
13:9  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Function menus  
<50P IN/OUT ASSIGN>  
Flow of registration  
Turn the ADJ dial.  
F1 (forward page scroll)  
F2 (reverse page scroll)  
Status in which selected 50-  
pin connector pin menu item  
selection is enabled  
Press the ADJ dial.  
Open the  
screen.  
Press the ADJ dial.  
Status in which regis-  
tered 50-pin connector  
pin selection is enabled  
F3 (cancel)  
Close the  
screen.  
F6 (EXIT)  
Status in which selected  
menu item setting  
selection is enabled  
Turn the ADJ dial.  
F4 (one pin reset)  
F i F4 (all pins reset)  
Turn the ADJ dial.  
F5 (settings entered)  
Press the ADJ dial.  
F3 (cancel)  
50P IN/OUT ASSIGN function buttons  
Function  
button/item  
Switching  
method  
Corresponding setup  
menu item  
Setting  
Description of setting  
F1  
: PREV  
Press  
Press  
Press  
For scrolling the on-screen menu pages in the forward  
direction.  
___  
___  
___  
___  
F2  
; NEXT  
For scrolling the on-screen menu pages in the reverse  
direction.  
___  
___  
F3  
CANCEL  
For releasing the menu item selection status.  
F4  
RESET  
For resetting one pin: what has been selected for the pin  
selected by the individual reset selection marker is cleared.  
Press  
___  
___  
For resetting all the pins: what has been registered in all the pins is  
set to the factory settings and set in the 50-pin registration file.  
FiPress  
F5  
SET  
Press  
For registering the file; all the function button settings are  
saved in the 50-pin registration file.  
___  
___  
___  
___  
F6  
EXIT  
Press  
For exiting the special menu (and transferring to the original  
menu).  
F1 (SHIFT)  
F2 (SHIFT)  
F3 (SHIFT)  
F4 (SHIFT)  
F5 (SHIFT)  
F6 (SHIFT)  
___  
___  
___  
___  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
50P IN/OUT  
ASSIGN  
Function menus  
<50P IN/OUT ASSIGN>  
50-pin assignment factory settings  
Pin  
no.  
I/O  
Pin  
no.  
I/O  
Setting item  
Setting item  
1
I
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
O
O
REC  
CUE STATUS  
2
I
PLAY  
REMOTE STATUS  
3
I
O
FF  
DET STOP STATUS  
4
I
O
REW  
PRE CTL DETECTED STATUS  
LOCAL ENABLE STATUS  
STANDBY ON STATUS  
5
I
O
STOP  
6
I
O
___  
___  
422 REMOTE ON  
7
I
GND  
O
8
I
___  
9
I
GND  
GND  
422 REMOTE OFF  
LOCAL ENABLE  
EJECT  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
I
I
__  
“
” denotes that nothing is subject to control or to a status.  
I
IN SET  
I
REC INH ALL  
REC INH PRE  
LOCAL DISABLE  
TC EXT  
<Notes>  
I
• For a command, input TTL level signals; for an  
active low edge, input an electrical signal of 100 ms  
or more.  
• For a status, a maximum open collector and sink  
current of 6 mA is output.  
I
I
I
TC INT&TCG MODE AUTO  
___  
I
I
___  
I
O
I
STNDBY ON/OFF  
ERR0 STATUS  
DET STOP ON  
CUE  
I
O
I
ERR1 STATUS  
DET STOP OFF  
Power  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
REC STATUS  
PLAY STATUS  
FF STATUS  
REW STATUS  
STOP STATUS  
422 REMOTE STATUS  
EJECT STATUS  
ERR2 STATUS  
TC SRC1 STATUS  
TC SRC2 STATUS  
___  
___  
REC INH1 STATUS  
REC INH2 STATUS  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System menus  
Video output signal adjustments  
No./Item  
Description of setting  
This enables one of a number of different signals  
The control matrix for the adjustments is shown in the table below.  
When “CMPNT” has been selected as the setup menu item  
No.650 (STYLE) setting  
00  
WFM SEL  
to be output from the VIDEO OUT  
connector.  
2
output  
Setting  
06:  
ENCODER V LEVEL 654: Pb LVL (HD) 659: Pb LVL (SD)  
Adjustment item  
05:  
653: Y LVL (HD) 658: Y LVL (SD)  
0000  
0001  
0002  
0003  
0004  
0005 ENV_L  
0006 ENV_R  
<Notes>  
CTL  
TC  
VIDEO  
RF_L  
RF_R  
:
:
:
:
:
:
The CTL signal is output.  
The time code signal is output.  
The video output signal is output.  
The PB L RF signal is output.  
The PB R RF signal is output.  
The PB L ENV signal is output.  
SEL  
CTRL  
655: Pr LVL (HD)  
660: Pr LVL (SD)  
656: BK LVL (HD) 661: BK LVL (SD)  
REMOTE  
HD  
External encoder  
remote controller  
No adjustments  
possible  
:
The PB L ENV signal is output.  
SD  
No adjustments  
possible  
External encoder  
remote controller  
• The setting can be changed at any time without  
being affected by the system menu item No.30  
(MENU LOCK) setting.  
• The output signals during normal playback  
virtually maintain the levels given below.  
BOTH  
External encoder  
remote controller  
External encoder  
remote controller  
LOCAL  
BOTH  
HD  
SD  
AJ-HD1700  
AJ-HD1700  
CTL:  
0.1 to.3Vp-p  
TC: 0.6Vp-p  
BOTH  
HD  
VIDEO: 1.0Vp-p  
External encoder remote  
controller/AJ-HD1700  
AJ-HD1700  
05  
For setting whether to perform the various  
adjustments for the video output signals using this  
VTR or using an external encoder remote  
controller.  
SD  
External encoder remote  
controller/AJ-HD1700  
AJ-HD1700  
ENCODER  
SEL  
BOTH  
External encoder remote  
controller/AJ-HD1700  
External encoder remote  
controller/AJ-HD1700  
0000 REMOTE:  
The various adjustments for the video output  
signals are performed by an external encoder  
remote controller.  
External encoder remote controller: Only adjustments of the  
external encoder remote controller are performed.  
AJ-HD1700: Only adjustments of the setup menu items are  
performed.  
External encoder remote controller/AJ-HD1700: Adjustments can  
be performed from both the external encoder remote controller and  
setup menus.  
0001 LOCAL:  
The various adjustments for the video output  
signals are performed using this VTR.  
0002 BOTH:  
The various adjustments for the video output  
signals are performed using both this VTR and  
an external encoder remote controller.  
<Note>  
Use the AJ-ER50, an optional accessory, as the external encoder  
remote controller. However, its VIDEO PHASE and SYNC PHASE  
controls will not work.  
06  
For selecting what is to be controlled when  
the video output level is to be adjusted by an  
external encoder remote controller.  
When “CMPST” has been selected as the setup menu item  
No.650 (STYLE) setting  
V LEVEL  
CTRL  
0000  
HD:  
Setting  
06:  
ENCODER V LEVEL 663: C LEVEL  
Adjustment item  
The HD video output level can be adjusted.  
0001  
The SD video output level can be adjusted.  
0002 BOTH:  
Both the HD and SD video output levels can be  
adjusted.  
05:  
662: V LEVEL  
SD:  
SEL  
CTRL  
664: HUE ( or C PHASE)  
665: SETUP LVL (or BK LVL)  
REMOTE  
HD  
External encoder remote  
controller  
SD  
BOTH  
HD  
LOCAL  
BOTH  
SD  
AJ-HD1700  
BOTH  
HD  
External encoder remote  
controller/AJ-HD1700  
SD  
BOTH  
External encoder remote controller: Only adjustments of the external  
encoder remote controller are performed.  
AJ-HD1700: Only adjustments of the setup menu items are performed.  
External encoder remote controller/AJ-HD1700: Adjustments can be  
performed from both the external encoder remote controller and setup  
menus.  
<Note>  
Use the MT-200 (manufactured by Musashi and recommended by  
Panasonic) as the external encoder remote controller. However, its  
VIDEO PHASE, SYNC PHASE and SC PHASE controls will not work.  
The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System menus  
No./Item  
Description of setting  
No./Item  
Description of setting  
12  
For adjusting the system phase of the HD SDI output.  
When the button is pressed, the display transfers to  
the submenu screen; press the button again to  
return the display from the submenu screen.  
15  
For adjusting the system phase of the VIDEO OUT.  
When the  
the submenu screen; press the  
return the display from the submenu screen.  
button is pressed, the display transfers to  
SHIFT  
SHIFT  
SYS H  
VO SYS  
button again to  
SHIFT  
SHIFT  
(HD)*UP  
H (SD)*DW  
Submenu screen  
Submenu screen  
00  
For adjusting the system phase of the HD SDI  
output in 1H steps.  
00  
For adjusting the VIDEO OUT system phase in 1H  
steps.  
j: To advance the phase. i: To delay the phase.  
j: To advance the phase. i: To delay the phase.  
COARSE  
COARSE  
0000  
:
0005  
:
j5H  
:
0H  
:
0000  
:
0005  
:
j5H  
:
0H  
:
<Note>  
<Note>  
This setting remains unchanged  
even when the factory setting  
operation is performed.  
This setting remains unchanged  
even when the factory setting  
operation is performed.  
0010  
5H  
0010  
5H  
01  
For adjusting the HD SDI output system  
phase in 13.5ns steps.  
01  
For adjusting the VIDEO OUT system phase in  
37ns steps.  
j: To advance the phase. i: To delay the phase.  
j: To advance the phase. i: To delay the phase.  
FINE  
FINE  
<59/60Hz>  
0000 j1100  
<23/24Hz>  
0000 j1375  
<50Hz, 25Hz (HD,SD)>  
<59/60Hz, 23/24Hz>  
<50Hz, 25Hz (HD, SD)>  
0000  
1320  
j
0000  
j858  
0000  
j864  
:
1100  
:
:
0
:
:
1375  
:
:
0
:
:
:
0
:
:
:
0
:
:
:
0
:
1320  
:
0858  
:
0864  
:
2200  
1100  
2700  
1375  
2640  
1320  
1716  
858  
1728  
864  
<Note>  
<Note>  
This setting remains unchanged even when the  
factory setting operation is performed.  
This setting remains unchanged even when the  
factory setting operation is performed.  
14  
For adjusting the system phase over a total  
16  
For adjusting the system phase of the SD SDI.  
d
o
variable range of more than 180 .  
When the  
the submenu screen; press the  
return the display from the submenu screen.  
button is pressed, the display transfers to  
SHIFT  
j: To advance the phase. i: To delay the phase.  
SYS SC  
(SD)*DW  
SD SYS  
button again to  
SHIFT  
H (SD)*DW  
<59/60Hz, 23/24Hz>  
<50Hz, 25Hz (HD, SD)  
Submenu screen  
0000  
j108  
0000  
j115  
00  
For adjusting the SD SDI system phase in 1H  
steps.  
j: To advance the phase. i: To delay the phase.  
:
:
0
:
:
:
0
:
0108  
:
0115  
COARSE  
:
0000  
:
0005  
:
j5H  
:
0H  
:
0216  
108  
0230  
115  
<Note>  
<Note>  
This setting remains unchanged  
even when the factory setting  
operation is performed.  
This setting remains unchanged even when the  
factory setting operation is performed.  
0010  
5H  
01  
For adjusting the SD SDI system phase in 37ns  
steps for 480i outputs and in 54ns steps for 480p  
outputs.  
FINE  
j: To advance the phase. i: To delay the phase.  
<59/60Hz, 23/24Hz>  
<50Hz, 25Hz (HD, SD)>  
0000  
j858  
0000  
j864  
:
:
0
:
:
:
0
:
0858  
:
0864  
:
1716  
858  
1728  
864  
<Note>  
This setting remains unchanged even when the  
factory setting operation is performed.  
The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.  
*UP: This is for HD outputs (during HD tape playback or up-  
conversion outputs).  
*DW:This is for SD outputs (during SD tape playback or down-  
conversion outputs).  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System menus  
No./Item  
Description of setting  
No./Item  
Description of setting  
18  
SCH (SD)*DW  
For adjusting the SCH phase.  
When the button is pressed, the display transfers to  
the submenu screen; press the button again to  
return the display from the submenu screen.  
30  
MENU LOCK  
For selecting whether to set or release the  
system file lock mode.  
SHIFT  
0000  
0001  
OFF  
ON  
:
:
Lock released (changes enabled)  
Lock set (changes prohibited)  
SHIFT  
<Note>  
Submenu screen  
Even when “ON” is selected, the data will be overwritten  
when the system file has been set to LOAD from the IC  
card.  
00  
o
For adjusting the SCH phase in 90 steps  
(The SC phase changes, and the H phase remains  
unchanged.)  
COARSE  
0000:  
0001:  
0002:  
0003:  
0
90  
180  
270  
01  
For adjusting the SCH phase over a total variable  
o
range of more than d45 .  
j: To advance the phase. i: To delay the phase.  
(The SC phase changes, and the H phase remains  
unchanged.)  
FINE  
0000  
:
0032  
:
j32  
:
0
:
0064  
32  
20  
AV PHASE  
For adjusting the audio output phase in relation to  
the video output phase in 20.8¨s steps.  
j
:
The audio output phase is advanced in relation to  
the video output phase.  
i
:
The audio output phase is delayed in relation to  
the video output phase.  
0000  
:
0100  
:
j100  
:
0
:
0200  
100  
25  
For selecting the system frequency.  
0: The 59.94 Hz or 60 Hz system frequency is selected.  
1: The 50 Hz system frequency is selected.  
2: The 23.98 Hz or 24 Hz system frequency is selected.  
3: The 25 Hz system frequency is selected.  
However, with SD SDI and video output signals, there  
is a delay of approximately one field compared with  
the HD SDI output.  
*System switching  
• Some of the system menu and setup menu items each have  
different settings for different operation modes (59/60 Hz, 50  
Hz, 23/24 Hz and 25 Hz (HD or SD)). These settings are  
saved separately.  
SYSTEM  
FREQ*  
(This concerns those items whose settings were described  
for each operation mode on the system menu and setup  
menu tables.)  
• For further details, refer to “How to switch the system  
frequency” on page 105.  
• Since this VTR becomes a playback-only unit when the  
23/24 Hz or 25 Hz (HD or SD) mode has been selected,  
the functions relating to EE, recording and editing are all  
set to the inhibited status. Neither is it possible to select  
CTL in such a case.  
4: The 25 Hz system frequency is selected.  
However, HD SDI output is muted.  
0003  
0001*  
0002  
0003  
0004  
59/60  
50*  
23/24  
25 (HD)  
25 (SD)  
* The asterisk denotes the  
factory  
setting  
for  
AJ-  
HD1700E  
59/60 Hz mode: Status in which “0” (59/60) has been  
selected  
(The related menus and function buttons are not  
displayed, and operation is prohibited.)  
50 Hz mode:  
Status in which “1” (50) has been  
selected  
23/24 Hz mode: Status in which “2” (23/24) has been  
k
For the instant when the tape begins to run at the 1  
selected  
speed such as when it starts playing from the STOP  
status, the image is disrupted and the sound is muted for  
several frames because the tape is being synchronized  
with the REF input.  
25 Hz (HD) mode: Status in which “3” (25 (HD)) has been  
selected  
25 Hz (SD) mode: Status in which “4” (25(SD)) has been  
selected  
<Notes>  
•
This setting remains unchanged even when the  
factory setting operation is performed.  
For the steps to take to switch the system  
frequency, refer to page 105.  
The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.  
*DW:This is for SD outputs (during SD tape playback or down-  
conversion outputs).  
•
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup menus  
<BASIC>  
No./Item  
Description of setting  
No./Item  
004*1  
Description of setting  
000  
For setting the preroll time.  
For setting whether or not to synchronize the  
phases between two decks.  
Any time from 0 to 30 seconds can be set in 1-  
P-ROLL TIME  
0000  
OFF:  
SYNCHRONIZE  
second increments.  
The phases are not synchronized. The edit  
points will be off by several frames but editing  
will be commenced more promptly.  
0000  
0s  
:
5s  
:
:
0005  
:
0030  
<Notes>  
0001  
ON:  
The phases are synchronized. Error-free  
editing can be performed.  
30s  
•
During automatic editing (PREVIEW or AUTO EDIT),  
no operations are performed if the preroll time is set  
to 0 seconds.  
If the phases are to be synchronized between two  
decks for editing as per the setup menu item No.004  
(SYNCHRONIZE) setting, set the preroll time to at  
least 2 seconds.  
005  
For selecting whether or not to superimpose  
the display of the time code or other data  
onto the HD SDI MONITOR, SD SDI MONITOR  
and VIDEO OUT3 connectors.  
SUPER  
•
0000  
OFF:  
The time code or other data is not displayed.  
0001  
ON:  
001  
For selecting the transport system buttons  
which can be operated on the front panel in  
the REMOTE mode.  
The time code or other data is displayed.  
006  
For selecting the time code and other  
displays to be superimposed onto the HD SDI  
DISPLAY SEL MONITOR, SD SDI MONITOR and VIDEO  
OUT3 connectors.  
LOCAL ENA  
0000  
0001 ST&EJ  
DIS  
:
:
No buttons can be operated.  
Only the STOP and EJECT buttons can be  
operated.  
0000  
TIME:  
Only the time is displayed.  
0002  
ENA:  
0001 T&STA  
:
All the buttons except for the RECORDER and  
The time and operation mode are displayed.  
PLAYER buttons can be operated.  
<Note>  
0002 T&S&M  
The time, operation mode and mode are  
displayed.  
:
The following buttons and dials function at all times  
regardless of this setting:  
Audio input/output level control dials, audio channel  
selector buttons, number keys, function buttons, direct  
menu button, ASSEM button, INSERT button, ADJ dial,  
headphone volume control dial, MONITOR SELECT  
button, METER (FULL/FINE) selector switch, REMOTE  
button.  
0003  
T&RT:  
The time and REC TIME are displayed.  
0004 T&YMD  
The time and REC DATE (year/month/day) are  
displayed.  
:
0005 T&MDY  
:
002*1  
The time and REC DATE (month/day/year) are  
displayed.  
For selecting the 12- or 24-hour system for  
the CTL counter display.  
0006 T&DMY  
:
d
12h  
0000  
:
12-hour system display  
TAPE TIMER  
The time and REC DATE (day/month/year) are  
displayed.  
0001  
24h  
:
24-hour system display  
003  
For selecting whether or not to display REMAIN  
(remaining tape time) on the superimposed  
display of the HD SDI MONITOR, SD SDI  
MONITOR and VIDEO OUT3 connectors.  
0007  
T&UB:  
Data and user’s bit are displayed.  
REMAIN SEL  
However, when UB has been selected with the  
F3  
(TC/CTL) on the HOME menu, the time  
0000  
OFF:  
code is displayed after the user’s bit.  
The remaining tape time is not displayed.  
0008 T&CTL  
:
0001  
2L:  
Data and CTL data are displayed.  
The remaining tape time is displayed on the  
second line.  
However, when CTL has been selected with  
F3  
the  
(TC/CTL) on the HOME menu, the time  
0002  
1L:  
code is displayed after the CTL data.  
The remaining tape time is displayed on the  
first line.  
0009  
T&T:  
Data and time code are displayed.  
0003  
R/TTL:  
The remaining tape time is displayed on the  
first line, and the total tape time is displayed on  
the second line.  
(See Notes on next page.)  
<Notes>  
•
When setting 1 (2L) has been selected, the remaining  
tape time is not displayed if 0 (TIME) is selected as  
the setup menu item No.006 (DISPLAY SEL) setting.  
When setting 3 (R/TTL) has been selected, the  
remaining tape time is not displayed if 0 (TIME) is  
selected as the setup menu item No.006 (DISPLAY  
SEL) setting.  
•
*1: This item is not displayed when the 23/24 Hz or 25 Hz (HD or  
SD) mode has been selected as the system menu item.  
The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup menus  
(continued)  
<BASIC>  
No./Item  
Description of setting  
No./Item  
009  
Description of setting  
<Notes>  
•
006  
For setting the display type for the  
superimposed displays and for the HD SDI  
The following mode displays appear depending on  
the format used.  
DISPLAY SEL  
CHARA TYPE MONITOR, SD SDI MONITOR and VIDEO  
OUT3 connectors as well as for the SETUP  
MENU, etc.  
<Format>  
DVCPRO HD-LP  
DVCPRO HD  
DVCPRO50  
DVCPRO  
DV  
<Display>  
DVCPRO_HD-LP  
DVCPRO_HD  
DVCPRO_50  
DVCPRO  
>
>
>
>
>
>
0000 WHITE  
:
White characters on a black  
background.  
0001 W/OUT  
:
White characters with black  
DV  
DVCAM  
borders  
.
DVCAM  
•
•
When setting  
2
(T&S&M) is selected, an error  
010*1  
For setting whether to forcibly set the recorder to  
the EE mode and output the player’s playback  
signals to the monitor if the PLAYER button on the  
recorder is pressed when the monitor is connected  
only to the recorder during deck-to-deck editing.  
message appears if a warning or error has occurred.  
REC TIME and REC DATE are displayed only during  
DV or DVCAM format playback. The operation mode  
is displayed when the DVCPRO HD-LP, DVCPRO  
HD, DVCPRO50 or DVCPRO format is used.  
MONI  
CONTROL  
0000  
MANU:  
007  
For setting the horizontal positions of the  
characters for the time code and other  
superimposed displays of the HD SDI  
MONITOR, SD SDI MONITOR and VIDEO  
OUT3 connectors.  
The recorder is not forcibly set to the EE mode.  
0001  
The recorder is forcibly set to the EE mode,  
and the player’s playback signals are output  
AUTO:  
CHARA  
H-POS  
.
011  
For setting the preroll time in the MULTI CUE  
mode.  
0000  
:
0
:
CU-ROLL  
TIME  
Any time from 0 to 15 seconds can be set in 1-  
second increments.  
0006  
:
6
:
0000  
:
0005  
:
0s  
:
:
0037  
<Note>  
37  
When this menu item has been set, the displays are  
output to the VIDEO OUT3 connector in the DISPLAY  
SEL status even when the SUPER OFF setting is  
established. However, if the menu has been exited, the  
SUPER OFF or ON setting is followed.  
5s  
:
:
0015  
15s  
:
015  
For selecting the save processing to be  
conducted when the memory capacity, which  
enables up to 99 warning messages to be  
saved, has been exceeded while the error log  
function is operating.  
Furthermore, CHARA TYPE is output to the VIDEO  
OUT3 connector as per the menu setting.  
AUTO  
STEP  
008  
For setting the vertical positions of the  
characters for the time code and other  
superimposed displays of the HD SDI  
MONITOR, SD SDI MONITOR and VIDEO  
OUT3 connectors.  
CHARA  
V-POS  
0000  
OFF:  
99 messages are set as the upper limit, and any  
more warning messages which subsequently  
occur are not saved in the memory.  
0000  
:
0
:
0001  
ON:  
0023  
:
0032  
<Note>  
23  
:
32  
99 messages are saved, and the next warning  
message that has subsequently occurred is  
saved as No.99. The warning messages already  
saved are each shifted down by one number in  
succession.  
When this menu item has been set, the displays are  
output to the VIDEO OUT3 connector in the DISPLAY  
SEL status even when the SUPER OFF setting is  
established. However, if the menu has been exited, the  
SUPER OFF or ON setting is followed.  
020*2  
For selecting the VTR’s recording format.  
0000  
1080i:  
The 1080i format is selected  
.
SYS  
FORMAT  
Furthermore, CHARA TYPE is output to the VIDEO  
OUT3 connector as per the menu setting.  
0001  
720p:  
The 720p format is selected.  
*1: This item is not displayed when the 23/24 Hz or 25 Hz (HD or  
SD) mode has been selected as the system menu item No.25  
(SYSTEM FREQ) setting.  
*2: This item is not displayed when the 23/24 Hz, 25 Hz (HD or SD)  
or 50 Hz mode has been selected as the system menu item  
No.25 (SYSTEM FREQ) setting.  
The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup menus  
(continued)  
<BASIC>  
Formats in which the tape is played back  
No./Item  
Description of setting  
022:  
PB  
020:  
SYS  
023:  
FORMAT Playback format  
022  
For selecting the format in which the tape is  
to be played back.  
FORMAT FORMAT SEL  
PB FORMAT  
0000  
MANU:  
HD_LP DVCPRO HD-LP(1080i)  
HD_SP DVCPRO HD(1080i)  
The format is determined by the setting selected for  
setup menu item No.023 (FORMAT SEL).  
0001  
AUTO:  
422  
411  
420p  
DV  
DVCPRO50(422)  
DVCPRO(411)  
DVCPROP(420p)  
DV  
The tape is played back in the format in which it was  
recorded.  
1080i  
023  
For selecting the format when “MANUAL” has  
been selected as the setup menu item No.022  
(PB FORMAT) setting.  
If “AUTO” is selected as the setting, the format when  
playback starts is selected, and when the tape is  
played back, the format is automatically detected and  
matched with the format of the playback tape.  
FORMAT  
SEL  
DVCAM DVCAM  
MANUAL  
HD_LP DVCPRO HD-LP(720p)  
HD_SP DVCPRO HD(720p)  
422  
411  
420p  
DV  
DVCPRO50(422)  
DVCPRO(411)  
DVCPROP(420p)  
DV  
0000  
HD-LP  
:
The DVCPRO HD-LP format is  
selected, and the setup menu  
item No.020 (SYS FORMAT)  
setting is followed.  
The DVCPRO HD format is  
selected, and the setup menu  
item No.020 (SYS FORMAT)  
setting is followed.  
720p  
0001  
HD-SP  
:
DVCAM DVCAM  
DVCPRO HD-LP(1080i)/  
DVCPRO HD(1080i)/  
DVCPRO HD-LP(720p)/  
DVCPRO HD(720p)/  
DVCPRO50(422)/  
DVCPRO(411)/  
DVCPROP(420p)/DV/  
DVCAM, automatic detection  
0002  
0003  
0004  
0005  
422  
411  
:
:
:
The DVCPRO50 (422) format is  
selected.  
The DVCPRO (411) format is  
selected.  
The DVCPROP (420p) format  
is selected.  
The DV format is selected.  
The DVCAM format is selected.  
AUTO  
--------  
--------  
420p  
DV  
:
:
0006 DVCAM  
<Notes>  
030*3  
0000  
0001  
59/23  
60/24  
:
:
The 59.94/23.98 Hz frequency is set.  
The 60/24 Hz frequency is set.  
• In the EJECT mode, the format selected by the setup menu  
item No.020 (SYS FORMAT) setting applies.  
However, the field frequency set here is used  
only when there is no input signal which  
corresponds to the OUT REF setting. If there is a  
corresponding input signal, the field frequency is  
matched with that of the input signal.  
HD  
• If “AUTO” has been selected as the setup menu item No.022  
FREQUENCY  
(PB FORMAT) setting, the setup menu item No.023 (FORMAT  
SEL) setting is used as the format when the format is not  
detected (when the tape has just been inserted).  
However, when “DV” or “DVCAM” has been selected, the VTR  
operation will be as if “HD-LP” has been selected.  
031*4  
Video output reference  
0000  
AUTO  
:
When the HD REF input signal is  
supplied, it is used as the reference. If  
it is not supplied but the SD REF input  
signal is supplied, the SD REF signal  
serves as the reference instead.  
OUT REF  
If neither the HD REF nor SD REF input  
signal is supplied, the HD serial signal  
serves as the reference.  
If none of the HD REF, SD REF and  
HD serial signals are supplied, the  
internal sync signal serves as the  
reference.  
0001  
INPUT  
:
:
:
When the serial input signal is supplied,  
it is used as the reference  
.
0002 HD_REF  
0003 SD_REF  
<Note>  
The signal which is input to the HD REF  
IN connector is used as the reference.  
The signal which is input to the SD REF  
IN connector is used as the reference.  
*3: This item is not displayed when the 50 Hz or 25 Hz (HD or SD)  
mode has been selected as the system menu item No.25  
(SYSTEM FREQ) setting.  
*4: This item is not displayed when the 23/24 Hz or 25 Hz (HD or  
SD) mode has been selected as the system menu item No.25  
(SYSTEM FREQ) setting.  
If the 1 (INPUT) setting is selected when the 25 Hz (HD)  
mode has been selected as the system menu item  
No.25 (SYSTEM FREQ) setting, the system will  
construe this to mean that the 0 (AUTO) setting has  
been selected.  
The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup menus  
<OPERATION>  
No./Item  
Description of setting  
No./Item  
106  
Description of setting  
100  
For selecting the direct search dial operation.  
For selecting the video and audio output  
statuses in the EJECT mode.  
0000  
DIAL:  
SEARCH ENA  
Direct search dial operations are performed.  
EJECT EE SEL  
0000  
EE:  
0001  
KEY  
:
The EE mode is always established regardless of  
the setup menu item No.140 (OUTPUT) setting.  
Operation does not transfer to the search  
mode unless the SHTL, JOG or VAR button is  
pressed.  
0001 BLACK  
When setup menu item No.140 (OUTPUT) is set to:  
“EE” The EE mode is established  
TAPE”  
:
:
.
101  
For selecting the maximum speed of shuttle  
operations.  
0000  
0001  
0002  
<Note>  
Depending on the tape format, the actual tape running  
speed differs slightly from what is indicated by the  
superimposed display  
:
The BLACK mode is established for  
the video signals, and the audio  
signals are muted.  
“
k9.8  
k16  
k32  
:
:
:
k9.8 times normal speed  
k16 times normal speed  
k32 times normal speed  
SHTL MAX  
0002  
When setup menu item No.140 (OUTPUT) is set to:  
“EE” The EE mode is established  
TAPE”  
GRAY:  
:
.
:
The GRAY mode is established for the  
video signals, and the audio signals  
are muted.  
“
.
102  
For setting the maximum speed of fast  
forward and rewind operations.  
0000  
0001  
0002  
0003  
<Note>  
If 0 (EE) is selected while the 23/24 Hz or 25 Hz (HD or  
SD) mode has been selected as the system menu item  
No.25 (SYSTEM FREQ) setting, the VTR construes that  
1 (BLACK) has been selected.  
k16  
k32  
k50  
k60  
:
:
:
:
:
k16 times normal speed  
k32 times normal speed  
k50 times normal speed  
k60 times normal speed  
k100 times normal speed  
FF. REW MAX  
107*1  
For selecting what signals are to be output  
when the EE mode is established.  
0004  
<Note>  
k100  
0000 NORMAL  
:
EE MODE SEL  
The maximum speed is automatically limited to 50x for  
the DVCPRO HD and DVCPRO50 format and to 32x for  
the DV and DVCAM formats.  
Signals delayed by an amount equivalent to the time taken  
for the signals to be processed internally are output.  
0001  
THRU:  
104  
For selecting whether a warning is to be  
displayed when the REF VIDEO signal has not  
been connected.  
The signals are not processed internally but output in their  
original form with no delay.  
<Note>  
The internal operation forcibly sets “NORMAL” when an  
editing mode is selected or when SDTI is selected  
during video input signal selection.  
REF ALARM  
0000  
0001  
OFF  
ON  
:
:
A warning is not displayed.  
A warning is displayed by the  
blinking STOP lamp.  
105*1  
108  
For setting the play startup time in 1-frame  
increments.  
For selecting the VTR mode which is to be set  
to the EE mode when “0 (EE)” is selected as  
the setup menu item No.140 (OUTPUT)  
setting.  
PLAY DELAY  
0000  
:
0
:
AUTO EE SEL  
0015  
15  
0000  
S/F/R:  
The EE mode is established when the VTR is  
in the STOP, FF or REW mode.  
109*1  
For selecting whether to engage playback framing  
lock in 4-field increments or in 2-field increments.  
0001  
STOP:  
<59/60Hz>  
0000  
<50Hz>  
0000  
CAP. LOCK  
The EE mode is established when the VTR is  
in the STOP mode only.  
2F  
4F  
2F  
4F  
8F  
0001  
0001  
0002  
110  
For selecting whether the tape is to be  
automatically wound back to its beginning  
when the tape-end has been detected.  
AUTO REW  
0000  
OFF  
:
The tape stops when it reaches the  
tape-end.  
0001  
ON  
:
The tape is rewound to its beginning.  
111*1  
For selecting whether to automatically stop the  
VTR when the counter value is at the “0” position  
during CTL mode FF and REW operations.  
MEMORY  
STOP  
0000  
0001  
OFF  
ON  
:
:
The VTR does not stop.  
The VTR is automatically stopped.  
<Notes>  
•
Either the stop or still picture (SHTL STILL or VAR  
STILL) mode, whichever has been set using setup  
menu item No.307 (AFTER CUE-UP), is  
established when the VTR is stopped.  
*1: This item is not displayed when the 23/24 Hz or 25 Hz (HD or  
SD) mode has been selected as the system menu item No.25  
(SYSTEM FREQ) setting.  
•
If both the AUTO REW function and MEMORY  
function have been selected at the same time, the  
AUTO REW operation takes priority.  
The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup menus  
(continued)  
<OPERATION>  
No./Item  
Description of setting  
No./Item  
113*1  
Description of setting  
112  
For selecting what playback images are to be  
output in the STANDBY OFF mode and EJECT  
mode.  
For selecting whether to allow or inhibit recording  
on the cassette tape.  
FRZ MODE  
SEL  
0000  
OFF:  
REC INH  
0000  
DIS  
:
Recording on the cassette tape is enabled when the  
cassette’s accidental erasure prevention mechanism  
has been set to the recording enable position.  
The video output is muted.  
0001 STB OFF  
:
Only when the STANDBY OFF mode is  
established is the image which was being  
played back at that moment frozen and output.  
0001  
All recording on the cassette tape is inhibited.  
0002 PRE  
ALL:  
:
0002 SOF&EJ  
:
Overwriting is inhibited during normal recording.  
This is the setting to activate the accidental erasure  
prevention function. While CTL is detected, the  
recording is inhibited, and when CTL cannot be  
detected, it is executed.  
When either the STANDBY OFF mode or the  
EJECT mode is established, the image which  
was being played back at that moment is  
frozen and output.  
<Notes>  
0003  
NORM:  
•
The status when the picture is frozen is determined  
by the setup menu item No.604 (FREEZE SEL)  
setting.  
Normal recording is inhibited.  
Use this setting when it is preferable to avoid  
using normal recording in all applications  
except for editing.  
•
In the EJECT mode, the frozen picture is output only  
when 1 (BLACK) or 2 (GRAY) has been selected as  
the setup menu item No.106 (EJECT EE SEL)  
setting.  
0004  
V/CTL:  
The recording of the video and CTL signals is  
inhibited.  
Use this setting when it is preferable to avoid editing  
in all applications except for audio editing  
<Note>  
•
The picture freeze is forcibly released if a change has  
occurred in the output format of the HD serial output  
signals when operation has transferred to the EJECT  
mode.  
.
When the PRE, NORM or V/CTL setting has been  
selected, the REC INHIBIT lamp blinks (on for approx.  
0.5 sec. and then off for approx. 0.5 sec.).  
Description of MEMORY STOP function  
114  
For selecting whether the REC INHIBIT lamp is to  
blink or light when the cassette tape has been set  
to the accidental erasure protection mode.  
The MEMORY STOP function does  
not work if this margin is less than  
REC INH  
LAMP  
0000  
LIGHT  
:
:
The lamp lights.  
The lamp blinks.  
d2 frames.  
0 point  
0001 FLASH  
<Note>  
REW  
button  
FF  
button  
3
1
If 1 (ALL) has been selected as the setup menu item  
No.113 (REC INH) setting, the REC INHIBIT lamp will  
be lighted at all times regardless of the REC INH LAMP  
setting.  
FF  
REW  
4
2
button  
button  
115*1  
For selecting whether to enable or disable the  
operation of the EJECT button on the VTR’s  
front panel.  
EJECT SW  
INH  
0000  
REC  
:
Operation is disabled while the  
VTR is in the recording mode.  
Operation is enabled in all  
modes.  
If the FF button is pressed, the normal FF operation is performed  
since there is no 0 point in the direction of this operation.  
!
@
0001  
OFF  
:
If the REW button is pressed, the PREROLL lamp lights (as does  
the SHTL lamp), the VTR prerolls the tape, and it automatically  
stops when the counter value is at the 0 position.  
Accidental erasure protection function  
This function is used to prevent parts already recorded on a tape from being  
recorded over. Accidental erasure of pre-recorded tapes is prevented by  
positioning the CTL signal rec/play heads as shown in the figure below so that  
whether a recording has been made can be determined by the presence or  
absence of the CTL signal. When the REC/PLAY button is pressed with a pre-  
recorded tape, the tape runs but the REC button lamp blinks, the beeping  
alarm is sounded, and no signals are recorded.  
If the REW button is pressed, the normal REW operation is  
performed since there is no 0 point in the direction of this  
operation.  
#
$
If the FF button is pressed, the PREROLL lamp lights (as does  
the SHTL lamp), the VTR prerolls the tape, and it automatically  
stops when the counter value is at the 0 position.  
A/C heads  
(rec/play heads)  
*1: This item is not displayed when the 23/24 Hz or 25 Hz (HD or  
SD) mode has been selected as the system menu item No.25  
(SYSTEM FREQ) setting.  
PRE CTL  
head  
The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.  
Rough sketch showing CTL head positions  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup menus  
(continued)  
<OPERATION>  
No./Item  
Description of setting  
No./Item  
140*1  
Description of setting  
116  
For selecting whether the EJECT lamp is to remain  
lighted or go off after the cassette tape has been  
ejected.  
For selecting the output signals.  
0000  
EE:  
EJECT LAMP  
<In the STOP mode>:  
OUTPUT  
0000 MODE1  
The EJECT lamp remains lighted.  
:
The input signals selected by setup menu items  
No.600 (VIDEO IN SEL) and No.713 (CH1 IN SEL)  
to No.724 (D IN SEL 78) are output.  
0001 MODE2  
:
The EJECT lamp goes off.  
<During recording or editing>:  
The input signals selected by setup menu items  
No.600 (VIDEO IN SEL) and No.713 (CH1 IN SEL)  
to No.724 (D IN SEL 78) are output:  
118*1  
For selecting whether to allow or inhibit  
recording on a tape which has been written  
by a format other than DVCPRO HD-LP.  
SP MODE  
INH  
0001  
TAPE:  
0000  
OFF:  
<In the STOP mode>  
The signals played back from the tape are output.  
<During recording or editing>:  
The simultaneous playback signals are output.  
<Note>  
In order to select the output signals during recording or  
editing, set setup menu item No.302 (CONFI EDIT).  
Recording on the cassette tape is allowed.  
0001  
ON:  
Recording on the cassette tape is inhibited.  
<Notes>  
•
When 0 (OFF) has been selected, whether recording  
on the cassette tape is allowed or inhibited is  
determined by the setup menu item No.113 (REC  
INH) setting.  
141*1  
For setting what is to be controlled by the  
audio volume controls on the front panel.  
•
The recording format is determined by the setup  
menu item No.020 (SYS FORMAT) setting.  
0000  
REC:  
VOLUME  
The controls function as REC volume controls.  
131  
For selecting what cue point operation is to  
be performed when the multi cue function has  
been set to ON.  
0001  
PB:  
The controls function as PB volume controls.  
PAGE MODE  
0002  
AUTO:  
0000  
MANU:  
Normally, the controls function as PB volume  
controls. However, during recording or in the  
EE/INPUT CHECK status, they automatically  
function as REC volume controls.  
Operation is confined within the selected page,  
and 6 cue points can be registered.  
0001  
AUTO:  
When the page whose cue points are being  
registered becomes full, operation is  
automatically transferred to the next page, and  
registration is continued. A total of 60 cue  
points on up to 10 pages can be registered.  
142*1  
For selecting the conditions under which the  
AUDIO UNITY lamp on the front panel is to light.  
0000  
IN:  
AUDIO UNITY  
The lamp lights when all the audio input levels  
are set to the UNITY level.  
132  
For selecting whether to perform the  
registration operation if all the cue points  
have already been registered when the multi  
0001  
OUT:  
The lamp lights when all the audio output  
levels are set to the UNITY level.  
ROTA MODE  
cue function has been set to ON  
.
0002 IN/OUT  
:
0000  
OFF:  
The lamp lights when all the audio input and  
output levels are set to the UNITY level.  
No further cue points are registered.  
0001  
ON:  
The registration operation is continued. If “MANU”  
has been selected as the setup menu item No.131  
(PAGE MODE) setting, the next cue point is  
registered at CUE¢1 on the page concerned; if  
“AUTO” has been selected, it is registered at CUE01.  
143  
For setting whether the lighting of the tape  
mechanism is to be set to ON or remain OFF.  
CASSTT  
LIGHT  
0000  
OFF:  
The mechanism does not light even when a  
cassette is inserted.  
0001  
ON:  
133  
For setting the volume of the sound heard  
when the keys are touched.  
The mechanism lights when a cassette is inserted.  
KEY BEEP  
0000  
0001  
0002  
OFF  
LOW  
HIGH  
144  
For switching the preset registration method  
for the time code.  
0000 NORMAL:  
TC INPUT  
The time code is input starting with the left-  
most digit.  
134  
For setting the volume of the alarm tone.  
0000  
0001  
0002  
OFF  
LOW  
HIGH  
0001  
REV:  
ALARM BEEP  
The time code is input from the high-order digit  
but is displayed from the right-most digit.  
<Note>  
If the fan motor has shut down, the alarm tone is sounded  
at the HIGH volume level regardless of this setting.  
145  
For selecting whether the LCD monitor display on  
the front panel is to be turned on or off.  
*1: This item is not displayed when the 23/24 Hz or 25 Hz (HD or  
SD) mode has been selected as the system menu item No.25  
(SYSTEM FREQ) setting.  
FRONT LCD  
0000  
OFF:  
The display is turned off.  
0001  
ON:  
The display is turned on or off in synchronization  
with the screen saver operation for the time code  
display area.  
The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup menus  
<INTERFACE>  
No./Item  
Description of setting  
No./Item  
209  
Description of setting  
200  
For selecting whether to operate two or more  
VTRs in synchronization.  
For setting whether or not to return the ACK  
code when a command is received from RS-  
PARA RUN  
0000  
DIS  
:
The VTRs are not operated in  
synchronization.  
The VTRs are operated in  
synchronization.  
RETURN ACK 232C.  
0000  
0001  
OFF  
ON  
:
:
The ACK code is not returned.  
The ACK code is returned.  
0001  
ENA  
:
212  
For selecting the remote control connector  
for controlling the slave machine when this  
VTR is to be used as the master machine for  
deck-to-deck operations.  
<Note>  
To operate the VTRs in synchronization, set all the  
VTRs to 1 (ENA). (Refer to pages 14 and 19.)  
MASTER  
PORT  
202  
For setting what ID information is to be  
returned to the controller.  
0001 IN/OUT  
:
:
The IN/OUT connector is used.  
The OUT connector is used.  
0001  
OUT  
ID SEL  
0000  
OTHER  
<Note>  
0001 DVCPRO  
This setting takes effect only when the 9P button has  
been set to LOCAL (LED off).  
0002  
ORIG  
<Notes>  
• For 0 (OTHER), the ID information of VTRs other than  
DVCPRO models is set.  
• Select 2 (ORIG) only when the VTR is connected to a  
Panasonic controller (such as the AJ-A900, an  
optional accessory).  
• Select 1 (DVCPRO) or 2 (ORIG) if the 23/24 Hz mode  
has been selected by system menu item No.25  
(SYSTEM FREQ).  
204  
For selecting whether the RS-232C connector  
is to function.  
RS232C SEL  
0000  
OFF  
:
The RS-232C connector does  
not function.  
0001  
ON  
:
The RS-232C connector functions.  
205  
For setting the RS-232C data transfer speed  
(baud rate).  
BAUD RATE  
0000  
0001  
0002  
0003  
0004  
0005  
300  
600  
1200  
2400  
4800  
9600  
206  
For setting the RS-232C data length.  
(Unit: bits)  
DATA  
LENGTH  
0000  
0001  
7
8
207  
For setting the number of RS-232C stop bits.  
(Unit: bits)  
STOP BIT  
0000  
0001  
1
2
208  
For setting whether the RS-232C parity bit is  
to be used and, if it is used, whether even or  
odd parity is to apply.  
PARITY  
0000  
NON:  
The parity bit is not used.  
0001  
ODD:  
The parity bit is used with an odd parity.  
0002  
EVEN:  
The parity bit is used with an even parity.  
The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup menus  
<EDIT>  
No./Item  
Description of setting  
No./Item  
308  
Description of setting  
300  
For selecting the operation to be performed when  
an edit point has been set incorrectly (when the  
OUT point comes before the IN point).  
For setting the maximum speed of VAR FWD.  
0000  
0001  
i
4.9  
i2  
:
:
i4.9 times normal tape speed  
i2 times normal tape speed  
(i1.85 times normal tape  
speed for formats other than  
DVCPRO HD-LP)  
IN/OUT DEL  
VAR FWD  
MAX  
0000  
MANU:  
Editing is not performed unless the illegal edit  
point is cleared or set properly.  
0002  
<Notes>  
i1  
:
i1 times normal tape speed  
0001  
AUTO:  
The edit point which had already been input is  
cleared automatically.  
•
At any setting other than 0 (i4.9), phase adjustments  
cannot be conducted from the editing controller.  
Depending on the format used, the actual tape  
running speed differs slightly from what is indicated  
by the superimposed display.  
301  
For selecting whether to show a negative display  
(time code display area) when the IN point is  
NEGA FLASH greater than the OUT point.  
•
0000  
OFF:  
309  
For setting the maximum speed of VAR REV.  
A negative display is not shown.  
0001  
A negative display is shown.  
0000  
0001  
j4.9  
:
:
j4.9 times normal tape speed  
j2 times normal tape speed  
(j1.85 times normal tape  
speed for formats other than  
DVCPRO HD-LP)  
ON:  
j
2
VAR REV MAX  
302  
For selecting whether to perform simultaneous  
playback during editing.  
0000  
0002  
<Note>  
j1  
:
j1 times normal tape speed  
CONFI EDIT  
OFF  
:
Simultaneous playback is not  
performed.  
Simultaneous playback is  
performed.  
Depending on the format used, the actual tape running  
speed differs slightly from what is indicated by the  
0001  
ON  
:
superimposed display  
.
<Note>  
310  
For setting the maximum speed of JOG FWD.  
Simultaneous playback takes effect when TAPE is  
selected as the F1 key setting on the  
<HOME> menu. Refer to setup menu item No.140 as  
well.  
0000  
0001  
i4.9  
:
i4.9 times normal tape speed  
i2 times normal tape speed  
(i1.85 times normal tape  
speed for formats other than  
DVCPRO HD-LP)  
OUTPUT  
i2  
:
JOG FWD  
MAX  
303*1  
For selecting how to connect the digital audio  
edit IN points.  
0000  
0001  
0002  
<Notes>  
i1  
:
i1 times normal tape speed  
CUT  
FADE  
:
:
Cut processing  
V-fade processing  
AUD EDIT  
IN  
At any setting other than 0 (i4.9), phase adjustments  
cannot be conducted from the editing controller which  
performs these adjustments by the JOG command.  
304*1  
For selecting how to connect the digital audio  
edit OUT points.  
0000  
0001  
CUT  
FADE  
:
:
Cut processing  
V-fade processing  
AUD EDIT  
OUT  
311  
For setting the maximum speed of JOG REV.  
0000  
0001  
j
4.9  
:
j
4.9 times normal tape speed  
j2  
:
j2 times normal tape speed  
(j1.85 times normal tape  
speed for formats other than  
DVCPRO HD-LP)  
JOG REV MAX  
305  
For selecting whether to register the IN points  
using the PREROLL button in cases where  
AUTO ENTRY the IN points have not been registered.  
0000  
DIS  
:
The IN points are not  
registered.  
0002  
j1  
:
j1 times normal tape speed  
312  
For setting the postroll time.  
Any time from 0 to 5 seconds can be set in 1-  
second increments.  
0001  
ENA  
:
The IN points are registered.  
306*1  
For selecting the deck whose the color  
framing is to be adjusted during deck-to-deck  
editing.  
0000 PLAYER  
The player’s IN and OUT points are adjusted  
(using the recorder as the reference).  
0001 RECORD  
The recorder’s IN and OUT points are adjusted  
(using the player as the reference).  
POSTROLL  
TM  
0000  
0001  
0002  
0003  
0004  
0005  
0s  
1s  
2s  
3s  
4s  
5s  
CF ADJ SEL  
:
:
307  
For selecting the VTR’s mode upon  
completion of the cue-up operation.  
AFTER  
0000  
STOP:  
CUE-UP  
The VTR is set to the STOP mode.  
0001  
STILL:  
*1: This item is not displayed when the 23/24 Hz or 25 Hz (HD or  
SD) mode has been selected as the system menu item No.25  
(SYSTEM FREQ) setting.  
The VTR is set to the still picture (SHTL STILL)  
mode.  
0002 STILL2  
:
The VTR is set to the still picture (VAR STILL)  
mode.  
The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup menus  
(continued)  
<EDIT>  
No./Item  
Description of setting  
No./Item  
323*1  
Description of setting  
320*1  
For setting the allocation of the channels for  
the analog audio presets of a controller when  
a controller without a function to control the  
edit presets of the digital audio signals is  
used to edit the digital audio signals of the  
VTR.  
As with setup menu item No.320, the VTR’s  
CH4 edit presets are set to ON or OFF  
following the analog audio signals specified  
by the controller.  
EDIT RPLCE1  
EDIT RPLCE4  
0000  
Not set.  
N-DEF  
:
The VTR’s CH1 edit presets are set to ON or  
OFF following the analog audio signals specified  
by the controller.  
0001  
CH1  
:
The analog CH1 edit presets are followed.  
0002  
CH2:  
0000  
N-DEF  
:
The analog CH2 edit presets are followed.  
Not set.  
0003  
CH1+2:  
0001  
CH1  
:
The analog CH1 or CH2 edit presets are  
followed.  
The analog CH1 edit presets are followed.  
0002  
CH2:  
324*1  
As with setup menu item No.320, the VTR’s  
CUE edit presets are set to ON or OFF  
following the analog audio signals specified  
by the editor or controller.  
The analog CH2 edit presets are followed.  
0003  
The analog CH1 or CH2 edit presets are  
followed.  
CH1+2:  
EDIT RPLCEC  
0000  
N-DEF  
:
321*1  
As with setup menu item No.320, the VTR’s  
CH2 edit presets are set to ON or OFF  
following the analog audio signals specified  
by the controller.  
Not set.  
0001  
CH1  
:
EDIT RPLCE2  
The analog CH1 edit presets are followed.  
0002  
The analog CH2 edit presets are followed.  
CH2:  
0000  
N-DEF  
:
Not set.  
0003  
CH1+2:  
0001  
CH1  
:
The analog CH1 or CH2 edit presets are  
followed.  
The analog CH1 edit presets are followed.  
0002  
CH2:  
The analog CH2 edit presets are followed  
0003  
CH1+2:  
The analog CH1 or CH2 edit presets are  
followed.  
322*1  
As with setup menu item No.320, the VTR’s  
CH3 edit presets are set to ON or OFF  
following the analog audio signals specified  
by the controller.  
EDIT RPLCE3  
0000  
N-DEF  
:
Not set.  
0001  
CH1  
:
The analog CH1 edit presets are followed.  
0002  
CH2:  
The analog CH2 edit presets are followed  
0003  
CH1+2:  
The analog CH1 or CH2 edit presets are  
followed.  
*1: This item is not displayed when the 23/24 Hz or 25 Hz (HD or  
SD) mode has been selected as the system menu item No.25  
(SYSTEM FREQ) setting.  
The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup menus  
<TAPE PROTECT>  
No./Item  
Description of setting  
No./Item  
403  
Description of setting  
400  
For selecting the duration of the time taken  
after the VTR is left standing in the STOP or  
search STILL mode (JOG, VAR or SHTL)  
before the tape protection mode is  
established.  
For selecting the operation to be performed  
when the tape protection mode is established  
after the VTR has been left standing in the  
STOP mode.  
STILL TIMER  
STOP  
PROTECT  
0000  
0001  
0002  
STEP  
HALF  
T-REL  
:
:
:
STEP FWD  
Half-loading  
Tension release  
(Units: s = seconds, min = minutes)  
0000  
0001  
0002  
0003  
0004  
0005  
0006  
0007  
0008  
0.5s  
5s  
<Notes>  
•
•
When STEP FWD is selected, the VTR is  
automatically transferred to the standby OFF (half-  
loading) mode after it has been left standing in the  
STOP mode for a total of 30 minutes (or 1 minute in  
the case of a DV or DVCAM tape).  
When, after tension release has been selected and  
the VTR has been transferred to the tension release  
mode, the VTR has been left standing in this mode  
for a total of 2 hours, it is automatically transferred to  
the standby OFF (half-loading) mode. However, in  
the case of a DV or DVCAM tape, the transfer to the  
tension release mode is inhibited, and the VTR  
operates as if STEP FWD has been selected.  
10s  
20s  
30s  
40s  
50s  
1min  
2min  
<Note>  
When a DV or DVCAM tape is  
used, the time is set to 10  
seconds even when a setting of  
2 (10s) or longer is selected.  
401  
For selecting the operation to be performed  
when the tape protection mode is established  
after the VTR has been left standing in the  
STILL status in a search mode (JOG, VAR or  
SHTL).  
SRC  
PROTECT  
0000  
0001  
0002  
STEP  
HALF  
T-REL  
:
:
:
STEP FWD  
Half-loading  
Tension release  
<Notes>  
•
•
When STEP FWD is selected, the VTR is  
automatically transferred to the standby OFF (half-  
loading) mode after it has been left standing in the  
STILL status for a total of 30 minutes (or 1 minute in  
the case of a DV or DVCAM tape).  
When, after tension release has been selected and  
the VTR has been transferred to the tension release  
mode, the VTR has been left standing in this mode  
for a total of 2 hours, it is automatically transferred to  
the standby OFF (half-loading) mode. However, in  
the case of a DV or DVCAM tape, the transfer to the  
tension release mode is inhibited, and the VTR  
operates as if STEP FWD has been selected.  
402  
For selecting whether the drum is to operate  
in the standby OFF (half-loading) mode.  
DRUM STDBY  
0000  
0001  
OFF  
ON  
:
:
The drum stops rotating.  
The drum continues to rotate.  
<Precaution for STILL TIMER item setting>  
The cumulative total standby time passed in the same location  
increases at such times when the same material is repeatedly used  
as is the case when programs are transmitted, for example.  
The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup menus  
<TIME CODE>  
No./Item  
Description of setting  
No./Item  
505*1  
Description of setting  
500*4  
For selecting whether or not to output the  
VITC signal at the positions selected by setup  
menu items No.501 (VITC POS-1) and No.502  
(VITC POS-2).  
For selecting the regeneration signal when  
REGEN has been selected as the TCG (time  
code generator) mode.  
VITC BLANK  
TCG REGEN  
0000 TC&UB  
:
0000 BLANK  
:
:
The VITC signal is not output.  
The VITC signal is output.  
Regeneration applies to both the time code  
and user’s bit.  
0001  
THRU  
<Note>  
0001  
TC:  
Only the SD output takes effect at this setting.  
Regeneration applies only to the time code only.  
0002  
UB:  
501*4  
For setting the position where the VITC signal  
is to be inserted.  
Regeneration applies only to the user’s bit only.  
<59/60Hz>  
0000  
:
0006  
:
0010  
<Notes>  
<50Hz, 25Hz (SD)>  
VITC POS-1  
506*1  
For selecting the editing mode range when  
the VTR is operating in the REGEN mode  
while performing editing operations with  
“AUTO” selected as the setup menu item  
No.503 (TCG MODE) setting.  
10L  
:
16L  
:
0000  
:
7L  
:
REGEN MODE  
0004  
:
11L  
:
20L  
0015  
22L  
0000  
AS&IN:  
Regeneration applies during assemble or  
insert editing.  
•
The same line as the one selected by the setup menu  
item No.502 (VITC POS-2) cannot be selected.  
Only the SD output takes effect at this setting.  
0001 ASSEM  
:
•
Regeneration applies during assemble editing.  
502*4  
0002  
INSRT:  
For setting the position where the VITC signal  
is to be inserted.  
Regeneration applies during insert editing.  
<59/60Hz>  
0000  
:
0008  
:
0010  
<Notes>  
<50Hz, 25Hz (SD)>  
VITC POS-2  
507*1  
For selecting the time code to be used when  
HD SDI or SD SDI has been selected as the  
setup menu item No.600 (VIDEO IN SEL)  
setting when an external time code is to be  
used.  
10L  
:
18L  
:
0000  
:
7L  
:
TC SOURCE  
0006  
:
13L  
:
20L  
0015  
22L  
[When HD SDI has been selected]  
0000  
INT:  
•
The same line as the one selected by the setup menu  
item No.501 (VITC POS-1) cannot be selected.  
Only the SD output takes effect at this setting.  
The time code of the internal time code  
generator is used.  
•
0001  
EXT_L:  
503*1  
For setting the synchronization of the internal  
time code generator.  
LTC of the TIME CODE IN connector is used.  
0002  
The LTC information added to the serial  
signals which are input to HD SDI IN is used.  
0003  
SLTC:  
0000 REGEN  
:
TCG MODE  
The time code reader is synchronized with the  
time code which is read from the tape.  
SVITC:  
0001  
PRE:  
The VITC information added to the serial  
signals which are input to HD SDI IN is used.  
Presetting is enabled at the operation panel or  
by the remote controller.  
0002  
AUTO:  
[When SD SDI has been selected]  
The REGEN and PRE settings are  
automatically switched in accordance with the  
operation mode.  
In the editing mode: REGEN is selected.  
In all other modes: PRE is selected.  
0000  
INT:  
The time code of the internal time code  
generator is used.  
0001  
EXT_L:  
LTC of the TIME CODE IN connector is used.  
504*1  
0002  
VITC:  
For setting when the internal time code  
generator is to advance depending on the  
operation mode.  
The VITC information added to the serial  
signals which are input to SD SDI IN is used.  
<Note>  
If the VIDEO IN SEL input selection is changed, the time  
code is converted as shown below.  
[HD_SDI]  
INT  
EXT_L  
SLTC  
SVITC  
RUN MODE  
0000  
REC:  
The time code generator is advanced during  
recording.  
[SD_SDI]  
INT  
EXT_L  
EXT_L  
VITC  
0001  
FREE:  
↔
↔
↔
↔
The time code generator is advanced while the  
power is on regardless of which operation  
mode is established.  
*1: This item is not displayed when the 23/24 Hz or 25 Hz (HD or SD) mode  
has been selected as the system menu item No.25 (SYSTEM FREQ)  
setting.  
*2: This item is not displayed when the 23/24 Hz or 25 Hz (HD) mode has  
been selected as the system menu item No.25 (SYSTEM FREQ) setting.  
The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup menus  
(continued)  
<TIME CODE>  
No./Item  
Description of setting  
No./Item  
513  
VITC OUT  
Description of setting  
508*1  
For setting how the user’s bit of the time code  
generated by the TCG is to be used.  
For selecting how to output the VITC which is  
superimposed on the output video signal.  
0000  
000  
:
0000  
SBC:  
BINARY GP  
NOT SPECIFIED (no character set specified)  
In the playback mode, the time code recorded  
in the SBC area is output.  
0001  
001:  
ISO CHARACTER (8-bit character set  
complying with ISO646, ISO2022 standards)  
0001  
VAUX:  
In the playback mode, the time code recorded  
0002  
0003  
0004  
0005  
0006  
0007  
010  
011  
100  
101  
110  
111  
:
:
:
:
:
:
UNASSIGNED 1 (undefined)  
UNASSIGNED 2 (undefined)  
UNASSIGNED 3 (undefined)  
PAGE/LINE  
UNASSIGNED 4 (undefined)  
UNASSIGNED 5 (undefined)  
in the VAUX area is output.  
<Note>  
The VITC information detected by the HD serial input is  
automatically recorded in the VAUX area when the video  
signals are recorded  
.
514  
For selecting whether to superimpose the  
VITC information on the HD serial output.  
509  
For selecting whether to exercise phase  
correction control over the LTC which is  
PHASE CORR generated by the TCG.  
HD  
VITC  
EMBD  
0000  
OFF:  
The VITC information is not superimposed.  
0001  
ON:  
0000  
OFF:  
The VITC information is superimposed.  
Phase correction control is not exercised.  
0001  
Phase correction control is exercised.  
515  
For selecting whether to superimpose the  
LTC information on the HD serial output.  
ON:  
HD EMBD LTC  
0000  
OFF:  
510*1  
For selecting whether to set the CF flag of the  
TCG to ON or OFF.  
0000  
0001  
The LTC information is not superimposed.  
0001  
ON:  
OFF  
ON  
:
:
The CF flag is set to OFF.  
The CF flag is set to ON.  
TCG CF FLAG  
The LTC information ist superimposed.  
516*1  
For selecting the processing to align the  
phase of the time code which is output from  
the TIME CODE OUT connector.  
Normally, the time code which is output from the  
TIME CODE OUT connector is aligned with the  
output video and audio. If so required by the  
connection with an external component or for  
some other reason, this item makes it possible to  
set the mode for aligning the phase with the  
input.  
511*2  
For selecting the drop frame or non-drop  
frame mode for CTL and TCG.  
0000  
TC OUT ADV  
DF  
:
The drop frame mode is  
selected.  
The non-drop frame mode is  
DF MODE  
0001  
NDF  
:
selected  
.
<Note>  
This DF mode setting takes effect only when LOCAL is  
selected or when “ENA” has been selected as the setup  
menu item No.001 (LOCAL ENA) setting.  
0000  
OFF:  
512*1  
The phase alignment processing is not  
conducted. The time code which is output  
from the TIME CODE OUT connector is  
aligned with the output video and audio.  
For switching the phase of the time code,  
which is output from the TIME CODE OUT  
connector, in response to the external LTC  
input when a setting other than “INT” has  
been selected for setup menu item No.507 (TC  
SOURCE). (In EE mode only)  
TC OUT REF  
0001  
EDIT:  
During playback when an editing mode has  
been selected and during editing, the time  
code which is output from the TIME CODE  
OUT connector is aligned with the input video  
and audio. In all other modes, it is aligned with  
0000  
V OUT  
:
The phase is aligned with the  
output image.  
The phase is aligned with the  
0001  
TC IN  
:
external time code input  
.
the output video and audio  
.
SBC (sub code data) area:  
517*1  
For selecting whether to latch the TCG  
display and LTC output during INPUT CHECK.  
This is an area on the helical track, and it is separate from the video  
and audio data area. The time codes, recording dates and times  
and other tape control information complying with SMPTE/EBU  
standards are stored here. As with the conventional LTC (linear time  
code), the time code can be read even during rewinding or fast  
forwarding. It can also be read out when the tape has stopped.  
VAUX (video auxiliary data) area:  
0000 MOMENT  
:
TCG OUT  
The INPUT CHECK mode is established only  
while the INPUT CHECK key is held down.  
0001  
LATCH:  
When the INPUT CHECK key is pressed, the  
INPUT CHECK mode is established; even  
when it is released, the mode remains  
unchanged. The selection is released when  
the video output is set to a mode other than the  
EE mode.  
This area is to be found in the video data area on the helical track.  
The additional information relating to the video data is stored here.  
*1: This item is not displayed when the 23/24 Hz or 25 Hz (HD or SD) mode  
has been selected as the system menu item No.25 (SYSTEM FREQ)  
setting.  
*2: This item is not displayed when the 23/24 Hz, 25 Hz (HD or SD) or 50 Hz  
mode has been selected as the system menu item No.25 (SYSTEM  
FREQ) setting.  
The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup menus  
<VIDEO>  
No./Item  
Description of setting  
No./Item  
605*1  
INTERPOLATE  
Description of setting  
600*1  
For selecting the video signal which is to be input.  
0000 INT SG  
During field slow playback, vertical interpolation is  
conducted automatically to minimize the up/down  
movement of the playback pictures. However, this  
setting enables the interpolation operation to be  
forcibly set to OFF.  
:
The internal signal selected by the VIDEO INT  
SG item is generated.  
VIDEO IN SEL  
0001  
HDSDI:  
The serial video signal which has been input to the  
HD SDI IN connector is selected.  
0000  
0001  
OFF  
:
The interpolation is forcibly set to OFF.  
During slow playback, the interpolation  
is automatically set to ON.  
AUTO  
:
0002  
SDTI: (In 59/60 Hz mode)  
The compressed IF signal which has been input to  
the SDTI IN connector is selected. (This setting  
does not appear when the AJ-YAC15P optional  
board has not been installed.)  
606  
For selecting the SD SDI or MONITOR output  
signal.  
SD MONI O  
SEL  
0000  
0001  
MONI: : The MONITOR signal is output.  
SDI  
:
The same video signal as the  
one output from the SD SDI  
OUT1 connector is output  
0002 SD SDI  
:
The serial video signal which has been input to the  
SD SDI IN connector is selected. (This setting does  
not appear when the AJ-UC1700G optional board  
has not been installed.)  
<Note>  
When 1 (SDI) is selected, the time code and other  
information are not superimposed on the display.  
601*1  
620*4  
For selecting the type of internal signal.  
For selecting the picture frame during down-  
conversion.  
0000 100%CB  
:
A 100% color bar signal is selected.  
0001 75%CB:  
A 75% color bar signal is selected.  
VIDEO INT SG  
0000  
0001  
0002 FIT_HV  
0003  
0004  
FIT_V  
FIT_H  
:
:
:
:
:
Side cut mode  
Letter box mode  
Squeeze mode  
Semi letter box 14:9  
Semi letter box 13:9  
DOWNCON  
MODE  
0002 SMPTE  
:
14:9  
13:9  
An SMPTE color bar signal is selected.  
0003  
ARIB:  
621*5  
For selecting the picture frame during up-  
conversion.  
An ARIB color bar signal is selected.  
0004  
MB:  
0000  
0001  
FIT_V  
FIT_H  
:
:
Side panel mode  
Top and bottom cut in vertical  
direction  
UPCON MODE  
A multiburst signal is selected.  
0005  
RAMP:  
A ramp signal is selected.  
0002 FIT_HV  
:
Stretch mode  
0006 BLACK  
:
A black signal is selected.  
622  
For selecting the horizontal frequency band  
during down-conversion and line conversion  
(1080i <> 720p).  
0007  
PLL:  
A PLL signal is selected.  
D/C RESP  
H
0008  
EQ:  
0000  
0001  
WIDE  
STD  
An EQ signal is selected.  
602*1  
For selecting how to process the serial input.  
623  
For selecting the vertical frequency band  
during down-conversion and line conversion  
0000 DR OFF  
:
The 8 higher bits after rounding up  
the 2 lowest bits are recorded.  
<>  
(1080i  
0000  
720p).  
D/C RESP  
V
SDI IN MODE  
0001 DR ON  
:
The signal with 8 higher bits, obtained  
by dynamic rounding, is recorded.  
WIDE  
STD  
0001  
624*5  
For selecting the horizontal frequency band  
during up-conversion and line conversion.  
603  
For selecting whether to mute the video output  
signals if LOW RF has been detected during  
playback.  
0000  
STD  
U/C RESP  
H
V-MUTE SEL  
0001 NARROW  
0000 N MUTE  
:
The signals are not muted.  
(They are frozen.)  
625*5  
For selecting the vertical frequency band  
during up-conversion and line conversion.  
0001  
0002 BLACK  
0003 NOISE  
GRAY  
:
:
:
The signals are muted with gray.  
The signals are muted with black.  
The signals are muted with noise.  
0000  
STD  
U/C RESP  
V
0001 NARROW  
604*1  
For selecting the freeze mode of the still  
pictures and slow playback mode.  
626  
For accentuating the horizontal contours  
during down-conversion and line conversion  
0000  
FIELD  
:
Field freeze, field slow  
FREEZE SEL  
<>  
0dB  
i0.7dB  
(1080i  
0000  
0001  
720p).  
D/C ENH  
H
0000 FRAME  
:
Frame freeze, frame slow  
*1: This item is not displayed when the 23/24 Hz or 25 Hz (HD or SD) mode  
has been selected as the system menu item.  
*4: This item is not displayed when the 23/24 Hz or 25 Hz (HD) mode has  
been selected as the system menu item No.25 (SYSTEM FREQ) setting.  
*5: This item is not displayed when the 25 Hz (HD or SD) mode has been  
selected as the system menu item No.25 (SYSTEM FREQ) setting.  
i
1dB  
0002  
<Note>  
0003 i1. 2dB  
The numbers on the superimposed  
display are approximations only.  
0004  
0005  
i1.5dB  
i2dB  
The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup menus  
(continued)  
<VIDEO>  
No./Item  
Description of setting  
No./Item  
632*2  
Description of setting  
627  
For accentuating the vertical contours during  
down-conversion and line conversion  
For selecting the HD output signal format  
during 720p tape playback or in the 720p EE  
mode. (See table below.)  
<>  
(1080i  
0000  
0001  
0002  
0003  
0004  
0005  
720p).  
0dB  
i0.7dB  
D/C ENH V  
>
720p HD_  
OUT  
0000  
0001  
0002  
1080i  
720p  
720p  
i
1dB  
<Note>  
i1.2dB  
i1.5dB  
i2dB  
633*2  
For selecting the SD output signal format  
during 720p tape playback or in the 720p EE  
mode. (See table below.)  
The numbers on the superimposed  
display are approximations only.  
>
720p SD_  
OUT  
628*5  
<Note>  
0000  
0001  
0002  
--------  
480i  
480p  
For accentuating the horizontal contours  
during up-conversion.  
There is no output in the 60 Hz  
mode.  
0000  
0001  
0002  
0003  
0004  
0005  
0dB  
i0.7dB  
U/C ENH H  
Output connectors  
i
1dB  
<Note>  
i1.2dB  
i1.5dB  
i2dB  
HD SDI OUT  
SD SDI OUT  
VIDEO OUT  
The numbers on the superimposed  
display are approximations only.  
0000  
0001  
0002  
634*2  
1080i (line-  
480i (down-  
480i (down-  
converted output) converted output) converted output)  
629*5  
For accentuating the vertical contours during  
up-conversion.  
720p  
(no conversion)  
480i (down-  
480i (down-  
converted output) converted output)  
0000  
0001  
0002  
0003  
0004  
0005  
0dB  
i0.7dB  
i1dB  
i1.2dB  
i1.5dB  
i2dB  
U/C ENH V  
720p  
(no conversion)  
480p* (down- 480i (down-  
converted output) converted output)  
<Note>  
The numbers on the superimposed  
display are approximations only.  
For selecting the HD output signal format  
during 480p tape (DVCPRO50P) playback.  
(See table below.)  
>
480p HD_  
OUT  
630*2  
For selecting the HD output signal format  
during 1080i tape playback or in the 1080i EE  
mode. (See table below.)  
0000  
0001  
0002  
1080i  
720p  
---------  
>
1080i HD_  
OUT  
0000  
0001  
0002  
1080i  
720p  
1080i  
635*2  
For selecting the SD output signal format  
during 480p tape (DVCPRO50P) playback.  
(See table below.)  
>
480p SD_  
OUT  
631*2  
For selecting the SD output signal format  
during 1080i tape playback or in the 1080i EE  
mode. (See table below.)  
0000  
0001  
0002  
480p  
480p  
480i  
>
1080i SD_  
OUT  
0000  
0001  
0002  
480i  
--------  
480p  
<Note>  
There is no output in the 60 Hz  
mode.  
Output connectors  
HD SDI OUT  
SD SDI OUT  
VIDEO OUT  
Output connectors  
0000  
1080i (up-  
480p*  
480i (down-  
HD SDI OUT  
SD SDI OUT  
VIDEO OUT  
converted output) (no conversion)  
converted output)  
0000  
0001  
0002  
1080i  
(no conversion)  
480i (down-  
converted output) converted output)  
480i (down-  
0001  
720p (up- 480p*  
480i (down-  
converted output)  
converted output) (no conversion)  
Muted 480i (down-  
720p (line-  
480i (down- 480i (down-  
0002  
480i (down-  
converted output) converted output) converted output)  
converted output) converted output)  
1080i  
480p* (down-  
480i (down-  
<Note>  
(no conversion)  
converted output) converted output)  
During SD tape playback, the VTR cannot be operated in the 60  
Hz mode.  
*1: This item is not displayed when the 23/24 Hz, 25 Hz (HD or SD)  
or 50 Hz mode has been selected as the system menu item  
No.25 (SYSTEM FREQ) setting.  
*2: This item is not displayed when the 25 Hz (HD or SD) mode has  
been selected as the system menu item No.25 (SYSTEM FREQ)  
setting.  
*
Setup menu item No.107 and INPUT CHECK do not function,  
and the same signal as this signal line is output.  
The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup menus  
(continued)  
<VIDEO>  
No./Item  
Description of setting  
No./Item  
641*2  
Description of setting  
636*2  
For selecting the HD output signal format  
during 480i tape (DVCPRO50, DVCPRO, DV or  
DVCAM) playback. (See table below.)  
For accentuating the horizontal contours  
during up-conversion of SD SDI input signals.  
0000  
0001  
0002  
0003  
0004  
0005  
0dB  
i0.7dB  
i1dB  
i1.2dB  
i1.5dB  
i2dB  
>
480i HD_  
I U/C ENH  
H
0000  
0001  
0002  
1080i  
720p  
---------  
OUT  
<Note>  
The numbers on the superimposed  
display are approximations only.  
637*2  
For selecting the SD output signal format  
during 480i tape (DVCPRO50, DVCPRO, DV or  
DVCAM) playback. (See table below.)  
480i SD_  
642*2  
For accentuating the vertical contours during  
up-conversion of SD SDI input signals.  
>
0000  
0001  
0002  
480i  
480i  
480p  
OUT  
0000  
0001  
0002  
0003  
0004  
0005  
0dB  
i0.7dB  
i1dB  
i1.2dB  
i1.5dB  
i2dB  
I U/C ENH  
V
Output connectors  
<Note>  
The numbers on the superimposed  
display are approximations only.  
HD SDI OUT  
SD SDI OUT  
VIDEO OUT  
480i  
0000  
1080i (up-  
480i  
650  
0000* CMPNT*  
:
:
Level adjustment mode for the  
component style  
Level adjustment mode for the  
composite style  
converted output) (no conversion)  
(no conversion)  
0001  
720p (up- 480i  
480i  
(no conversion)  
STYLE  
0001 CMPST  
converted output) (no conversion)  
Muted 480p* (up-  
*
The asterisk denotes the factory setting for  
AJ-HD1700E.  
0002  
480i  
converted output) (no conversion)  
651*3  
For selecting the rotational axis of the chroma  
phase adjustment.  
<Note>  
During SD tape playback, the VTR cannot be operated in the 60  
Hz mode.  
0000  
Pb-Pr  
:
The axis rotates in a perfect  
circle on the SDI (component  
style) vectorscope.  
HUE STYLE  
(SD)*DW  
638*1  
For selecting the up-conversion picture frame  
when SD SDI input signals are supplied.  
0001  
U-V  
:
The axis rotates in a perfect  
circle on the analog (composite  
style) vectorscope.  
0000  
FIT_V  
:
Side panel mode  
IN U/C  
MODE  
0001  
FIT_H: Top and bottom cut in vertical  
direction  
653  
For adjusting the Y level of the HD SDI output.  
j¶  
0002 FIT_HV  
:
Stretch mode  
i
(
to 0 dB to 3 dB)  
Y LVL (HD)*UP  
0000  
:
1000  
:
0.0%  
639*1  
For selecting the horizontal frequency band  
during the up-conversion of SD SDI input  
signals.  
<Note>  
:
100.0%  
:
This setting takes effect when  
“CMPNT” has been selected as the  
setup menu item No.650 setting.  
I U/C RESP H  
0000  
STD  
0001 NARROW  
1413  
141.3%  
640*1  
For selecting the vertical frequency band  
during the up-conversion of SD SDI input  
signals.  
654  
For adjusting the PB level of the HD SDI  
output.  
j¶  
i
(
to 0 dB to 3 dB)  
Pb LVL  
(HD)*UP  
I U/C RESP V  
0000  
STD  
0000  
:
1000  
:
0.0%  
<Note>  
0001 NARROW  
:
100.0%  
:
This setting takes effect when  
“CMPNT” has been selected as the  
setup menu item No.650 setting.  
*1: This item is not displayed when the 23/24 Hz or 25 Hz (HD or  
SD) mode has been selected as the system menu item No.25  
(SYSTEM FREQ) setting.  
*2: This item is not displayed when the 23/24 Hz, 25 Hz (HD or SD)  
or 50 Hz mode has been selected as the system menu item  
No.25 (SYSTEM FREQ) setting.  
*3: This item is not displayed when the 50 Hz or 25 Hz (HD or SD)  
mode has been selected as the system menu item No.25  
(SYSTEM FREQ) setting.  
1413  
141.3%  
655  
For adjusting the PB level of the HD SDI  
output.  
Pr LVL (HD)*UP  
j¶  
i
(
to 0 dB to 3 dB)  
0000  
:
1000  
:
0.0%  
<Note>  
:
100.0%  
:
This setting takes effect when  
“CMPNT” has been selected as the  
setup menu item No.650 setting.  
*
Setup menu item No.107 and INPUT CHECK do not function,  
and the same signal as this signal line is output.  
1413  
141.3%  
656  
For adjusting the black level of the HD SDI  
output.  
<Note>  
Setup menu items No.638, 639, 640, 641 and 642 do not function  
when the AJ-UC1700G optional board has not been installed.  
50 j10.0%  
BK LVL  
(HD)*UP  
<Note>  
:
150  
:
:
0.0%  
:
This setting takes effect when  
“CMPNT” has been selected as the  
setup menu item No.650 setting.  
The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.  
*UP: With HD output (HD tape playback or up-converted output)  
*DW: With SD output (SD tape playback or down-converted output)  
250 i10.0%  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup menus  
(continued)  
<VIDEO>  
No./Item  
Description of setting  
No./Item  
664  
Description of setting  
658  
For adjusting the Y level of the SD SDI output  
and VIDEO output.  
For adjusting the chroma phase of the HD SDI  
output, SD SDI output and VIDEO output.  
Y LVL (SD)*DW  
HUE  
(C PHASE*)  
j¶  
i
(
to 0 dB to 3 dB)  
x
i
x
(Approx. j30 to 30 )  
0000  
:
1000  
:
0.0%  
0000  
:
0062  
:
0124  
<Note>  
j
31.0  
:
100.0%  
:
<Note>  
<Note>  
:
This setting takes effect when  
“CMPNT” has been selected as the  
setup menu item No.650 setting.  
This setting takes effect when  
“CMPST” has been selected as the  
setup menu item No.650 setting.  
0.0  
:
31.0  
1413  
141.3%  
659  
For adjusting the PB level of the SD SDI  
output and VIDEO output.  
If 0 (50) or 3 [25 (HD)] or 4 [25 (SD)] has been selected  
as the system menu item No.25 (SYSTEM FREQ)  
setting:  
The HD SDI output cannot be adjusted.  
The SD SDI output and video output can be adjusted  
j¶  
i
(
to 0 dB to 3 dB)  
Pb LVL  
(SD)*DW  
0000  
:
1000  
:
0.0%  
•
•
<Note>  
:
100.0%  
:
This setting takes effect when  
“CMPNT” has been selected as the  
setup menu item No.650 setting.  
only when an SD format tape is being created  
.
665  
For adjusting the setup (black*) level of the  
HD SDI output, SD SDI output and VIDEO  
output.  
1413  
141.3%  
660  
For adjusting the PR level of the SD SDI  
output and VIDEO output.  
SETUP LVL  
(BK LVL*)  
(j10% to i10%)  
j¶  
i
(
to 0 dB to 3 dB)  
Pr LVL  
50  
:
150  
:
j
10.0%  
(SD)*DW  
0000  
:
1000  
:
0.0%  
<Note>  
:
0.0%  
:
<Note>  
:
100.0%  
:
This setting takes effect when  
“CMPST” has been selected as the  
setup menu item No.650 setting.  
This setting takes effect when  
“CMPNT” has been selected as the  
setup menu item No.650 setting.  
250  
i
10.0%  
1413  
141.3%  
670  
For adjusting the brightness of the LCD  
monitor on the front panel.  
661  
For adjusting the black level of the SD SDI  
output and VIDEO output.  
0
j127  
BRIGHT  
j
50  
:
150  
:
10.0%  
BK LVL  
(SD)*DW  
:
:
0
:
<Note>  
:
0.0%  
:
127  
:
254  
This setting takes effect when  
“CMPNT” has been selected as the  
127  
250  
i
10.0% setup menu item No.650 setting.  
671  
For adjusting the brightness (red) of the LCD  
monitor on the front panel.  
662  
For adjusting the video level of the HD SDI  
output, SD SDI output and VIDEO output.  
0
j127  
R-BRIGHT  
j¶  
i
(
to 0 dB to 6 dB)  
V LEVEL  
:
:
0
:
0000  
:
1000  
:
0.0%  
127  
:
254  
<Note>  
:
100.0%  
:
This setting takes effect when  
“CMPST” has been selected as the  
setup menu item No.650 setting.  
127  
672  
For adjusting the brightness (blue) of the LCD  
monitor on the front panel.  
2000  
200.0%  
0
:
127  
:
254  
j127  
B-BRIGHT  
663  
For adjusting the chroma level of the HD SDI  
output, SD SDI output and VIDEO output.  
:
0
:
j¶  
i
(
to 0 dB to 3 dB)  
C LEVEL  
0000  
:
1000  
:
0.0%  
127  
<Note>  
:
100.0%  
:
This setting takes effect when  
“CMPST” has been selected as the  
setup menu item No.650 setting.  
673  
For adjusting the contrast of the LCD monitor  
on the front panel.  
1413  
141.3%  
0
j127  
CONTRAST  
:
:
0
:
* This is the name of the menu item for AJ-HD1700E.  
127  
:
254  
127  
674  
For adjusting the contrast (red) of the LCD  
monitor on the front panel.  
0
j127  
R-CONTRAST  
:
:
0
:
127  
:
254  
127  
The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.  
*DW: With SD output (SD tape playback or down-converted  
output)  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup menus  
(continued)  
<VIDEO>  
No./Item  
Description of setting  
No./Item  
688*2  
Description of setting  
675  
For adjusting the contrast (blue) of the LCD  
monitor on the front panel.  
For selecting whether to record the closed  
caption signals which are superimposed on  
the SD input signal.  
0
j127  
B-CONTRAST  
CC REC  
:
:
0
:
0000  
OFF  
:
The closed caption signals are  
not recorded on the tape.  
127  
:
0001  
ON:  
254  
127  
The closed caption signals are recorded on the  
tape if they are superimposed on the SD input  
signal. In this case, they are blanked, up-  
converted and then recorded.  
676*3  
This function clips the signals below the  
pedestal level for SD SDI OUT and composite  
OUT Y (luminance) signals.  
0000  
0001  
BLK CLIP  
<Notes>  
OFF  
ON  
:
:
The signals are not clipped.  
The signals are clipped.  
•
When SDTI has been selected as the input signal, the  
closed caption data superimposed on the  
compressed input signals is recorded on the tape in  
its original form regardless of this menu item’s setting.  
Setup menu item No.688 does not function when the  
AJ-UC1700G optional board has not been installed.  
680*2  
For selecting ON or OFF for the closed  
caption signals in the first field.  
0000 BLANK  
•
:
:
The signals are forcibly blanked.  
The signals are not blanked.  
CC (F1)  
BLANK*DW  
0001 THRU  
695*1  
For selecting ON or OFF for blanking for the  
vertical blanking period of the video signals  
during SD tape playback.  
681*2  
For selecting ON or OFF for the closed  
caption signals in the second field.  
0000 BLANK  
BLANK LINE  
:
:
The signals are forcibly blanked.  
The signals are not blanked.  
CC (F2)  
0000 BLANK  
:
BLANK*DW  
0001 THRU  
All the lines are forcibly blanked.  
0001  
THRU:  
682  
This selects the composite output signal in HD mode.  
None of the lines are blanked.  
0000  
THRU: The signal is output with no  
0002  
MANU:  
VO SETUP  
(HD)*UP  
(This menu is  
not displayed for  
AJ-HD1700E.)  
setup added.  
Blanking ON or OFF is selected on a line-by-  
line basis.  
0001 ADD22L  
0002 ADD21L  
0002 ADD20L  
:
:
:
The signal is output from line  
22 with a 7.5% setup added.  
The signal is output from line 21  
with a 7.5% setup added.  
The signal is output from line 20  
with a 7.5% setup added.  
<Note>  
When 2 (MANU) is set and the  
button is  
SHIFT  
pressed, the display transfers to the submenu screen  
where the ON or OFF can be set for each line. Press  
the  
button again to return the display from the  
SHIFT  
submenu screen.  
683  
This selects the composite output signal in SD mode.  
0000  
THRU  
:
:
:
:
The signal is output with no  
setup added.  
Submenu screen <59/60 Hz>  
VO SETUP  
(SD)*DW  
(This menu is  
not displayed for  
AJ-HD1700E.)  
01  
0000 BLANK  
:
:
The lines are forcibly blanked.  
The lines are not blanked  
0001 ADD22L  
0002 ADD21L  
0002 ADD20L  
The signal is output from line  
22 with a 7.5% setup added.  
The signal is output from line  
21 with a 7.5% setup added.  
The signal is output from line  
20 with a 7.5% setup added.  
0001  
THRU  
LINE 11&274  
.
:
:
:
:
12  
LINE 22&285  
684  
For selecting whether to superimpose EDH on  
the serial output signals.  
Submenu screen <50Hz>  
00  
0000 BLANK  
:
:
The lines are forcibly blanked.  
The lines are not blanked  
EDH (SD)*DW  
0000  
0001  
OFF  
ON  
:
:
EDH is not superimposed.  
EDH is superimposed.  
LINE 7&320  
0001  
THRU  
:
:
:
:
685*2  
For selecting the operation mode for edge  
subcarrier reduction (ESR) in the playback circuit.  
15  
LINE 22&335  
0000  
0001  
OFF  
:
ESR is forcibly set to OFF.  
ESR is automatically set to ON  
or OFF in accordance with the  
VTR operation.  
ESR MODE  
(SD)*DW  
AUTO  
:
*1: This item is not displayed when the 23/24 Hz or 25 Hz (HD or  
SD) mode has been selected as the system menu item No.25  
(SYSTEM FREQ) setting.  
*2: This item is not displayed when the 23/24 Hz, 25 Hz (HD or SD)  
or 50 Hz mode has been selected as the system menu item  
No.25 (SYSTEM FREQ) setting.  
*3: This item is not displayed when the 50 Hz or 25 Hz (HD or SD)  
mode has been selected as the system menu item No.25  
(SYSTEM FREQ) setting.  
*4: This item is not displayed when the 23/24 Hz or 25 Hz (HD)  
mode has been selected as the system menu item No.25  
686*2  
For selecting the cross color processing  
during playback.  
0000  
0001  
OFF  
ON  
:
:
The cross color is output as is.  
The cross color can be reduced.  
CCR MODE  
(SD)*DW  
687*4  
For selecting whether to superimpose the VIDEO  
INDEX signal on the SD SDI output signal.  
0000  
OFF  
:
The VIDEO INDEX signal is not  
superimposed on the SD SDI  
output signal.  
SDI INDEX 0  
*DW  
(SYSTEM FREQ) setting  
.
0001  
ON  
:
The VIDEO INDEX signal is  
superimposed on the SD SDI  
output signal.  
The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.  
*UP: With HD output (HD tape playback or up-converted output)  
*DW:  
With SD output (SD tape playback or down-converted output)97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup menus  
<AUDIO>  
No./Item  
Description of setting  
No./Item  
710  
Description of setting  
700*1  
For selecting the audio input (CH1) reference  
level.  
For selecting the audio monitor output (Lch)  
reference level.  
0000  
0001  
0002  
4dB  
0dB  
j20dB  
MONIL OUT  
LV  
0000  
0001  
0002  
4dB  
0dB  
j20dB  
CH1 IN LV  
701*1  
For selecting the audio input (CH2) reference  
level.  
711  
For selecting the audio monitor output (Rch)  
reference level.  
0000  
0001  
0002  
4dB  
0dB  
j20dB  
MONIR OUT  
LV  
0000  
0001  
0002  
4dB  
0dB  
j20dB  
CH2 IN LV  
702*1  
For selecting the audio input (CH3) reference  
level.  
712  
For selecting the audio monitor output UNITY  
or VARIABLE level.  
0000  
0001  
0002  
4dB  
0dB  
j20dB  
MONI OUT  
0000  
UNITY  
:
The signals are output at a  
fixed level.  
The signal output is coupled  
with the headphones volume  
control.  
CH3 IN LV  
0001  
VAR  
:
703*1  
For selecting the audio input (CH4) reference  
level.  
0000  
0001  
0002  
713*1  
For selecting the CH1 input signal.  
0000 INT SG  
0001  
4dB  
0dB  
j20dB  
CH4 IN LV  
:
:
The internal signal is selected.  
Digital input signals are  
selected.  
Analog input signals are  
selected.  
DIGI  
CH1 IN SEL  
704*1  
For selecting the CUE input reference level.  
0002  
ANA  
:
0000  
0001  
0002  
0003  
4dB  
0dB  
j20dB  
j60dB  
CUE IN LV  
<Note>  
When DIGI has been selected, whether serial or AES is  
selected for the input is determined by the setting  
selected for setup menu item No.721 (D IN SEL 12).  
705  
For selecting the audio output (CH1)  
reference level.  
0000  
0001  
0002  
714*1  
For selecting the CH2 input signal.  
0000 INT SG  
0001  
CH1 OUT LV  
4dB  
0dB  
j20dB  
:
:
The internal signal is selected.  
Digital input signals are  
selected.  
DIGI  
CH2 IN SEL  
0002  
ANA  
:
Analog input signals are  
selected.  
706  
For selecting the audio output (CH2)  
reference level.  
<Note>  
CH2 OUT LV  
0000  
0001  
0002  
4dB  
0dB  
j20dB  
When DIGI has been selected, whether serial or AES is  
selected for the input is determined by the setting  
selected for setup menu item No.721 (D IN SEL 12).  
707  
For selecting the audio output (CH3)  
reference level.  
715*1  
For selecting the CH3 input signal.  
0000 INT SG  
:
:
The internal signal is selected.  
Digital input signals are  
selected.  
CH3 OUT LV  
0000  
0001  
0002  
4dB  
0dB  
j20dB  
0001  
DIGI  
CH3 IN SEL  
0002  
ANA  
:
Analog input signals are  
selected.  
708  
For selecting the audio output (CH4)  
reference level.  
<Note>  
CH4 OUT LV  
0000  
0001  
0002  
4dB  
0dB  
j20dB  
When DIGI has been selected, whether serial or AES is  
selected for the input is determined by the setting  
selected for setup menu item No.722 (D IN SEL 34).  
716*1  
For selecting the CH4 input signal.  
709  
For selecting the CUE output reference level.  
0000 INT SG  
:
:
The internal signal is selected.  
Digital input signals are  
selected.  
0000  
0001  
0002  
4dB  
0dB  
j20dB  
0001  
DIGI  
CH4 IN SEL  
CUE OUT LV  
0002  
ANA  
:
Analog input signals are  
selected.  
<Note>  
When DIGI has been selected, whether serial or AES is  
selected for the input is determined by the setting  
selected for setup menu item No.722 (D IN SEL 34).  
*1: This item is not displayed when the 23/24 Hz or 25 Hz (HD or  
SD) mode has been selected as the system menu item No.25  
(SYSTEM FREQ) setting.  
The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup menus  
(continued)  
<AUDIO>  
No./Item  
Description of setting  
For selecting the CH5 input signal.  
No./Item  
725*1  
Description of setting  
717*1  
For selecting the input signals to be recorded  
on the audio CH1 track.  
0000 INT SG  
:
:
The internal signal is selected.  
Digital input signals are  
selected.  
0001  
DIGI  
0000  
0001  
0002  
0003  
0004  
CH1  
CH2  
CH3  
CH4  
:
:
:
:
:
Audio input CH1 signals  
Audio input CH2 signals  
Audio input CH3 signals  
Audio input CH4 signals  
Audio input CH1 and CH2  
mixed signals  
CH5 IN SEL  
REC CH1  
0002  
ANA  
:
Analog input signals are  
selected.  
(CH1 input)  
CH1+2  
<Note>  
When DIGI has been selected, whether serial or AES is  
selected for the input is determined by the setting  
selected for setup menu item No.723 (D IN SEL 56).  
0005  
CH3+4  
:
Audio input CH3 and CH4  
mixed signals  
726*1  
For selecting the input signals to be recorded  
on the audio CH2 track.  
718*1  
For selecting the CH6 input signal.  
0000 INT SG  
:
:
The internal signal is selected.  
Digital input signals are  
selected.  
0000  
0001  
0002  
0003  
0004  
CH1  
CH2  
CH3  
CH4  
:
:
:
:
:
Audio input CH1 signals  
Audio input CH2 signals  
Audio input CH3 signals  
Audio input CH4 signals  
Audio input CH1 and CH2  
mixed signals  
REC CH2  
0001  
DIGI  
CH6 IN SEL  
0002  
ANA  
:
Analog input signals are  
selected.  
CH1+2  
(CH2 input)  
<Note>  
0005  
CH3+4  
:
Audio input CH3 and CH4  
mixed signals  
When DIGI has been selected, whether serial or AES is  
selected for the input is determined by the setting  
selected for setup menu item No.723 (D IN SEL 56).  
727*1  
For selecting the input signals to be recorded  
on the audio CH3 track.  
719*1  
For selecting the CH7 input signal.  
0000  
0001  
0002  
0003  
0004  
CH1  
CH2  
CH3  
CH4  
CH1+2  
:
:
:
:
:
Audio input CH1 signals  
Audio input CH2 signals  
Audio input CH3 signals  
Audio input CH4 signals  
Audio input CH1 and CH2  
mixed signals  
REC CH3  
0000 INT SG  
:
:
The internal signal is selected.  
Digital input signals are  
selected.  
Analog input signals are  
selected.  
0001  
DIGI  
CH7 IN SEL  
0002  
ANA  
:
(CH3 input)  
0005  
CH3+4  
:
Audio input CH3 and CH4  
mixed signals  
<Note>  
When DIGI has been selected, whether serial or AES is  
selected for the input is determined by the setting  
selected for setup menu item No.724 (D IN SEL 78).  
728*1  
For selecting the input signals to be recorded  
on the audio CH4 track.  
720*1  
For selecting the CH8 input signal.  
0000 INT SG  
0000  
0001  
0002  
0003  
0004  
CH1  
CH2  
CH3  
CH4  
CH1+2  
:
:
:
:
:
Audio input CH1 signals  
Audio input CH2 signals  
Audio input CH3 signals  
Audio input CH4 signals  
Audio input CH1 and CH2  
mixed signals  
REC CH4  
:
:
The internal signal is selected.  
Digital input signals are  
selected.  
Analog input signals are  
selected.  
0001  
DIGI  
CH8 IN SEL  
0002  
ANA  
:
(CH4 input)  
0005  
CH3+4  
:
Audio input CH3 and CH4  
mixed signals  
<Note>  
When DIGI has been selected, whether serial or AES is  
selected for the input is determined by the setting  
selected for setup menu item No.724 (D IN SEL 78).  
729*1  
For selecting the input signals to be recorded  
on the audio CH5 track.  
0000  
0001  
0002  
0003  
0004  
CH5  
CH6  
CH7  
CH8  
:
:
:
:
:
Audio input CH5 signals  
Audio input CH6 signals  
Audio input CH7 signals  
Audio input CH8 signals  
Audio input CH5 and CH6  
mixed signals  
REC CH5  
721*1  
For selecting the CH1 and CH2 digital input  
signals.  
0000  
0001  
AES  
SDI  
:
:
AES/EBU  
Serial  
D IN SEL12  
CH5+6  
722*1  
For selecting the CH3 and CH4 digital input  
signals.  
0005  
CH7+8  
:
Audio input CH7 and CH8  
mixed signals  
0000  
0001  
AES  
SDI  
:
:
AES/EBU  
Serial  
D IN SEL34  
723*1  
For selecting the CH5 and CH6 digital input  
signals.  
0000  
0001  
AES  
SDI  
:
:
AES/EBU  
Serial  
D IN SEL56  
724*1  
For selecting the CH7 and CH8 digital input  
signals.  
*1: This item is not displayed when the 23/24 Hz or 25 Hz (HD or  
SD) mode has been selected as the system menu item No.25  
(SYSTEM FREQ) setting.  
0000  
0001  
AES  
SDI  
:
:
AES/EBU  
Serial  
D IN SEL78  
The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup menus  
(continued)  
<AUDIO>  
No./Item  
Description of setting  
No./Item  
734*1  
Description of setting  
730*1  
For selecting the input signals to be recorded  
on the audio CH6 track.  
For selecting how to process the audio edit  
points (IN points and OUT points) during  
playback.  
0000  
0001  
0002  
0003  
0004  
CH5  
CH6  
CH7  
CH8  
:
:
:
:
:
Audio input CH5 signals  
Audio input CH6 signals  
Audio input CH7 signals  
Audio input CH8 signals  
Audio input CH5 and CH6  
mixed signals  
REC CH6  
PB FADE  
0000  
AUTO  
:
The status established during  
recording is followed.  
Forcibly cut  
0001  
0002  
CUT  
:
:
CH5+6  
FADE  
Forcibly faded  
735  
For selecting whether to superimpose the  
audio data on the HD serial output.  
0005  
CH7+8  
:
Audio input CH7 and CH8  
mixed signals  
HD EMBD  
AUD  
0000  
OFF  
:
The  
superimposed.  
The audio data is superimposed.  
audio  
data  
is  
not  
731*1  
For selecting the input signals to be recorded  
on the audio CH7 track.  
0001  
ON:  
0000  
0001  
0002  
0003  
0004  
CH5  
CH6  
CH7  
CH8  
CH5+6  
:
:
:
:
:
Audio input CH5 signals  
Audio input CH6 signals  
Audio input CH7 signals  
Audio input CH8 signals  
Audio input CH5 and CH6  
mixed signals  
REC CH7  
736  
For selecting whether to superimpose the  
audio data on the SD serial output.  
SD EMBD AUD  
0000  
OFF  
:
The  
superimposed.  
The audio data is superimposed.  
audio  
data  
is  
not  
0001  
ON:  
737  
For selecting the mixed signals for the  
headphone monitor (Lch and/or Rch).  
0005  
CH7+8  
:
Audio input CH7 and CH8  
mixed signals  
MONI MIX  
0000  
OFF  
:
Neither the Lch nor Rch signals  
are mixed.  
732*1  
For selecting the input signals to be recorded  
on the audio CH8 track.  
0001  
0002  
0003  
L
R
L/R  
:
:
:
Only the Lch signals are mixed.  
Only the Rch signals are mixed.  
Both the Lch and Rch signals  
are mixed.  
0000  
0001  
0002  
0003  
0004  
CH5  
CH6  
CH7  
CH8  
CH5+6  
:
:
:
:
:
Audio input CH5 signals  
Audio input CH6 signals  
Audio input CH7 signals  
Audio input CH8 signals  
Audio input CH5 and CH6  
mixed signals  
REC CH8  
<Notes>  
•
At the OFF setting, the signals to be output to monitor  
L (or monitor R) are switched to CH1, CH2, CH3 and  
so on each time the “L” or “R” button is pressed. The  
selected signals are displayed below the audio level  
meter.  
0005  
CH7+8  
:
Audio input CH7 and CH8  
mixed signals  
733*1  
For selecting the input signals to be recorded  
on the CUE track.  
•
At the L, R or L/R setting, the signals of a multiple  
number of channels can be mixed and output. When  
the number key corresponding to the channel whose  
signals are to be monitored is pressed while the “L”  
(or “R”) button is held down, that channel is selected.  
The selected channel is displayed below the audio  
level meter. (Alternatively, the same steps can be  
taken to de-select a channel which has already been  
selected.) However, only up to 2 channels among the  
CH1-CH4 channels and up to 2 channels among the  
CH5 to CH8 channels can be selected.  
0000  
0001  
0002  
0003  
0004  
0005  
0006  
0007  
0008  
0009  
CUE  
CH1  
CH2  
CH3  
CH4  
CH5  
CH6  
CH7  
CH8  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
CUE IN  
REC CUE  
Audio input CH1 signals  
Audio input CH2 signals  
Audio input CH3 signals  
Audio input CH4 signals  
Audio input CH5 signals  
Audio input CH6 signals  
Audio input CH7 signals  
Audio input CH8 signals  
738  
For selecting the CH1 output status of the  
main signal line in the search mode.  
CH1+2  
Audio input CH1 and CH2 mixed signals  
0010  
Audio input CH3 and CH4 mixed signals  
0011  
Audio input CH5 and CH6 mixed signals  
0012  
Audio input CH7 and CH8 mixed signals  
0013 CH1j8  
CH1 CUE SEL  
0000  
OFF:  
CH3+4:  
The CUE signal is not output.  
0001  
ON:  
CH5+6:  
The CUE signal is output.  
<Note>  
For details on the audio output statuses, refer to “Audio  
outputs in the search mode” on page 103.  
CH7+8:  
:
Audio input CH1 to CH8 mixed signals  
*1: This item is not displayed when the 23/24 Hz or 25 Hz (HD or  
SD) mode has been selected as the system menu item No.25  
(SYSTEM FREQ) setting.  
The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup menus  
(continued)  
<AUDIO>  
No./Item  
Description of setting  
No./Item  
745  
Description of setting  
739  
For selecting the CH2 output status of the  
main signal line in the search mode.  
For selecting the CH8 output status of the  
main signal line in the search mode.  
CH2 CUE SEL  
0000  
OFF  
:
CH8 CUE SEL  
0000  
OFF:  
The CUE signal is not output.  
The CUE signal is not output.  
0001  
ON  
:
0001  
ON:  
The CUE signal is output.  
<Note>  
The CUE signal is output.  
<Note>  
For details on the audio output statuses, refer to “Audio  
outputs in the search mode” on page 103.  
For details on the audio output statuses, refer to “Audio  
outputs in the search mode” on page 103.  
740  
For selecting the CH3 output status of the  
main signal line in the search mode.  
746  
For selecting the monitor output.  
0000  
MANU:  
CH3 CUE SEL  
0000  
OFF  
:
MONI CH SEL  
The signal selected by the MONITOR SELECT  
button is output.  
The CUE signal is not output.  
0001  
ON  
:
0001  
AUTO:  
The PCM audio signal is output in the j1.0k  
to i2.0k speed range; the CUE signal is  
automatically output at all other speeds.  
The CUE signal is output.  
<Note>  
For details on the audio output statuses, refer to “Audio  
outputs in the search mode” on page 103.  
0002  
PCM:  
The PCM audio signal is output in the j32k to  
i32k speed range.  
<Notes>  
When “AUTO” is selected and a tape in any format  
except DVCPRO HD-LP is played back, the PCM  
741  
For selecting the CH4 output status of the  
main signal line in the search mode.  
CH4 CUE SEL  
0000  
OFF:  
•
The CUE signal is not output.  
0001  
ON:  
audio signals are output in the -1.0 to +1.1 speed  
k
k
The CUE signal is output.  
range.  
<Note>  
•
This setting takes effect when the L and R MONITOR  
SELECT switches on the VTR’s front panel have  
selected a channel from CH1 to CH8.  
For details on the audio output statuses, refer to “Audio  
outputs in the search mode” on page 103.  
(If they have selected CUE, the CUE signal is output  
at all speeds regardless of this menu item’s setting.)  
742  
For selecting the CH5 output status of the  
main signal line in the search mode.  
747  
For selecting the channel for the monitor  
output to be switched to CUE.  
CH5 CUE SEL  
0000  
OFF:  
The CUE signal is not output.  
MON AUTO  
SEL  
When a setting other than “MANU” has been  
selected for setup menu item No.746 (MONI CH  
SEL), the CUE signal is automatically output to  
the monitor output in accordance with the  
operation mode, and the monitor channel to be  
switched to CUE is selected automatically.  
0001  
ON:  
The CUE signal is output.  
<Note>  
For details on the audio output statuses, refer to “Audio  
outputs in the search mode” on page 103.  
743  
For selecting the CH6 output status of the  
main signal line in the search mode.  
0000  
The CUE signal is not output.  
0001  
0000  
0001  
0002  
L/R  
:
:
:
The CUE signal is output both  
to the Lch and Rch.  
The CUE signal is output to the  
CH6 CUE SEL  
OFF:  
L
Lch only  
.
ON:  
R
The CUE signal is output to the  
Rch only.  
The CUE signal is output.  
<Note>  
For details on the audio output statuses, refer to “Audio  
outputs in the search mode” on page 103.  
748  
For selecting whether to enable or inhibit the  
operation of the MONITOR SELECT button on  
MONI SEL INH the front panel.  
744  
For selecting the CH7 output status of the  
main signal line in the search mode.  
0000  
0001  
0002  
OFF  
:
:
:
The button’s operation is  
enabled.  
The button’s operation is  
inhibited.  
CH7 CUE SEL  
0000  
OFF:  
ON  
The CUE signal is not output.  
0001  
ON:  
ON1  
In the FULL display mode,  
operation is prohibited; in the  
FINE display mode only,  
operation is enabled.  
The CUE signal is output.  
<Note>  
For details on the audio output statuses, refer to “Audio  
outputs in the search mode” on page 103.  
<Note>  
Whether to enable or inhibit the button’s operation can  
be selected for channels whose signals have not been  
mixed by the setup menu item No.737 (MONI MIX)  
setting.  
The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup menus  
(continued)  
<AUDIO>  
No./Item  
Description of setting  
No./Item  
757  
Description of setting  
749*1  
For selecting whether the playback level  
adjustment controls are to function in the EE  
mode when INT SG has been selected on the  
<AUDIO> function menu.  
For selecting the audio CH4 signal to be  
superimposed onto the SD SDI output  
SD SDI CH4  
SL  
0000  
0001  
0002  
0003  
0004  
0005  
0006  
0007  
CH1  
CH2  
CH3  
CH4  
CH5  
CH6  
CH7  
CH8  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
The CH1 signal is output.  
The CH2 signal is output.  
The CH3 signal is output.  
The CH4 signal is output.  
The CH5 signal is output.  
The CH6 signal is output.  
The CH7 signal is output.  
The CH8 signal is output.  
AUDIO PB VR  
0000  
DIS  
:
The INT SG output level is fixed  
at the UNITY level.  
0001  
ENA  
:
The INT SG output level can be  
varied using the playback level  
adjustment controls.  
750  
For selecting the signal to be output to analog  
output CH1.  
758  
For selecting how to process the digital audio  
output slow signals in the JOG, VAR or SHTL  
mode.  
0000  
0001  
CH1  
:
The CH1 signal is output  
.
ANA CH1 SEL  
JOG PROC  
CH5  
:
The CH5 signal is output  
0000  
OFF:  
751  
For selecting the signal to be output to analog  
output CH2.  
The sound without having the digital audio  
output slow signals processed is output even  
when the STILL mode is established.  
0000  
0001  
CH2  
CH6  
:
:
The CH2 signal is output  
The CH6 signal is output  
.
.
ANA CH2 SEL  
0001  
ON:  
752  
For selecting the signal to be output to analog  
output CH3.  
The sound after having the digital audio output  
slow signals processed is output.  
0000  
0001  
CH3  
CH7  
:
:
The CH3 signal is output  
The CH7 signal is output  
.
.
ANA CH3 SEL  
759  
For selecting the audio output level during DV  
format playback.  
753  
For selecting the signal to be output to analog  
output CH4.  
DV PB ATT  
0000  
OFF:  
The audio output level is not attenuated.  
0000  
0001  
CH4  
CH8  
:
:
The CH4 signal is output  
The CH8 signal is output  
.
.
ANA CH4 SEL  
0001  
ON:  
The audio output level is attenuated.  
754  
For selecting the audio CH1 signal to be  
superimposed onto the SD SDI output.  
760*1  
For selecting whether to mute the sound at  
the joins between recordings during DV or  
DVCAM format playback.  
SD SDI CH1  
SL  
0000  
0001  
0002  
0003  
0004  
0005  
0006  
0007  
CH1  
CH2  
CH3  
CH4  
CH5  
CH6  
CH7  
CH8  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
The CH1 signal is output.  
The CH2 signal is output.  
The CH3 signal is output.  
The CH4 signal is output.  
The CH5 signal is output.  
The CH6 signal is output.  
The CH7 signal is output.  
The CH8 signal is output.  
REC PT MUTE  
0000  
OFF  
:
The sound is not muted.  
0001  
ON  
:
The sound is muted.  
761*1  
For selecting the type of internal signal.  
0000  
0001 SILNCE  
TONE  
:
A sine wave signal is selected.  
A silent signal is selected.  
:
AUDIO INT SG  
762  
This item enables signals to be recorded and  
played back without passing them through  
the rate converter in the audio input/output  
section (without engaging the digital filter).  
755  
For selecting the audio CH2 signal to be  
superimposed onto the SD SDI output  
AUD RATE  
CON  
SD SDI CH2  
SL  
0000  
0001  
0002  
0003  
0004  
0005  
0006  
0007  
CH1  
CH2  
CH3  
CH4  
CH5  
CH6  
CH7  
CH8  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
The CH1 signal is output.  
The CH2 signal is output.  
The CH3 signal is output.  
The CH4 signal is output.  
The CH5 signal is output.  
The CH6 signal is output.  
The CH7 signal is output.  
The CH8 signal is output.  
0000  
OFF:  
The signals are recorded and played back  
without passing them through the rate  
converter.  
0001  
ON:  
The signals are recorded and played back after  
passing them through the rate converter.  
<Notes>  
756  
For selecting the audio CH3 signal to be  
superimposed onto the SD SDI output  
•
•
•
ON/OFF control is exercised at the same time for  
both recording and playback. It cannot be set  
differently for recording or playback.  
SD SDI CH3  
SL  
0000  
0001  
0002  
0003  
0004  
0005  
0006  
0007  
CH1  
CH2  
CH3  
CH4  
CH5  
CH6  
CH7  
CH8  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
The CH1 signal is output.  
The CH2 signal is output.  
The CH3 signal is output.  
The CH4 signal is output.  
The CH5 signal is output.  
The CH6 signal is output.  
The CH7 signal is output.  
The CH8 signal is output.  
ON/OFF control is exercised at the same time for  
CH1 to CH8.  
ON or OFF cannot be set  
independently for each channel.  
When the rate converter is set to OFF, the video input  
signals and AES (EBU) input signals must be  
synchronized. Moreover, the video input signals and  
reference signal selected by OUT REF must also be  
synchronized. (Noise may occur if these signals are  
not synchronized.)  
•
In the 60 Hz mode, noise may occur if OFF is set for  
the rate converter.  
*1: This item is not displayed when the 23/24 Hz or 25 Hz (HD or  
SD) mode has been selected as the system menu item No.25  
(SYSTEM FREQ) setting.  
The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup menus  
(continued)  
<AUDIO>  
No./Item  
Description of setting  
No./Item  
791  
CUE PB VOL  
Description of setting  
763  
For selecting the scale display of the audio  
level meter.  
0000 PEAK_0:  
For adjusting the playback level of the CUE  
audio signal.  
j¶  
i
(
to 0 dB to 12 dB)  
METER  
SCALE  
[The audio level is displayed with 0 dB as the  
maximum level.  
0032  
:
0016  
:
16  
:
0
(This menu is  
not displayed for  
AJ-HD1700E.)  
0001  
REF_0  
:
The audio level is displayed with 0 dB as the  
reference level.  
:
0000  
j
16  
790*5  
For adjusting the recording level of the CUE  
audio signal.  
j¶  
i
(
to 0 dB to 12 dB)  
CUE REC VOL  
0032  
:
0016  
:
16  
:
0
<Note>  
This item is not displayed  
when the 23/24 Hz mode has  
been selected as the system  
menu item No.25 (SYSTEM  
FREQ) setting.  
:
0000  
j
16  
The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.  
Audio outputs in the search mode  
The table below lists the signals which are output to the monitor and main signal line and which are determined by how the settings of menu  
items No.738 to No.745, and No.746 and No.747 are combined.  
738 CH1 CUE SEL:  
746  
MONI CH  
SEL  
747  
MON AUTO  
SEL  
Monitor output  
Main signal line output  
:
Lch  
Rch  
CH1/CH3/CH5/CH7  
CH2/CH4/CH6/CH8  
745 CH8 CUE SEL  
L/R  
L
PC*1  
PCM*1  
MANU  
AUTO  
PCM  
R
PCM*1  
PCM*1  
CUE*2  
CUE*2  
PCM*1  
CUE*2  
PCM*1  
CUE*2  
L/R  
L
OFF  
R
L/R  
L
PCM*3  
PCM*1  
PCM*3  
PCM*1  
PCM*4  
PCM*1  
PCM*4  
PCM*1  
R
L/R  
L
MANU  
AUTO  
PCM  
R
CUE*2  
CUE*2  
PCM*1  
CUE*2  
PCM*1  
CUE*2  
CUE*2  
CUE*2  
PCM*1  
CUE*2  
PCM*1  
CUE*2  
PCM*3  
PCM*4  
PCM*3  
L/R  
L
ON  
R
L/R  
L
PCM*3  
PCM*4  
PCM*3  
PCM*3  
R
<Notes>  
*1: The PCM audio output is muted if the tape is played back at a *3: During fast forwarding or rewinding, the CUE signal is output  
speed in the j1.0k to i2.0k range (or at a speed in the j1.0k  
automatically.  
to i1.1k range for a format other than DVCPRO HD-LP).  
*4: During fast forwarding or rewinding, this signal is muted.  
*2: In the case of the CUE audio output, the PCM signals are output *5: This item is not displayed when the 23/24 Hz mode or 25 Hz (HD  
if the tape is played back at a speed in thejj1.0k to i2.0k  
range (or at a speed in the -1.0k to +1.1k range for a format  
other than DVCPRO HD-LP).  
or SD) mode has been selected as the system menu item No.25  
(SYSTEM FREQ) setting.  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup menus  
<MENU>  
No./Item  
Description of setting  
A02  
C
This VTR is equipped with VTR MEMORY  
for storing the current settings (*1) and VTR  
P. ON LOAD  
1
4
MEMORY  
MEMORY  
MEMORY  
MEMORY  
to  
for backing up VTR  
C
.
The data of a selected VTR  
can be loaded into VTR  
and operation started on the  
1
4
to  
C
basis of this data when the power is turned  
on.  
0000  
OFF:  
Operation is started using the previous  
settings.  
0001 USER1  
The VTR MEMORY  
:
1
data is loaded and  
operation started on the basis of this data.  
0002 USER2  
The VTR MEMORY  
:
2
data is loaded and  
operation started on the basis of this data.  
0003 USER3  
The VTR MEMORY  
:
3
data is loaded and  
operation started on the basis of this data.  
*1: The term “settings” here denotes all the settings of the setup  
menus, what is registered in the PF1/PF2 menus, and the  
contents of some of the function buttons.  
0004 USER4  
The VTR MEMORY  
:
4
data is loaded and  
operation started on the basis of this data.  
The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.  
<Connections with Dolby-E* components>  
When the VTR is to be connected to a Dolby-E encoder/decoder for recording or playing back Dolby-E data, set  
the audio input and output levels to UNITY, and select the following setup menu item settings.  
No.303 AUD EDIT IN = CUT  
No.304 AUD EDIT OUT = CUT  
No.725 REC CH1 = CH1  
No.726 REC CH2 = CH2  
No.727 REC CH3 = CH3  
No.728 REC CH4 = CH4  
No.729 REC CH5 = CH5  
No.730 REC CH6 = CH6  
No.731 REC CH7 = CH7  
No.732 REC CH8 = CH8  
No.734 PB FADE = CUT  
No.758 JOG PROC = OFF  
No.762 AUD RATE CON = OFF  
<Notes>  
• Dolby-E data cannot be recorded or played back in  
the 60 Hz mode.  
• Adjust the timing with the video signals to cover the  
time taken by the Dolby-E component for  
encoding/decoding outside the VTR.  
• Set the bit depth of the Dolby-E encoder/decoder to  
16 bits.  
• Noise will be output from the ANALOG AUDIO OUT  
connectors of the channels through which the  
Dolby-E data is passing.  
• The audio level meter will deflect beyond the range  
of its markings for those channels through which  
the Dolby-E data is passing.  
• Noise will be output when a tape on which Dolby-E  
data has been recorded is played back in the JOG  
or VAR mode.  
* Dolby and the Double D symbol Î are trademarks of  
Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.  
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup menus  
<How to switch the system frequency>  
Follow the steps below to switch the system frequency (59/60 Hz, 50 Hz, 23/24 Hz, 25 Hz (HD) or 25 Hz(SD)).  
Following the procedure for the <SETUP  
MENU/SYSTEM MENU> (page 60) to change the  
system menu item No.25 (SYSTEM FREQ) setting.  
To cancel the setting entered in step 2, press the  
1
2
4
C
F
button while holding down the  
button.  
The above message is cleared, and after the  
changed setting has been restored to the original  
system menu No.25 (SYSTEM FREQ) setting,  
operation returns to the SYSTEM menu operation  
screen.  
F5  
Press  
function menu shown on the time code display area  
has been cleared, the following message  
(SET) to enter the setting, and after the  
>
appears.  
<Note>  
If the system menu No.25 (SYSTEM FREQ) setting  
has been changed while a cassette is inserted in the  
VTR, the cassette is automatically ejected.  
The same procedure as above is also followed when  
the system menu No.25 (SYSTEM FREQ) setting has  
been changed by loading the data from an IC card in  
accordance with the <CARD> procedure (page 69).  
Note that even if the change being made to the system  
SHIFT  
F1  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
To make the setting entered in step 2 valid, press menu item No. 25 setting is cancelled, other system  
3
ENT  
F
the  
button while holding down the  
button.  
menu items affected by the change will be updated, as  
The system is restarted, and the VTR starts will the associated file names.  
operating in the selected mode.  
<Selecting the recording/playback format and sync signals which support the  
operation mode>  
No.25  
SYSTEM  
FREQ  
Format enabling recording  
Format enabling playback  
1080/59.94i (HD_LP, HD_SP)  
1080/60i (HD_LP, HD_SP)  
720/59.94p (HD_LP, HD_SP)  
720/60.00p (HD_LP, HD_SP)  
480/59.94p (480p)  
Sync signals  
HD_REF (59.94Hz, 60Hz)  
SD_REF (59.94Hz)  
1080/59.94i (HD_LP)  
1080/60.00i (HD_LP)  
720/59.94p (HD_LP)  
720/60.00p (HD_LP)  
50/60  
The setting selected for setup menu  
item No.031 (OUT REF) applies.  
480/59.94i (422, 411, DV, DVCAM)  
HD_REF (50Hz)  
SD_REF (50Hz)  
1080/50i (HD_LP, HD_SP)  
576/50i (422, 411, DV, DVCAM)  
576/25p over 50i (422, 411, DV)  
50  
1080/50i (HD_LP)  
None  
The setting selected for setup menu  
item No.031 (OUT REF) applies.  
720/23.98p over 59.94p (HD_SP/HD_SP)  
720/24p over 60.00p (HD_SP/HD_SP)  
480/23.98p over 59.94i [2:3 mode]  
23/24  
HD_REF (47.96Hz, 48Hz)  
480/23.98p over 59.94i [2:3:3:2 advance mode]  
HD_REF (50Hz)  
SD_REF (50Hz)  
25 (HD) None  
720/25p over 60p  
720/25p over 60p  
The setting selected for setup menu  
item No.031 (OUT REF) applies.  
25 (SD) None  
SD_REF (50Hz)  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup menus  
<Menu management accompanying switching the system frequency>  
The system menu and setup menu have some items whose settings differ and other items with which no  
selection options are displayed and whose settings are fixed (indicated by the shading in the table below),  
depending on the switching of the operation mode in response to the setting selected for system menu item  
No.25 (SYSTEM FREQ). (Refer to the table below.)  
System menu and setup menu settings  
<50P IN/OUT> 50-pin connector registration  
• Each of the items whose settings differ is saved in • When the items whose settings differ have been  
the VTR MEMORY (current file and one of the  
backup files 1 to 4). The settings that correspond to  
each operation mode will be displayed so that the  
settings can be performed for each operation mode.  
registered in the <50P IN/OUT> 50-pin connector  
pins, the settings corresponding to the operation  
modes are allocated to the IN and OUT pins on the  
basis of the setting numbers. However, when the  
upper limit value is exceeded, the value will be  
limited to this upper limit.  
What has been registered is saved, but bear in mind  
that when the data is registered again, it is saved by  
overwriting the existing data so that the previously  
registered data will be lost.  
Registration of the <PF1> and <PF2> function  
buttons  
• When the items whose settings differ have been  
registered in the <PF1> and <PF2> function buttons,  
the settings that correspond to each operation mode  
will be displayed so that the settings can be performed • If items, whose selection options are not displayed  
for each operation mode.  
due to the operation mode, have been registered in  
the <50P IN/OUT> 50-pin connector, when an  
operation mode in which these options are not  
displayed is selected, what has been registered is  
saved but no operation is possible. Bear in mind,  
however, that when the data is registered again, it is  
saved by overwriting the existing data so that the  
previously registered data will be lost.  
• If items, whose selection options are not displayed due  
to the operation mode, have been registered in the  
<PF1> or <PF2> function button, when an operation  
mode in which these options are not displayed is  
selected, what has been registered is saved but the  
function button itself will become blank and cannot be  
operated. Bear in mind, however, that when the data is  
registered again, it is saved by overwriting the existing  
data so that the previously registered data will be lost  
.
System menu  
System menu No.25 (SYSTEM FREQ)  
No.  
Menu item  
COARSE  
59/60  
23/24  
50  
25 (HD)  
25 (SD)  
j
j
j
5H to 0H to 5H  
5H to 0H to 5H  
5H to 0H to 5H  
12  
14  
15  
SYS H (HD)  
j
j
j
1320 to 0 to 1320  
FINE  
1100 to 0 to 1100  
1375 to 0 to 1375  
j
j
115 to 0 to 115  
SYS SC (SD)  
VO SYS H (SD)  
108 to 0 to 108  
j
j
COARSE  
FINE  
5H to 0H to 5H  
858 to 0 to 858  
5H to 0H to 5H  
j
864 to 0 to 864  
j
j
j
COARSE  
FINE  
5H to 0H to 5H  
5H to 0H to 5H  
j
864 to 0 to 864  
16  
SD SYS D (SD)  
j
858 to 0 to 858  
Setup menus  
System menu No.25 (SYSTEM FREQ)  
No.  
Menu item  
59/60  
2F/4F  
23/24  
2F  
50  
25 (HD)  
2F  
25 (SD)  
2F  
109  
501  
502  
CAP.LOCK  
2F/4F/8F  
VITC POS-1  
VITC POS-2  
10L to 16L to 20L  
10L to 18L to 20L  
7L to 11L to 22L  
7L to 13L to 22L  
7L to 11L to 22L  
7L to 13L to 22L  
INTSG  
HDSDI  
SDTI  
INTSG  
HDSDI  
SDSDI  
600  
VIDEO IN SEL  
SDSDI  
The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.  
(Continued on next page)  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup menus  
Setup menus  
System menu No.25 (SYSTEM FREQ)  
No.  
Menu item  
59/60  
23/24  
50  
25 (HD)  
25 (SD)  
d12h  
24h  
002  
TAPE TIMER  
OFF  
ON  
004  
SYNCHRONIZE  
MANU  
AUTO  
Same as for  
59/60  
010  
012  
013  
014  
020  
MONI CONTROL  
REC ADJUST  
DET STOP  
0s to 3s to 5s  
OFF  
ON  
j
DET ADJUST  
SYS FORMAT  
8f to 0f to 3s10f  
1080i  
720p  
720p  
1080i  
720p  
60/24  
720p  
60/24  
59/23  
60/24  
Same as for  
59/60  
030  
031  
HD FREQUENCY  
OUT REF  
AUTO  
INPUT  
HD_REF  
SD_REF  
Same as for  
59/60  
HD_REF  
SD_REF  
S/F/R  
STOP  
105  
107  
111  
AUTO EE SEL  
EE MODE SEL  
MEMORY STOP  
NORMAL  
THRU  
OFF  
ON  
OFF  
ALL  
113  
REC INH  
PRE  
ALL  
ALL  
ALL  
NORMAL  
V/CTL  
REC  
OFF  
115  
118  
EJECT SW INH  
SP MODE INH  
OFF  
ON  
Same as for  
59/60  
OFF  
LOW  
HIGH  
135  
140  
141  
DET BEEP  
OUTPUT  
VOLUME  
EE  
TAPE  
TAPE  
PB  
TAPE  
PB  
TAPE  
PB  
REC  
PB  
AUTO  
IN  
142  
AUDIO UNITY  
OUT  
IN/OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
OUT  
CUT  
FADE  
303  
304  
306  
AUD EDIT IN  
AUD EDIT OUT  
CF ADJ SEL  
CUT  
FADE  
PLAYER  
RECORDER  
The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup menus  
Setup menus  
System menu No.25 (SYSTEM FREQ)  
No.  
320  
Menu item  
59/60  
23/24  
50  
25 (HD)  
25 (SD)  
EDIT RPLCE1  
EDIT RPLCE2  
EDIT RPLCE3  
EDIT RPLCE4  
EDIT RPLCEC  
N-DEF  
CH1  
CH2  
321  
322  
323  
324  
CH1+3  
BLANK  
THRU  
Same as for  
59/60  
500  
503  
504  
505  
VITC BLANK  
TCG MODE  
RUN MODE  
TCG REGEN  
BLANK  
PRE  
BLANK  
PRE  
REGEN  
PRE  
AUTO  
PRE  
REC  
FREE  
Same as for  
59/60  
TC&UB  
TC  
UB  
AS&IN  
ASSEM  
INSRT  
506  
507  
REGEN MODE  
TC SOURCE  
INT  
EXT_L  
SLTC  
SVITC  
508  
510  
BINARY GP  
000 to 111  
OFF  
ON  
TCG CF FLAG  
DF  
NDF  
511  
512  
516  
DF MODE  
NDF  
NDF  
NDF  
V OUT  
TC IN  
TC OUT REF  
TC OUT ADV  
OFF  
EDIT  
MOMENT  
LATCH  
517  
601  
602  
TCG OUT  
VIDEO INT SG  
SDI IN MODE  
100%CB to EQ  
DR OFF  
DR ON  
FIELD  
FRAME  
604  
605  
FREEZE SEL  
Same as for  
59/60  
OFF  
AUTO  
INTERPOLATE  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
FIT_V  
FIT_H  
FIT_HV  
14:9  
Same as for  
59/60  
620  
DOWNCON MODE  
13:9  
FIT_V  
FIT_H  
FIT_HV  
621  
624  
UPCON MODE  
U/C RESP H  
Same as for  
59/60  
STD  
NARROW  
The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.  
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setup menus  
Setup menus  
System menu No.25 (SYSTEM FREQ)  
No.  
Menu item  
59/60  
23/24  
50  
25 (HD)  
25 (SD)  
STD  
NARROW  
625  
U/C RESP V  
Same as for  
59/60  
Same as for  
59/60  
628  
629  
U/C ENH H  
U/C ENH V  
0 dB to +1 dB to 2 dB  
0 dB to +1 dB to 2 dB  
1080i  
720p  
1080i  
630  
631  
632  
633  
634  
635  
636  
637  
638  
1080i # HD OUT  
1080i # SD OUT  
720p # HD OUT  
720p # SD OUT  
480p # HD OUT  
480p # SD OUT  
480i # HD OUT  
480i # SD OUT  
IN U/C MODE  
480i  
- - -  
480p  
1080i  
720p  
720p  
- - -  
480i  
480p  
1080i  
720p  
- - -  
480p  
480p  
480i  
1080i  
720p  
- - -  
480i  
480i  
480p  
FIT_V  
FIT_H  
FIT_HV  
STD  
NARROW  
639  
640  
I U/C RESP H  
I U/C RESP V  
Same as for  
59/60  
STD  
NARROW  
641  
642  
I U/C ENH H  
I U/C ENH V  
0 dB to +1 dB to 2 dB  
0 dB to +1 dB to 2 dB  
Pb-Pr  
U-V  
651  
676  
680  
681  
682  
HUE STYLE  
Same as for  
59/60  
OFF  
ON  
BLK CLIP  
BLANK  
THRU  
CC (F1) BLANK  
CC (F2) BLANK  
BLANK  
BLANK  
BLANK  
BLANK  
BLANK  
BLANK  
BLANK  
THRU  
THRU  
ADD22  
ADD21  
ADD20  
(525 system VO SETUP (HD)  
only)  
Same as for  
59/60  
THRU  
ADD22  
ADD21  
ADD20  
683  
(525 system VO SETUP (SD)  
only)  
The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
109  
Setup menus  
Setup menus  
System menu No.25 (SYSTEM FREQ)  
No.  
Menu item  
59/60  
23/24  
50  
25 (HD)  
25 (SD)  
OFF  
ON  
686  
CCR MODE  
SDI INDEX O  
CC REC  
OFF  
ON  
Same as for  
59/60  
Same as for  
59/60  
687  
688  
OFF  
ON  
BLANK  
THRU  
695  
BLANK LINE  
MANU  
700  
701  
702  
703  
CH1 IN LV  
CH2 IN LV  
CH3 IN LV  
CH4 IN LV  
4dB  
0dB  
j
20dB  
4dB  
0dB  
704  
CUE IN LV  
j
20dB  
j
60dB  
713  
714  
715  
716  
717  
718  
719  
720  
721  
722  
723  
724  
725  
726  
727  
728  
729  
730  
731  
732  
733  
CH1 IN SEL  
CH2 IN SEL  
CH3 IN SEL  
CH4 IN SEL  
CH5 IN SEL  
CH6 IN SEL  
CH7 IN SEL  
CH8 IN SEL  
D IN SEL 12  
D IN SEL 34  
D IN SEL 56  
D IN SEL 78  
REC CH1  
INT SG  
DIGI  
ANA  
AES  
SDI  
Same as for  
59/60  
REC CH2  
i
i
CH1 to CH3  
4
REC CH3  
REC CH4  
REC CH5  
REC CH6  
CH5 to CH7  
8
REC CH7  
REC CH8  
j
REC CUE  
CUE to CH1  
8
AUTO  
CUT  
734  
PB FADE  
CUT  
CUT  
FADE  
DIS  
ENA  
749  
760  
AUDIO PB VR  
REC PT MUTE  
OFF  
ON  
TONE  
SILNCE  
761  
790  
AUDIO INT SG  
CUE REC VOL  
SILNCE  
SILNCE  
j
16 to 0 to 16  
The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
110  
Time code and user’s bit  
Time code  
Setting  
REC:  
RUN MD on the <TC> menu  
F5  
4
5
The time code is used when the time code signal  
generated by the time code generator (time code  
signal generator) is to be recorded on the tape, its  
values are to be read by the time code reader (time  
code signal reader), and the absolute position of the  
tape is to be displayed in increments of hours,  
minutes, seconds and frames.  
The time code is written in the sub-code area (data  
area) of the helical track. This enables insert editing  
to be conducted independently using the time code  
alone. In addition, the VTR’s playback speed can be  
read from the stop mode to the slow motion playback  
up to high-speed playback (approx. 50k normal  
speed or approx. 100k normal speed when using a  
DVCPRO tape).  
The time code advances simultaneously with the  
recording.  
FREE:  
The time code advances, like time, irrespective of  
the VTR operation.  
Setting  
REGEN:  
TCG MD on the <TC> menu  
F3  
The continuity of the underlying time code in place  
prior to editing is maintained.  
PRE:  
The time code can be preset using the operation  
panel controls or remote controller.  
AUTO:  
The time code is automatically switched to REGEN  
or PRE depending on the VTR’s operation mode:  
during editing, REGEN is selected; at all other  
times, PRE is selected.  
The time code values are indicated on the display and  
superimposed display.  
TCR 00 : 07 : 04 : 23  
t
t
t
t
Registering the TC preset values  
Display the <HOME> menu.  
<TC/UB>  
6
Hours Minutes Seconds Frames  
•
Preset (in the preset enable status)  
T
1When  
among the number keys is pressed,  
the TC display switches to TCG (UBG), and  
the TCG value characters (all digits) are  
highlighted.  
User’s bit  
The “user’s bit” refers to the 32-bit (8-digit) data frame  
among the time code signals which has been released  
to users. It enables operator numbers and other  
values to be recorded.  
T
2When  
is pressed again, one digit is  
highlighted, and the change enable status is  
established.  
3Input the desired value using the number  
keys. The entire input value can be cleared  
The alphanumerics which can be used for the user’s  
bit are number 0 to 9 and letters A to F.  
0
F
by pressing  
4To input the letters used with the user  
press the same number key (toggle by  
while holding down  
.
’
s bit,  
7
8
F
tapping  
or ) while holding down . To  
move from one digit to another, turn the ADJ  
dial.  
ENT  
5To enter the value, press the  
key.  
Setting the internal time code  
6When the display screen has been changed  
C
during the input process or if the  
button  
Set the VTR to the stop mode.  
1
has been pressed, the change enable status  
is released, and the setting is canceled.  
Set  
Set  
TC/CTL on the <HOME> menu to TC.  
F3  
2
3
<CTL>  
•
Reset  
Press  
(TC CLR).  
F4  
SOURCE on the <TC> menu to INT (for  
F1  
selecting the internal time code).  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Concerning the time code and user’s bit  
Setting the external time code  
Time code and user’s bit playback  
Set the VTR to the stop mode.  
Set the VTR to the stop mode.  
1
1
2
Set  
TC/CTL on the <HOME> menu to TC.  
Set  
UB.  
TC:  
TC/CTL on the <HOME> menu to TC or  
F3  
F3  
2
3
If the video input has been set to HD SDI input or  
INT SG, set TC SRC on the <TC> menu to  
The time code is displayed.  
UB:  
The user’s bit is displayed.  
• In the event that it has become impossible to  
read the time code, it is interpolated using the  
CTL signal.  
F1  
EXT-L, SLTC or SVITC.  
If the video input has been set to SD SDI (when  
the optional board has been installed), set  
SRC on the <TC> menu to EXT-L or VITC.  
4
TC  
F1  
Press the PLAY button. Playback starts, and the  
time code appears on the display.  
3
Cue time registration, preroll and  
cue-up  
If  
(SUPER) on the <TC SHIFT> menu is set to  
F1  
ON, the time code value is superimposed onto the  
video signals from the VIDEO OUT3 connector.  
(These functions work only on the HOME, PF1 and  
PF2 screens.)  
<Notes>  
• While a drop frame time code is being read, the  
colon between the seconds and frames is replaced  
with a period.  
• Registration  
SET  
Register the cue time by pressing the  
while holding down the  
button  
F
button.  
• If the time code signal is missing, it is interpolated  
automatically using the CTL signal.  
The following appears on the display.  
• Presetting  
T
When the  
button is pressed, the characters of  
the cue time or TC/UB display are highlighted.  
Turn the ADJ dial to highlight the characters of the  
cue time.  
The subsequent steps in the registration procedure  
are the same as for TCG.  
T ¢ R  
00:01:04:07¢  
“
”: 1st, 3rd field  
¢
An asterisk ( )  
appears here if the  
time code signal is  
missing.  
“¢”: 2nd, 4th fields  
• Prerolling  
Press the PREROLL button to preroll the tape to  
the currently registered CUE point.  
In the drop frame mode, the colon  
between the seconds and frames  
is replaced with a period. (In the  
59/60 Hz mode only)  
• Cue-up  
Press the PREROLL button while holding down the  
F
button to cue the tape up to the currently  
registered CUE point.  
112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Superimpose screen  
The control signals, time code, etc. are displayed on  
this screen using abbreviations.  
Display position  
The position of the characters superimposed on the  
display can be changed using  
(C HPOS) and  
F3  
F2  
(C VPOS) on the <TC SHIFT> menu and the ADJ  
dial.  
TV monitor  
TCR  
:
:
:
22 22 22 22  
TCR  
:
:
:
22 22 22 22  
TCR  
:
:
:
22 22 22 22  
Abbreviations  
CTL: Control signal count value  
TV monitor  
TV monitor  
TCR: Time code data recorded in the SBC area  
TCR.: Time code data recorded in the VAUX area  
UBR: User’s bit data recorded in the SBC area  
UBR.: User’s bit data recorded in the VAUX area  
TCG: Time code data of the time code generator  
UBG: User’s bit data of the time code generator  
Operation mode  
The VTR’s operation mode can also be displayed  
using  
(DISPLY) on the <TC SHIFT> menu.  
F4  
<Note>  
[T R], [T R.], [U R] or [U R.] is displayed when the  
2
2
2
2
data has not been read correctly from the tape.  
Characters displayed  
The background of the characters superimposed on  
the display screen can be changed using  
TYPE) on the <TC SHIFT> menu.  
TCR  
:
:
:
22 22 22 22  
STOP  
VTR operation mode  
(C  
F5  
TV monitor  
TCR  
:
:
:
TCR  
:
:
:
22 22 22 22  
22 22 22 22  
TV monitor  
TV monitor  
<Note>  
When the 23/24 Hz mode has been selected as the  
system menu item No.25 (SYSTEM FREQ) setting,  
the time code and other information superimposed on  
the MONITOR and VIDEO OUT3 connectors are not  
displayed.  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting the audio recording channels and monitor output  
Audio recording channels  
Monitor output channels  
When  
(M MIX) on the <AUDIO SHIFT2> menu is  
F6  
The audio channels can be selected as shown below  
using the AUDIO setup menu items.  
set to L, R or L/R, the signals of a multiple number of  
channels can be mixed and output.  
Recording  
Signals recorded  
track  
When the number key corresponding to the channel  
whose signals are to be monitored is pressed while  
the “L” (or “R”) button is held down, that channel is  
selected, and its signals are displayed on the audio  
level meter. (The same steps can also be taken to  
de-select a channel which has already been selected.)  
However, only up to 2 channels among the CH1-CH4  
channels and only up to 2 channels among the CH5-  
CH8 channels are selected.  
CH1 input, CH2 input, CH3 input, CH4 input,  
CH1+CH2 input, CH3+CH4 input  
CH1  
CH1 input, CH2 input, CH3 input, CH4 input,  
CH1+CH2 input, CH3+CH4 input  
CH2  
CH1 input, CH2 input, CH3 input, CH4 input,  
CH1+CH2 input, CH3+CH4 input  
CH3  
CH1 input, CH2 input, CH3 input, CH4 input,  
CH1+CH2 input, CH3+CH4 input  
CH4  
(Examples: CH1 + CH3 + CH5 + CH8 can be selected  
but CH1 + CH2 + CH4 cannot be selected.)  
CH5 input, CH6 input, CH7 input, CH8 input,  
CH5+CH6 input, CH7+CH8 input  
CH5  
CH5 input, CH6 input, CH7 input, CH8 input,  
CH5+CH6 input, CH7+CH8 input  
CH6  
CH5 input, CH6 input, CH7 input, CH8 input,  
CH5+CH6 input, CH7+CH8 input  
MONITOR SELECT switches  
CH7  
CH5 input, CH6 input, CH7 input, CH8 input,  
CH5+CH6 input, CH7+CH8 input  
EJECT  
CH8  
XL/L/M-cassette  
Do not insert S-cassette  
without adapter  
POWER OFF  
ON  
CH1  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CUE  
REMOTE  
50P  
CH CONDITION  
MONITOR FULL/FINE  
R
9P  
RS-232C  
CUE input, CH1 input, CH2 input, CH3 input, CH4  
input, CH5 input, CH6 input, CH7 input, CH8  
L
HEADPHONES  
SHTL  
REV  
JOG  
VAR  
ADJUST  
PUSH-INTER  
HOME  
RF1  
TC  
RF2  
CUE  
ASSEM  
INSERT  
VIDEO UNITY  
CUE  
input, CH1+CH2 input, CH3+CH4 input,  
AUDIO UNITY DIAG  
MENU  
FWD  
STAND BY PLAYER RECORDER INPUT CHECK  
CH5+CH6 input, CH7+CH8 input, CH1–CH8 input  
SHIFT  
F1  
DEF  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
SERVO  
PLAY  
REC INHIBIT  
REC  
ABC  
GHI  
9
EDIT  
REW  
AUDIO CH SELECT  
CH CH CH  
A
IN  
A
OUT  
7
JKL  
8
PREVIEW/  
REVIEW  
PRE-  
ROLL  
CH  
1
CH  
5
CH  
2
CH  
6
CH  
3
7
4
8
MNO PQRS  
4
5
6
3
T
BS  
ENT  
F
AUTO  
EDIT  
TUV WXYZ  
TRIM  
SET  
STOP  
FF  
1
0
2
PUSH  
LOCK  
IN  
OUT  
C
REC  
P8  
REC  
P8  
REC  
P8  
REC  
P8  
FULL  
FULL  
Number keys  
114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Display saving function  
This function is provided to extend the service life of the  
LCD monitor. It starts up if none of the front panel  
controls have been operated or the cassette tape has not  
been run at all for about 5 minutes.  
While the saving function is working, the LCD monitor  
display goes blank, and the “EX” symbol appears on the  
time code display area.  
To release the saving function, operate a button or dial  
on the front panel or issue a tape transport command  
from the controller. The operation performed to release  
the function will be executed after the function is  
released.  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Rack mounting  
The unit can be mounted into a 19-inch standard rack  
if the optional rack-mounting adapters (AJ-MA75P)  
are used. For the installation rails, it is recommended  
that the rail and bracket for 18-inch length (part  
number CC3061-99-0400) of Chassis Trak be used. If  
an even greater clearance is to be left between the  
VTR and rack when the VTR is pulled out, however, it  
is recommended that the 22-inch long Chassis Trak  
(part number CC-3001-99-0191) be used.  
Attach the outer member brackets to the rack.  
Check that the height is the same for the left and  
right brackets.  
2
Remove the four screws at the front used to attach  
the left and right side panels.  
3
4
Attach the AJ-MA75P rack-mounting adapters  
using the same four screws.  
(The complete slide rail and bracket unit is not  
available from Panasonic.)  
For further details, consult your dealer.  
Attach the inner members of the slide rails. Refer  
to the figure below for the positions where they are  
screwed into place.  
1
Positions where the right (R) inner  
member is screwed into place  
Rack-mounting adapters  
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
Remove the four rubber feet on the bottom panel  
of the VTR, and install the VTR in the rack.  
After the VTR has been installed, check that it  
moves smoothly along the rails.  
5
EIA standard rack  
Inner member (18-inch rail)  
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
Inner member (22-inch rail)  
Fasten to rack with the  
fixing screws.  
<Notes>  
• The length of the screws used is subject to a  
restriction.  
• Use screws which are less than 2/5q (10 mm)  
long.  
•
Attach the inner member at the same symmetrical  
positions on the left (L) side as well. Fix the  
members in place using 3 screws on each side  
(total: 6 screws). When using the 22-inch long slide  
rails, secure the screws at 4 locations.  
<CAUTIONS>  
• Keep the temperature inside the rack to between  
x
x
x
x
41 F and 104 F (5 C and 40 C).  
• Bolt the rack securely to the floor so that it will not  
topple over when the VTR is pulled out.  
• The letters shown in the figure are not actually  
marked on the side panels.  
116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Video head cleaning  
This VTR is equipped with an auto head cleaning  
function which automatically reduces the amount of  
dirt on the video heads. In order to maximize the  
VTR’s reliability, however, it is recommended that the  
video heads be cleaned as and when appropriate.  
For further details on how to actually clean the heads,  
consult with one of Panasonic’s service companies or  
with your dealer.  
Condensation  
Condensation occurs due to the same principle which  
is involved when droplets of water form on a window  
pane of a heated room. It occurs when the VTR or  
tape is moved between places where the temperature  
or humidity varies greatly or when, for instance:  
• It is moved to a very humid place full of steam or a  
room immediately after it has been heated up.  
• It is suddenly moved from a cold location to a hot or  
humid location.  
If condensation has formed on or in the VTR, the  
AUTO OFF lamp lights, and the cassette tape is  
automatically ejected. Keep the power supplied and  
simply wait until the AUTO OFF lamp goes off.  
It is recommended that the video heads be cleaned  
after the AUTO OFF lamp has gone off.  
After moving the VTR to such a location, leave it  
standing for about 10 minutes rather than switching on  
its power immediately.  
Maintenance  
Before proceeding with maintenance, be absolutely  
sure to set the power switch to OFF and take hold of  
the power plug and unplug it from the power outlet.  
Use a soft cloth to clean the cabinet. To remove  
stubborn dirt, dilute some kitchen detergent, dip a  
cloth into the solution, wring it out well, and wipe.  
After having removed the dirt, take up any remaining  
moisture using a dry cloth.  
<Note>  
Do not use alcohol, benzene, paint thinners or other  
solvents. They can discolor the external parts  
surfaces and remove the finish.  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error messages  
When a warning occurs in this VTR, the warning lamp  
lights up.  
∫Displaying the warning information  
• A warning message is displayed whenever a  
warning occurs (the warning lamp lights up). When  
no warnings have been detected, “NO WARNING”  
is displayed.  
• When a multiple number of warnings occur, the  
descriptions of each warning can be checked by  
turning the ADJ dial.  
When the DIAG menu is opened, a description of the  
warning will appear on the front panel LCD area and  
TV monitor. Also, when an abnormal operation is  
detected in this VTR, the AUTO OFF lamp lights up,  
and a message appears on the time code display  
area.  
DIAG menu  
This displays the VTR information.  
The VTR information includes the warning information  
and hour-meter (usage time) information. The DIAG  
menu appears on the front panel LCD display or on a  
TV monitor when the TV monitor is connected to the  
VIDEO OUT3 connector in the VTR’s connector area.  
∫Displaying the DIAG menu  
Press the DIAG button.  
The DIAG menu screen is now displayed on the  
TV monitor.  
1
The warning information is displayed by pressing  
2
(WARN) on the time code display area, and  
F1  
the hour-meter information is displayed by pressing  
(HOURS) on this area.  
F2  
The display of the hour-meter information is  
scrolled using the ADJ dial.  
To exit the DIAG menu, press any other direct  
menu button.  
3
ADJ dial  
2
EJECT  
XL/L/M-cassette  
Do not insert S-cassette  
without adapter  
POWER OFF  
ON  
CH1  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
CUE  
REMOTE  
50P  
CH CONDITION  
MONITOR FULL/FINE  
R
9P  
RS-232C  
L
HEADPHONES  
SHTL  
REV  
JOG  
VAR  
ADJUST  
PUSH-INTER  
HOME  
RF1  
TC  
RF2  
CUE  
ASSEM  
INSERT  
VIDEO UNITY  
FWD  
AUDIO UNITY DIAG  
MENU  
STAND BY PLAYER RECORDER INPUT CHECK  
SHIFT  
F1  
DEF  
F2  
F3  
F4  
F5  
F6  
SERVO  
PLAY  
REC INHIBIT  
REC  
ABC  
GHI  
9
EDIT  
REW  
AUDIO CH SELECT  
CH CH CH  
A
IN  
A
OUT  
7
JKL  
8
PREVIEW/  
REVIEW  
PRE-  
ROLL  
CH  
1
CH  
5
CH  
2
CH  
6
CH  
3
7
4
8
MNO PQRS  
4
5
6
3
T
BS  
ENT  
F
AUTO  
EDIT  
TUV WXYZ  
TRIM  
SET  
STOP  
FF  
1
0
2
PUSH  
LOCK  
IN  
OUT  
C
REC  
P8  
REC  
P8  
REC  
P8  
REC  
P8  
FULL  
FULL  
1
118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error messages  
If “T&S&M” has been selected as the setup menu item  
No.006 (DISPLAY SEL) setting, a message appears  
in the mode display area whenever a warning or error  
has occurred. When a multiple number of errors have  
occurred, the one with the highest priority is displayed.  
∫Displaying the hour-meter information  
¢
Turn the ADJ dial to move the cursor ( ), and the  
description for the item where the cursor is located is  
shown as a superimposed display.  
No./Item  
H00  
Description  
Priority  
Higher  
Display and description  
Error messages (see error message table): When any  
problem arises with the VTR’s operation, the AUTO OFF  
lamp lights, and an error message is displayed.  
Displays in 1-hour increments the time during  
which power has been supplied.  
OPERATION  
H01  
INT SG: If, when “INT SG” has been selected as the audio  
Displays in 1-hour increments the amount of  
time during which the drum has rotated.  
F1  
F1  
input setting by  
(VID IN) on the <VIDEO> menu or by the  
<AUDIO> or <AUDIO SHIFT1> menu, and the EDIT button is  
pressed, this message is displayed for the first two seconds  
when editing is started. In the same way, it is displayed for the  
first two seconds when recording is started.  
DRUM RUN  
H02  
Displays in 1-hour increments the amount of time during  
which the tape has been running in the FF, REW, PLAY,  
SEARCH (JOG, VAR and SHTL), REC and EDIT modes (but  
not in the JOG, VAR, SHTL or STILL mode).  
TAPE RUN  
H03  
NO INPUT: If, when input signals (but not analog audio  
signals) are not supplied to the input connector selected by  
Displays in 1-time increments the number of  
times the tape has been threaded (loaded) and  
unthreaded (unloaded).  
F1  
(VID IN) on the <VIDEO> menu or by the <AUDIO> or  
<AUDIO SHIFT1> menu, the EDIT button is pressed, this  
message is displayed for the first two seconds when editing  
is started. In the same way, it is displayed for the first two  
seconds when recording is started.  
THREADING  
H04  
Displays in 1-time increments the number of  
front loading operations.  
F LOADING  
H05  
Warning messages (see warning message table): When  
a warning occurs in this VTR, the warning lamp lights, and a  
warning message is displayed. When a multiple number of  
warnings have occurred, the one with the highest priority is  
displayed.  
Displays in 1-hour increments the amount of  
time during which the LCD monitor has lighted.  
LCD ON  
H11  
Lower  
Displays in 1-hour increments the amount of  
time during which the drum has rotated.  
(Can be reset.)  
DRUM RUNr  
H12  
Displays in 1-hour increments the amount of time  
during which the tape has been running in the FF,  
REW, PLAY, SEARCH (JOG, VAR and SHTL),  
REC and EDIT modes (but not in the JOG, VAR,  
SHTL or STILL mode). (Can be reset.)  
TAPE RUNr  
H13  
Displays in 1-time increments the number of  
times the tape has been threaded (loaded) and  
THREADINGr unthreaded (unloaded). (Can be reset.)  
H14  
Displays in 1-time increments the number of  
front loading operations.  
F LOADINGr  
H15  
(Can be reset.)  
Displays in 1-hour increments the amount of  
time during which the LCD monitor has lighted.  
(Can be reset.)  
LCD ON r  
H30  
Displays the number of times the power has  
been turned on.  
POWER ON  
<Note>  
The resettable table hour-meter information items will  
be reset by your dealer when maintenance or other  
work is performed.  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error messages  
Warning messages  
Error messages  
• Display  
• Description  
• Description  
• VTR operation and remedial action  
Display  
Priority  
Higher  
• VTR operation and remedial action  
If the rotational speed of the capstan motor is  
abnormally slow, the AUTO OFF lamp lights, and the  
message display blinks.  
CAP ROTA  
TOO SLOW  
FAN STOP  
This is displayed when the fan motor has stopped.  
VTR: Operation continues (and a warning beep is sounded  
regardless of the menu setting.)  
VTR: Stops.  
•
Set the POWER switch to OFF and then back to ON  
again.  
•
Check that no foreign matter has accumulated on the fan.  
NO RF  
If an abnormal tension is detected at the supply side in  
the capstan mode, the AUTO OFF lamp lights, and the  
message display blinks.  
CAP TENSION  
ERROR  
This is displayed when a blank part of the tape lasting for 1  
or more seconds has been detected during playback.  
When all of the following conditions have been met, it will be  
recognized as a blank part.  
VTR: Stops.  
•
Set the POWER switch to OFF and then back to ON  
again.  
•
•
•
When no signals are output from any of the heads  
When the playback data cannot be read  
When the CTL signal is not present  
When condensation has been detected, the AUTO OFF  
lamp lights, the message display blinks, and the VTR  
transfers to the EJECT mode. After the tape has been  
ejected, the drum continues to rotate in order to dry out  
the condensation.  
DEW  
VTR: Operation continues.  
•
Check the tape. An unrecorded tape may have been  
inserted.  
SERVO NOT LOCKED  
When the condensation has cleared, the AUTO OFF  
lamp goes off, the message display is cleared, and the  
VTR is ready for operation again.  
This is displayed when the servo is not locked for 3 or more  
seconds during playback, recording or editing.  
VTR: Operation continues.  
•
When condensation is detected in the EJECT mode,  
the drum starts rotating as soon as it is detected.  
When condensation is detected while a cassette is  
inserted, the drum stops rotating and starts rotating  
again after the tape has been ejected.  
•
Check the tape. A tape recorded using a system which  
does not allow playback may have been inserted  
.
•
INVALID TC MODE (in 23/24 Hz or 25 Hz (HD or SD)  
mode)  
This is displayed during playback if the time code has been  
recorded in the drop frame mode. The video output is  
disturbed and the audio output is muted at the time code  
drop point.  
VTR: EJECT  
Wait with the power on.  
•
If the rotational speed of the cylinder motor is  
abnormally high, the AUTO OFF lamp lights, and the  
message display blinks.  
DRUM ROTA  
TOO FAST  
VTR: Operation continues.  
•
Check the tape. If a tape recorded using a variable frame  
rate camera is to be played back in this VTR, the time  
code must be recorded in the non-drop frame mode.  
VTR: Stops.  
•
Set the POWER switch to OFF and then back to ON  
again.  
TC SEQUENCE UNMATCH (in 23/24 Hz or 25 Hz (HD or  
SD) mode)  
This is displayed during playback if the correlation between  
the active frame information and time code is irregular. The  
video output may not be uniform (the movements may not  
be smooth).  
If the rotational speed of the cylinder motor is  
abnormally slow, the AUTO OFF lamp lights, and the  
message display blinks.  
DRUM ROTA  
TOO SLOW  
VTR: Stops.  
•
Set the POWER switch to OFF and then back to ON  
again.  
VTR: Operation continues.  
If the tape start and tape end are detected at the same  
time either during or after loading, the AUTO OFF lamp  
lights, and the message display blinks.  
VTR: Stops.  
E-FF  
•
Check the tape. The active frame (first frame where the  
frame video is switched) information is recorded on a  
tape recorded using a variable frame rate camera. When  
such a tape is played back on this VTR, the 0 frame of  
the time code must be detected at the active frame  
position.  
•
Set the POWER switch to OFF and then back to ON  
again.  
If the take-up reel has turned without engaging the tape  
for a specific period of time during the tape start or end  
processing operation while loading is being performed  
(at the half position), the AUTO OFF lamp lights, and  
the message display blinks.  
FRONT LOAD  
ERROR  
LOW RF  
This is displayed when a state in which the envelope level  
has dropped to less than one-third of its normal level has  
been detected for 1 or more seconds or when a state in  
which the CTL signal level has dropped to less than one-  
sixth of its normal level has been detected for 1 or more  
seconds during playback, recording or editing.  
VTR: Stops.  
•
Set the POWER switch to OFF and then back to ON  
again.  
•
The CTL signal level is not detected during DV or  
DVCAM playback.  
•
During recording or editing, the envelope level of only the  
video simultaneous play heads is detected.  
VTR: Operation continues.  
Clean the video heads and A/C head.  
•
HIGH ERROR RATE  
This is displayed when the error rate increases and  
correction or interpolation is performed for either the video  
or audio signals.  
VTR: Operation continues.  
Lower  
•
Clean the video heads.  
120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Error messages  
Error messages  
• Description  
• VTR operation and remedial action  
• Description  
• VTR operation and remedial action  
Display  
Display  
If the cassette fails to move up even after 6 seconds  
have elapsed since the VTR transferred to the EJECT  
mode, the AUTO OFF lamp lights, and the message  
display blinks.  
When the tape start or end processing operation is not  
completed, the AUTO OFF lamp lights, and the  
message display blinks.  
FRONT LOAD  
MOTOR  
S-FF/REW  
TIMEOVER  
VTR: Stops.  
<Note>  
•
Set the POWER switch to OFF and then back to ON  
again.  
If the cassette fails to move down even after 6 seconds  
have elapsed since the cassette was inserted, the VTR  
transfers to the EJECT mode.  
If the supply reel motor rotates at an abnormally fast  
rate, the AUTO OFF lamp lights, and the message  
display blinks.  
VTR: Stops.  
•
S REEL ROTA  
TOO FAST  
VTR: Stops.  
•
Set the POWER switch to OFF and then back to ON  
again.  
Set the POWER switch to OFF and then back to ON  
again.  
If the unloading operation fails to be completed within 6  
seconds, the AUTO OFF lamp lights, and the message  
display blinks.  
LOADING  
MOTOR  
If an abnormal torque applied to the supply reel motor  
is detected or if an abnormal current flowing to the  
current-sensing resistor is detected, the AUTO OFF  
lamp lights, and the message display blinks.  
VTR: Stops.  
S REEL  
TORQUE ERR  
<Note>  
If the loading operation fails to be completed within 6  
seconds, the VTR transfers to the EJECT mode  
(unloading mode).  
•
Set the POWER switch to OFF and then back to ON  
again.  
VTR: Stops.  
•
Set the POWER switch to OFF and then back to ON  
again.  
If the take-up reel motor rotates at an abnormally fast  
rate, the AUTO OFF lamp lights, and the message  
display blinks.  
VTR: Stops.  
•
T REEL ROTA  
TOO FAST  
If the take-up reel motor is running in the reverse  
direction, the AUTO OFF lamp lights, and the message  
display blinks.  
REEL DIR  
UNMATCH  
Set the POWER switch to OFF and then back to ON  
again.  
VTR: Stops.  
•
Set the POWER switch to OFF and then back to ON  
again.  
If an abnormal torque applied to the take-up reel motor  
is detected, the AUTO OFF lamp lights, and the  
message display blinks.  
VTR: Stops.  
•
T REEL  
TORQUE ERR  
If an abnormal tension at the supply side is detected in  
the reel mode, the AUTO OFF lamp lights, and the  
message display blinks.  
REEL  
TENSION  
ERROR  
Set the POWER switch to OFF and then back to ON  
again.  
VTR: Stops.  
•
Set the POWER switch to OFF and then back to ON  
again.  
If the tape has not been wound up during unloading,  
the AUTO OFF lamp lights, and the message display  
blinks.  
VTR: Stops.  
UNLOAD  
ERROR  
When the servo microcomputer does not follow the  
instructions of the system control microcomputer even  
after 10 seconds have elapsed, the AUTO OFF lamp  
lights, and the message display blinks.  
SERVO COMM  
ERROR  
•
Set the POWER switch to OFF and then back to ON  
again.  
VTR: Stops.  
•
Set the POWER switch to OFF and then back to ON  
again.  
If, after the total tape amount has been detected, the  
amount of tape wound up onto the take-up reel and the  
amount of tape supplied by the supply reel differ to an  
abnormal extent while the tape is traveling, the AUTO  
OFF lamp lights, and the message display blinks.  
VTR: Stops.  
WINDUP  
ERROR  
When there is no response from the servo  
microcomputer for 1 or more seconds, the AUTO OFF  
lamp lights, and the message display blinks.  
VTR: Stops.  
SERVO  
CONTROL  
ERROR  
•
Set the POWER switch to OFF and then back to ON  
again.  
•
Set the POWER switch to OFF and then back to ON  
again.  
If, after the cassette has been inserted, the tape take-  
up reel has not wound up the tape while the total tape  
amount is not detected and while the tape is traveling,  
the AUTO OFF lamp lights, and the message display  
blinks.  
W-UP REEL  
NOT ROTA  
When only the servo microcomputer was reset in an  
instantaneous power failure, etc., the AUTO OFF lamp  
lights, and the message display blinks.  
VTR: Stops.  
SERVO  
ERROR  
•
Set the POWER switch to OFF and then back to ON  
again.  
VTR: Stops.  
•
Set the POWER switch to OFF and then back to ON  
again.  
If the error message display persists even after the  
VTR has been shut down and started up again,  
consult your dealer.  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RS-232C interface  
The VTR can be operated by commands when the  
RS-232C interface is used. (Refer to the command  
tables on page 125 and 126.)  
Hardware specifications  
External interface specifications  
• Connector pin specifications  
Connector: D-SUB 25-pin  
∫Condition for acknowledging  
commands from RS-232C interface  
Setup menu item No.204 (RS232C SEL): ON  
(crossover cable supported)  
If  
the  
above  
condition  
is  
not  
met,  
[ACK]+[STX]ER001[EXT] is returned to the external  
component. Whether [ACK] is returned depends on  
the setting which has been selected for setup menu  
item No.209 (RETURN ACK).  
Pin No.  
Signal  
Description  
1
2
FG  
Protective ground (frame ground)  
Received data (data is sent to PC)  
RXD  
3
TXD  
Transmitted data (data is received  
from PC)  
4
5
CTS  
RTS  
DTR  
SG  
Clear to send (shorted with pin 5)  
Request to send (shorted with pin 4)  
Data terminal ready (no processing)  
Signal ground  
6
7
20  
DSR  
Data set ready (+ voltage output after  
communication enable status)  
• Example of connection with controller (PC)  
(Using crossover cable with D-SUB 25-pin  
connectors)  
PC side  
(D-SUB 25-pin connector)  
VTR side  
FG  
1
2
3
4
5
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
FG  
TXD  
RXD  
RTS  
CTS  
DSR  
SG  
RXD  
TXD  
CTS  
RTS  
DTR  
SG  
6
7
DTR  
20  
20 DSR  
(Using crossover cable with D-SUB 9-pin and D-  
SUB 25-pin connectors)  
PC side  
(D-SUB 9-pin connector)  
VTR side  
RXD  
TXD  
DTR  
SG  
DSR  
RTS  
CTS  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
FG  
RXD  
TXD  
CTS  
RTS  
DTR  
SG  
20 DSR  
122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RS-232C interface  
2. Send format  
[controller (PC)  
Software specifications (protocol)  
>
VTR]  
Communication parameters  
1.  
∫ Data format  
Communication Asynchronous, full duplex  
system  
[STX] [command] [:]  
02h  
[data]  
.....  
[ETX]  
XX XX XX 3Ah XX XX 03h  
Transfer rate  
Bit length  
Stop bit  
300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800 or 9600 bps  
7 bits or 8 bits  
1 bit or 2 bits  
20H<XX<7FH  
(XX=ASCII code: symbols, numbers, upper-  
case letters)  
Parity bit  
ACK code  
None, odd or even  
Returned or not returned  
[command]:  
<Note>  
This is the command identifier (3 bytes).  
A 3-byte identifier (ASCII code: symbols,  
numbers, upper-case letters) is sent as the  
command.  
ACK is the code which is returned from the  
VTR to the controller when data has been  
successfully sent from the controller.  
The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.  
[:]  
The colon is the code serving as a delimiter  
between the command and data.  
Any changes to the settings can be made using the  
setup menu items listed below.  
[data]:  
Communication  
Setup menu item  
parameter  
Data (ASCII code: symbols, numbers, upper-  
case letters) can be added in the number of  
bytes required.  
Transfer rate  
Bit length  
Stop bit  
No.205 BAUD RATE  
No.206 DATA LENGTH  
No.207 STOP BIT  
∫ Outline of procedure for sending data from  
controller  
Parity bit  
ACK code  
No.208 PARITY  
1The send command starts with STX (start of  
text = 02h). The command is then identified  
by COMMAND which follows, and the data is  
added as required.  
No.209 RETURN ACK  
The command ends with ETX (end of text =  
03h).  
2When a different command is to be sent, a  
response is awaited from the VTR, and then  
the command is sent. (See page 124.)  
3If STX is sent again before ETX is sent, the  
receive data buffer inside the VTR is cleared.  
A command error is returned to the  
controller, and the data is newly processed  
with STX which was received again at the  
head.  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RS-232C interface  
3. Return format  
4. Error code table  
>
[VTR  
controller (PC)]  
ER001: Invalid command  
• Unsupported command received  
• Command execution error  
ER002: Parameter error  
The following responses are made to the  
commands. If necessary, more than one  
response is made.  
ER102: VTR mode error  
(front loading motor)  
∫ When the communication has ended  
successfully  
ER103: VTR mode error (loading motor)  
ER104: VTR mode error (drum, capstan system)  
ER105: VTR mode error (reel system)  
ER106: VTR mode error (tension system)  
ER108: VTR condensation error  
ER1FF: VTR system error  
1. The receive completion message is returned.  
[ACK]  
06h  
2. The execution completion message is  
returned.  
[STX] [command] [data]  
[ETX]  
03h  
.....  
02h  
XX XX XX  
XX XX  
[command]:  
This is the message (data) which is returned  
or the execution completion message  
identifier.  
[data]:  
This is the data to be returned. It can be  
omitted.  
Example:  
Send command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .  
Return message (data)  
[STX] OPL [ETX] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5  
[ACK] [STX] OPL [ETX]  
∫ When the communication has ended  
unsuccessfully  
[NACK]  
15h  
∫ When processing is not possible due to  
incorrect data or problem with the VTR  
1. The receive completion message is returned.  
[ACK]  
06h  
2. An error code is returned.  
[STX] [E R N1 N2 N3 ] [ETX]  
02h  
Error code  
03h  
124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RS-232C interface  
5. Command table  
VTR  
operation  
Return (completion)  
message  
Send command  
∫ Commands relating to operation control  
SHTL  
[STX] OSF:data [ETX]  
[STX] OSF [ETX]  
45  
FORWARD  
<Notes>  
This is the forward direction shuttle command.  
data = n: speed data  
• As the return (completion) message, [ACK] is  
returned when data is received, and only the  
execution message which is subsequently  
returned is listed in the table.  
0: STILL  
1:  
2:  
3:  
4:  
5:  
6:  
0.03  
0.1  
0.2  
0.5  
1
k
k
k
k
k
k
• If a command not listed in the table is received,  
ER001 (invalid command) is returned after  
[ACK].  
2.0  
(1.85 for formats other than  
k
DVCPROHD-LP)  
7:  
8:  
9:  
A:  
4.9  
k
VTR  
operation  
Return (completion)  
message  
9.8  
k
Send command  
[STX] OSP [ETX]  
16  
k
32  
k
STOP  
[STX] OSP [ETX]  
45  
<Note>  
The 16 and 32 speeds differ according to the  
setting selected for setup menu item No.101  
(SHTL MAX).  
k
k
This command is for stopping the tape transport.  
The resulting output picture and sound statuses  
differ according to the setting selected for the  
setup menu item No.105 (AUTO EE SEL).  
For details, refer to the setup menus.  
SHTL  
REVERSE  
[STX] OSR:data [ETX]  
[STX] OSR [ETX]  
45  
This is the reverse direction shuttle command.  
data = n: speed data  
EJECT  
[STX] OEJ [ETX]  
[STX] OEJ [ETX]  
45  
0: STILL  
This command is for ejecting the cassette tape.  
The resulting output picture and sound statuses  
differ according to the setting selected for the  
setup menu item No.105 (AUTO EE SEL).  
For details, refer to the setup menus.  
1:  
2:  
3:  
4:  
5:  
6:  
0.03  
0.1  
0.2  
0.5  
1
k
k
k
k
k
k
PLAY  
[STX] OPL [ETX]  
[STX] OPL [ETX]  
45  
2.0  
(1.85 for formats other than  
k
This command is for starting playback.  
DVCPROHD-LP)  
7:  
8:  
9:  
A:  
4.9  
k
REWIND  
[STX] ORW [ETX]  
[STX] ORW [ETX]  
45  
9.8  
k
16  
k
This command is for rewinding the tape. The  
resulting output picture and sound statuses differ  
according to the setting selected for the setup  
menu item No.105 (AUTO EE SEL).  
The maximum speed differs according to the  
setting selected for the setup menu item No.102  
(FF. REW MAX).  
32  
k
<Note>  
The 16 and 32 speeds differ according to the  
k
k
setting selected for setup menu item No.101  
(SHTL MAX).  
STANDBY  
OFF  
[STX] OBF [ETX]  
[STX] OBF [ETX]  
45  
For details, refer to the setup menus.  
This command is for setting the VTR to standby  
OFF.  
FAST  
FORWARD  
[STX] OFF [ETX]  
[STX] OFF [ETX]  
45  
This command is for fast forwarding the tape.  
The resulting output picture and sound statuses  
differ according to the setting selected for the  
setup menu item No.105 (AUTO EE SEL).  
The maximum speed differs according to the  
setting selected for the setup menu item No.102  
(FF. REW MAX).  
STANDBY ON  
[STX] OBN [ETX]  
[STX] OBN [ETX]  
45  
This command is for setting the VTR to standby  
ON.  
For details, refer to the setup menus.  
REC  
[STX] ORC [ETX]  
[STX] ORC [ETX]  
45  
This command is for starting recording.  
125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RS-232C interface  
∫ Commands relating to inquiries  
<Notes>  
• In terms of the return (completion) message,  
[ACK] is returned when data is received, and  
only the execution message which is  
subsequently returned is listed in the table.  
• In the case of commands not listed in the table  
below, ER001 (invalid command) is returned  
after [ACK].  
VTR  
operation  
Return (completion)  
message  
Send command  
[STX] QCD [ETX]  
CTL/TC DATA  
REQUEST  
[STX] CD data [ETX]  
45  
This command is for inquiring about the counter  
value.  
data = f w gh mm ss ff  
f
w
=
=
F
S
gh =  
With CTL:  
g
=
SP(20h): for a plus display  
(2Dh): for a minus display  
j
h
=
0 to 9:  
hours  
With TC:  
gh = 00 to 23: hours  
mm = 00 to 59: minutes  
ss = 00 to 59: seconds  
(525i system)  
ff  
=
00 to 29: frames  
<Note>  
CTL or TC is returned, whichever corresponds to  
the front display mode.  
STATUS  
REQUEST  
[STX] QOP [ETX]  
[STX]  
[ETX]  
222  
45  
This command is for inquiring about the VTR’s  
operation mode.  
= OEJ: EJECT  
222  
OFF: FAST FORWARD  
OPL: PLAY  
ORC: REC  
ORW: REWIND  
OSP: STOP (including STANDBY ON)  
SRS: (IN/OUT) PREROLL  
OBF: STAND BY OFF  
OSF: SHTL FORWARD  
OSR: SHTL REVERSE  
OJG: JOG FORWARD/REVERSE  
OSW: VAR FORWARD/REVERSE  
EAE: AUTO EDIT  
EON: EDIT ON (MANUAL EDIT)  
EPV: PREVIEW  
ERV: REVIEW  
ID (VTR No.)  
REQUEST  
[STX] QID [ETX]  
[STX] data [ETX]  
45  
This command is for inquiring about the VTR  
used.  
data = AJ-HD1700  
126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RS-232C interface  
∫ Microsoft QuickBASIC sample program  
CLS  
STX$ = CHR$(&H2): ETX$ = CHR$ (&H3): NAK$ = CHR$(15): ACK$ = CHR$(&H6)  
PRINT "*** RS-232C COMMUNICATION SAMPLE PROGRAM ***"  
PRINT "Type Command 'QUIT' to quit."  
PRINT  
REM *** Communication Port Initial & Open ***  
REM Port 1,9600Bps,No parity,8 bit data,1 stop bit  
OPEN "COM1:9600,N,8,1" FOR RANDOM AS #1 LEN = 256  
REM *** Input Command & Send Command ***  
SendCmd:  
INPUT "Input Command ="; SEND$  
IF SEND$ = "QUIT" THEN GOTO ProgEnd  
PRINT #1, STX$ + SEND$ + ETX$  
REM *** Wait for Receive Command ***  
WHILE LOC(1) = 0  
WAITKEY$ = INKEY$  
IF WAITKEY$ = "Q" THEN PRINT "*** Quit ***": GOTO ProgEnd  
WEND  
REM *** Receive Command ***  
RecvCmd:  
RECV$ = INPUT$(1, #1)  
IF RECV$ = STX$ THEN RECV$ = "[Stx]"  
IF RECV$ = ACK$ THEN RECV$ = "[Ack]"  
IF RECV$ = NAK$ THEN RECV$ = "[Nak]"  
IF RECV$ = ETX$ THEN BUFFER$ = BUFFER$ + "[Etx]": GOTO DispOut  
BUFFER$ = BUFFER$ + RECV$  
GOTO RecvCmd  
REM *** Output Receive Command ***  
DispOut:  
PRINT "Receive Command ="; BUFFER$  
PRINT  
BUFFER$ = ""  
GOTO SendCmd  
REM *** End Program ***  
ProgEnd:  
CLOSE  
END  
Microsoft QuickBASIC is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation.  
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connector signals  
VIDEO IN  
AUDIO OUT  
HD SERIAL IN  
(DIGITAL)  
AUDIO OUT  
(DIGITAL)  
BNC 1, active-through (BNC 1)  
BNC 4 (CH1/CH2, CH3/CH4, CH5/CH6,  
CH7/CH8), AES/EBU format  
k
k
k
HD REF IN  
BNC  
switch provided  
2, loop-through, 75™ termination  
k
AUDIO OUT  
(ANALOG)  
XLR 4 (CH1, CH2, CH3, CH4)  
k
SD REF IN  
BNC 2, loop-through, 75™ termination  
switch provided  
k
HD SERIAL OUT  
(DIGITAL)  
BNC  
BNC  
XLR  
XLR  
4
2
k
k
k
k
SD SERIAL IN  
(DIGITAL)  
BNC 1, active-through (BNC  
option)  
1) (board,  
k
k
SD SERIAL OUT  
(DIGITAL)  
SDTI IN  
BNC k 1 (board, option)  
CUE OUT  
1
TIME CODE OUT  
MONITOR OUT  
1
VIDEO OUT  
XLR 2 (L, R)  
k
HD SERIAL OUT  
(DIGITAL)  
BNC  
BNC  
BNC  
BNC  
BNC  
4
2
3
1
1
k
k
k
k
k
HEADPHONES  
(front)  
1/4-inch (6.5 mm)  
SD SERIAL OUT  
(DIGITAL)  
VIDEO OUT  
HD REF OUT  
SD REF OUT  
SDTI OUT  
RS-422A REMOTE (9P)  
REMOTE IN/OUT  
O
Pin No.  
Signal  
BNC 1 (board, option)  
k
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
FRAME GROUND  
TRANSMIT A  
RECEIVE B  
AUDIO IN  
RECEIVE COMMON  
====  
AUDIO IN  
(DIGITAL)  
BNC  
4 (CH1/CH2, CH3/CH4, CH5/CH6,  
k
CH7/CH8), AES/EBU format  
TRANSMIT COMMON  
TRANSMIT B  
AUDIO IN  
(ANALOG)  
XLR 4 (CH1, CH2, CH3, CH4)  
k
RECEIVE A  
HD SERIAL IN  
(DIGITAL)  
BNC 1, active-through (BNC 1)  
k
k
FRAME GROUND  
SD SERIAL IN  
(DIGITAL)  
BNC  
option)  
1, active-through (BNC  
1) (board,  
k
k
REMOTE OUT  
O
CUE IN  
XLR  
1
k
Pin No.  
Signal  
TIME CODE IN  
XLR  
1
k
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
FRAME GROUND  
RECEIVE A  
TRANSMIT B  
TRANSMIT COMMON  
====  
RECEIVE COMMON  
RECEIVE B  
TRANSMIT A  
FRAME GROUND  
128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connector signals  
PARALLEL REMOTE (50P)  
ENCODER REMOTE(15P)  
Refer to 50P IN/OUT ASSIGN on the function menu  
(page 75) for the connection pin signals.  
Pin No.  
Signal  
1
4
7
FRAME GROUND  
REM (G)  
RS-232C  
(D-SUB 25-pin, crossover cable supported)  
REM RX (X)  
REMOTE CONTROL PROTOCOL RECEIVE  
8
REM TX (X)  
REMOTE CONTROL PROTOCOL TRANSMIT  
Pin No.  
Signal  
Description  
1
2
FG  
Protective ground (frame ground)  
Received data (data is sent to PC)  
14  
15  
REM RX (Y)  
REMOTE CONTROL PROTOCOL RECEIVE  
RXD  
REM TX (Y)  
REMOTE CONTROL PROTOCOL TRANSMIT  
3
TXD  
Transmitted data (data is received  
from PC)  
4
5
CTS  
RTS  
DTR  
SG  
Clear to send (shorted with pin 5)  
Request to send (shorted with pin 4)  
Data terminal ready (no processing)  
Signal ground  
6
7
20  
DSR  
Data set ready (+ voltage output after  
communication enable status)  
Printed circuit boards  
F1 board (ADDA)  
H3 board (CUE)  
Switch No.  
SW1  
What is set  
Switch No.  
What is set  
AUDIO INPUT IMPEDANCE SW  
SW101  
CUE INPUT IMPEDANCE SW  
This sets the CH1 audio input impedance.  
This sets the CUE input impedance.  
HIGH/600™  
HIGH/600™  
SW101  
SW201  
SW301  
AUDIO INPUT IMPEDANCE SW  
This sets the CH2 audio input impedance.  
HIGH/600™  
AUDIO INPUT IMPEDANCE SW  
This sets the CH3 audio input impedance.  
CAUTION:  
HIGH/600™  
These servicing instructions are for use by  
qualified service personnel only. To reduce the  
risk of fire or electric shock do not perform any  
servicing other than that contained in the  
operating instructions unless you are qualified  
to do so.  
AUDIO INPUT IMPEDANCE SW  
This sets the CH4 audio input impedance.  
HIGH/600™  
The underlining (__) denotes the factory setting mode.  
129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
[GENERAL]  
Loading time:  
Approx. 4 sec.  
Audio split editing:  
Provided  
Power supply: AC 100–240V, 50–60 Hz (AJ-HD1700P)  
AC 100–240V, 50–60 Hz (AJ-HD1700E)  
Power consumption: 240W  
indicates the safety information.  
Operating ambient temperature:  
41xF to 104xF (5xC to 40xC)  
Operating ambient humidity:  
10% to 80% (no condensation)  
Weight:  
[VIDEO]  
Sampling frequencies:  
Y: 74.25 MHz, Pb/Pr: 37.125 MHz  
Quantizing:  
Approx. 48.4 lbs (22 kg)  
8 bits  
Dimensions (W k H k D):  
16-3/4 (max. 17-3/16 ) k 6-15/16 k 17-11/16 inches  
(not including supporting feet, jacks and connectors, JOG  
dial and fan)  
424 (max. 435.4) k 175.2 k 448.9 mm  
Recording format:  
Video compression method:  
DCT i variable length code  
Video compression rate:  
1/6.7  
Error correction:  
Reed-Solomon product code  
Video recording bit rate:  
100 Mbps  
DVCPRO HD-LP  
Video signals recorded:  
1080i (50/59.94/60 Hz switchable)  
720p (59.94/60 Hz switchable)  
480i/59.94 Hz  
576i/50 Hz (when optional board AJ-UC1700G is installed)  
Audio signals recorded:  
48 kHz, 16 bits, 8 channels  
Recording tracks:  
Video Input Connectors  
HD serial digital input:  
BNC k 1 (complies with SMPTE 292M standard),  
BNC k 1 (active-through)  
SD serial digital input (option):  
BNC k 1 (complies with SMPTE 259M-C standard),  
BNC k 1 (active-through)  
Digital video/audio:  
helical tracks  
(Time code is recorded in sub-code area.)  
Cue track:  
1 track  
Control track:  
1 track  
SDTI input (option):  
BNC k 1 (complies with SMPTE 305M/SMPTE 321M  
standards)*  
HD reference input:  
BNC k 2 (loop-through), 75™ ON/OFF selectable  
SD reference input:  
BNC k 2 (loop-through), 75™ ON/OFF selectable  
Tape speed:  
67.64 mm/sec. (in 59.94 Hz mode)  
67.70 mm/sec. (in 60 or 50 Hz mode)  
Tape used:  
Metal tape  
Recording time:  
126 minutes (using XL cassette)  
92 minutes (using L cassette)  
32 minutes (using M cassette)  
FF/REW time:  
Approx. 1 min. 30 sec. (when XL cassette is used and  
i100k or j100k speed is selected)  
Search speed:  
Video Output Connectors  
HD serial digital output:  
BNC k 3 (complies with SMPTE 292M standard),  
BNC k 1 (monitor output with superimposed display)  
SD serial digital output:  
BNC k 1 (complies with SMPTE 259M-C/SMPTE 294M  
standards),  
BNC k 1 (monitor output with superimposed display)  
SDTI output (option):  
BNC k 1 (complies with SMPTE 305M/SMPTE 321M  
d100k  
Digital slow:  
standards)  
j1k to i2k (when playing back tapes recorded using the  
DVCPRO HD-LP format)  
j1k to i1.1k (when playing back tapes recorded using  
any other format)  
Editing accuracy:  
d0 frames (when time code is used, in 50 Hz, 59.94 Hz or  
60 Hz mode)  
Tape timer accuracy:  
d1 frame (when continuous CTL signal is used)  
Servo lock time:  
HD reference output:  
BNC k 1  
SD reference output:  
BNC k 1  
Analog composite output:  
BNC k 3, VIDEO 1, VIDEO 2 (WFM OUT), VIDEO 3  
(superimposed ON/OFF), output during SD playback or  
during down-conversion  
* The optional AJ-UC1700G SD serial digital input board and  
optional AJ-YAC150P SDTI input board cannot be installed at  
the same time. Install one or the other.  
Less than 0.3 sec. (from standby ON)  
130  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
[VIDEO]  
[AUDIO]  
Video signal adjustment ranges  
• Component style  
HD/SD SDI, composite output Y gain:  
j¶ to i 3 dB  
Cue Track  
Frequency response:  
300 Hz to 6 kHz w3 dB  
HD/SD SDI, composite output Pb gain:  
j¶ to i 3 dB  
Audio Input Connectors  
Analog input (CH1 to CH4)  
HD/SD SDI, composite output Pr gain:  
j¶ to i 3 dB  
XLR k 4, 600™/high impedance (selectable), i4, 0, j20  
dBu selectable  
HD/SD SDI, composite output Y black level:  
w10%  
Digital input (CH1/CH2, CH3/CH4, CH5/CH6, CH7/CH8)  
BNC k 4, AES/EBU format  
• Composite style  
HD serial digital input  
HD/SD SDI, composite output video gain:  
j¶ to i 6 dB  
BNC k 1 (complies with SMPTE 292M/SMPTE 299M  
standards)  
HD/SD SDI, composite output chroma gain:  
j¶ to i 3 dB  
HD/SD SDI, composite output chroma phase (* ):  
w30x  
BNC k 1 (active-through)  
SD serial digital input (option)  
BNC k 1 (complies with SMPTE 259M-C/SMPTE 272M-A  
standards)  
1
HD/SD SDI, composite output Y setup:  
w10%  
• System phase  
BNC k 1 (active-through)  
Cue track input  
XLR k 1, 600™/high impedance (selectable), i4, 0, j20,  
HD SDI output system phase  
w5.5 H (w12100 sample, 13.5 nS step, 59/60Hz)  
(w14520 sample, 50/25Hz)  
j60 dBu selectable  
Audio output Connectors  
Analog output (CH1 to CH4)  
XLR k 4, low impedance, i4, 0, j20 dBu selectable  
Digital output (CH1/CH2, CH3/CH4, CH5/CH6, CH7/CH8)  
BNC k 4, AES/EBU format  
(w15125 sample, 23/24Hz)  
SD SDI output system phase  
w5.5 H (w9438 sample, 480i: 37nS step,  
480p: 54nS step)  
(w9504 sample, 576i)  
HD serial digital output  
Composite video output system phase  
w5.5 H (w9438 sample, 37nS step, 59Hz)  
(w9504 sample, 37nS step, 50Hz)  
Composite video output SC phase:  
w180x or more  
BNC k 4 (complies with SMPTE 292M/SMPTE 299M  
standards)  
SD serial digital output  
BNC k 2 (complies with SMPTE 259M-C/SMPTE  
294M/SMPTE 272M-A standards)  
Cue track output  
XLR k 1, low impedance (selectable), i4, 0, j20 dBu  
selectable  
*1: Only the SD SDI composite output of SD tape playback is valid  
in the 50 Hz or 25 Hz mode.  
Monitor output  
XLR k 2, low impedance (selectable), i4, 0, j20 dBu  
selectable  
[AUDIO]  
Headphone output  
1/4-inch phone (6.5 mm), 8™, variable level  
Digital Audio  
Sampling frequency:  
48 kHz (synchronized with video)  
Quantizing:  
Audio level adjustment range  
j¶ to i 12 dB  
16 bits  
Frequency response:  
20 Hz to 20 kHz w10 dB (at reference level)  
Dynamic range:  
Better than 90 dB (1 kHz, emphasis OFF)  
Distortion:  
Less than 0.05% (1 kHz, emphasis OFF, reference level)  
Crosstalk:  
Less than j80 dB (1 kHz, between 2 channels)  
Wow & flutter:  
Below measurable limit  
Headroom:  
20 dB (AJ-HD1700P)  
18 dB (AJ-HD1700E)  
131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
[OTHER INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNALS]  
Time code input  
XLR k 1, 0.5 to 8.0 Vp-p, 10 k™  
Time code output  
XLR k 1, low impedance  
2.0 w0.5 Vp-p, (with 600™ load)  
RS-422A input  
D-sub 9-pin, RS-422A interface  
RS-422A output  
D-sub 9-pin, RS-422A interface  
RS-232C  
D-sub 25-pin, RS-232C interface  
Parallel input/output  
D-sub 50-pin  
Encoder remote  
D-sub 15-pin  
[OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES]  
Rack-mounting adapters:  
AJ-MA75P  
SD-HD format converter board:  
AJ-UC1700G  
Encoder/decoder board supporting DVCPRO HD bank  
data:  
AJ-VNC150P  
SDTI interface board:  
AJ-YAC150P  
Weight and dimensions shown are approximate.  
Specifications are subject to change without notice.  
132  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PANASONIC BROADCAST & TELEVISION SYSTEMS COMPANY  
UNIT COMPANY OF MATSUSHITA ELECTRIC CORPORATION OF AMERICA  
Executive Office:  
One Panasonic Way 4E-7, Secaucus, NJ 07094 (201) 348-7000  
EASTERN ZONE:  
One Panasonic Way 4E-7, Secaucus, NJ 07094 (201) 348-7621  
Southeast Region:  
1225 Northbrook Parkway, Ste 1-160, Suwanee, GA 30024 (770) 338-6835  
Central Region:  
1707 N Randall Road E1-C-1, Elgin, IL 60123 (847) 468-5200  
WESTERN ZONE:  
3330 Cahuenga Blvd W., Los Angeles, CA 90068 (323) 436-3500  
Government Marketing Department:  
52 West Gude Drive, Rockville, MD 20850 (301) 738-3840  
Broadcast PARTS INFORMATION & ORDERING:  
9:00 a.m. – 5:00 p.m. (EST) (800) 334-4881/24 Hr. Fax (800) 334-4880  
Emergency after hour parts orders (800) 334-4881  
TECHNICAL SUPPORT:  
Emergency 24 Hour Service (800) 222-0741  
Panasonic Canada Inc.  
5770 Ambler Drive, Mississauga, Ontario L4W 2T3 (905) 624-5010  
Panasonic de Mexico S.A. de C.V.  
Av angel Urraza Num. 1209 Col. de Valle 03100 Mexico, D.F. (52) 1 951 2127  
Panasonic Sales Company  
Division of Matsushita Electric of Puerto Rico Inc.  
San Gabriel Industrial Park, 65th Infantry Ave., Km. 9.5, Carolina, Puerto Rico 00630 (787) 750-4300  
Panasonic Broadcast Europe  
Panasonic Broadcast Europe Ltd  
West Forest Gate, Wellington Road, Wokingham, Berkshire RG40 2AQ U.K. Tel: 0118 902 9200  
Panasonic Broadcast Europe GmbH  
Hagenauer Str. 43, 65203 Wiesbaden-Biebrich Deutschland Tel: 49-611-1816-0  
@ 32  
F0703H1  
Printed in Japan  
C 2003 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Milwaukee Power Screwdriver 6580 20 User Manual
Nikon Camera Flash SB 700 User Manual
Niles Audio Switch MS110 User Manual
Nortel Networks Computer Hardware 5380 User Manual
NuTone Switch VS 66WH User Manual
Oster Waffle Iron 3876 User Manual
Panasonic Air Cleaner F P15HU2 User Manual
Panasonic Battery Charger KX TCA391ALN User Manual
Panasonic Car Stereo System C9801W User Manual
Panasonic Cell Phone KX PRX120 User Manual